Skip to content

L
libvirt

openeuler / libvirt

通知 3
Star 0
Fork 0
L
libvirt

体验新版 GitCode，发现更多精彩内容 >>

切换分支/标签
查找文件 普通视图历史永久链接Permalink
formatdomain.html.in 357.3 KB
Newer Older
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1 
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
D
docs: switch to using HTML5 doctype declaration  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2 
<!DOCTYPE html>
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3 
<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
D
Split website out into one file per page. APply new layout and styling  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4 5 6 
  <body>
    <h1>Domain XML format</h1>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 
    <ul id="toc"></ul>

    <p>
      This section describes the XML format used to represent domains, there are
      variations on the format based on the kind of domains run and the options
      used to launch them. For hypervisor specific details consult the
      <a href="drivers.html">driver docs</a>
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
17 
    <h2><a id="elements">Element and attribute overview</a></h2>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 

    <p>
      The root element required for all virtual machines is
      named <code>domain</code>. It has two attributes, the
      <code>type</code> specifies the hypervisor used for running
      the domain. The allowed values are driver specific, but
      include "xen", "kvm", "qemu", "lxc" and "kqemu". The
      second attribute is <code>id</code> which is a unique
      integer identifier for the running guest machine. Inactive
      machines have no id value.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
31 
    <h3><a id="elementsMetadata">General metadata</a></h3>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
32
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
33 
<pre>
J
docs: Update the format of the generate metadata example  
John Ferlan 已提交
34 35 36 
&lt;domain type='kvm' id='1'&gt;
  &lt;name&gt;MyGuest&lt;/name&gt;
  &lt;uuid&gt;4dea22b3-1d52-d8f3-2516-782e98ab3fa0&lt;/uuid&gt;
J
conf: Add VM Generation ID parse/format support  
John Ferlan 已提交
37 
  &lt;genid&gt;43dc0cf8-809b-4adb-9bea-a9abb5f3d90e&lt;/genid&gt;
P
xml: Add element <title> to allow short description of domains  
Peter Krempa 已提交
38 
  &lt;title&gt;A short description - title - of the domain&lt;/title&gt;
C
docs: domain: Document <description> element  
Cole Robinson 已提交
39 
  &lt;description&gt;Some human readable description&lt;/description&gt;
E
metadata: group metadata next to description  
Eric Blake 已提交
40 41 42 43 
  &lt;metadata&gt;
    &lt;app1:foo xmlns:app1="http://app1.org/app1/"&gt;..&lt;/app1:foo&gt;
    &lt;app2:bar xmlns:app2="http://app1.org/app2/"&gt;..&lt;/app2:bar&gt;
  &lt;/metadata&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
44 
  ...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
45 46 47 48 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>name</code></dt>
      <dd>The content of the <code>name</code> element provides
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
49 50 51 52 53 
        a short name for the virtual machine. This name should
        consist only of alpha-numeric characters and is required
        to be unique within the scope of a single host. It is
        often used to form the filename for storing the persistent
        configuration file. <span class="since">Since 0.0.1</span></dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
54 55 
      <dt><code>uuid</code></dt>
      <dd>The content of the <code>uuid</code> element provides
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
56 
        a globally unique identifier for the virtual machine.
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
57 58 
        The format must be RFC 4122 compliant,
        eg <code>3e3fce45-4f53-4fa7-bb32-11f34168b82b</code>.
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
59 
        If omitted when defining/creating a new machine, a random
E
docs: document <sysinfo> and <smbios> elements  
Eric Blake 已提交
60 61 62 63 
        UUID is generated. It is also possible to provide the UUID
        via a <a href="#elementsSysinfo"><code>sysinfo</code></a>
        specification. <span class="since">Since 0.0.1, sysinfo
        since 0.8.7</span></dd>
C
docs: domain: Document <description> element  
Cole Robinson 已提交
64
J
conf: Add VM Generation ID parse/format support  
John Ferlan 已提交
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 
      <dt><code>genid</code></dt>
      <dd><span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span>, the <code>genid</code>
        element can be used to add a Virtual Machine Generation ID which
        exposes a 128-bit, cryptographically random, integer value identifier,
        referred to as a Globally Unique Identifier (GUID) using the same
        format as the <code>uuid</code>. The value is used to help notify
        the guest operating system when the virtual machine is re-executing
        something that has already executed before, such as:

        <ul>
          <li>VM starts executing a snapshot</li>
          <li>VM is recovered from backup</li>
          <li>VM is failover in a disaster recovery environment</li>
          <li>VM is imported, copied, or cloned</li>
        </ul>

        The guest operating system notices the change and is then able to
        react as appropriate by marking its copies of distributed databases
        as dirty, re-initializing its random number generator, etc.

        <p>
        The libvirt XML parser will accept both a provided GUID value
        or just &lt;genid/&gt; in which case a GUID will be generated
        and saved in the XML. For the transitions such as above, libvirt
        will change the GUID before re-executing.</p></dd>
P
xml: Add element <title> to allow short description of domains  
Peter Krempa 已提交
91 92 93 94 95 
      <dt><code>title</code></dt>
      <dd>The optional element <code>title</code> provides space for a
        short description of the domain. The title should not contain
        any newlines. <span class="since">Since 0.9.10</span>.</dd>
C
docs: domain: Document <description> element  
Cole Robinson 已提交
96 97 
      <dt><code>description</code></dt>
      <dd>The content of the <code>description</code> element provides a
E
metadata: group metadata next to description  
Eric Blake 已提交
98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 
        human readable description of the virtual machine. This data is not
        used by libvirt in any way, it can contain any information the user
        wants. <span class="since">Since 0.7.2</span></dd>

      <dt><code>metadata</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>metadata</code> node can be used by applications
        to store custom metadata in the form of XML
        nodes/trees. Applications must use custom namespaces on their
        XML nodes/trees, with only one top-level element per namespace
        (if the application needs structure, they should have
        sub-elements to their namespace
        element). <span class="since">Since 0.9.10</span></dd>
P
xml: Add element <title> to allow short description of domains  
Peter Krempa 已提交
110 
   </dl>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
111
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
112 
    <h3><a id="elementsOS">Operating system booting</a></h3>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
113 114 115 116 117 118 

    <p>
      There are a number of different ways to boot virtual machines
      each with their own pros and cons.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
119 
    <h4><a id="elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 

    <p>
      Booting via the BIOS is available for hypervisors supporting
      full virtualization. In this case the BIOS has a boot order
      priority (floppy, harddisk, cdrom, network) determining where
      to obtain/find the boot image.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
128 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 
...
&lt;os&gt;
  &lt;type&gt;hvm&lt;/type&gt;
  &lt;loader readonly='yes' secure='no' type='rom'&gt;/usr/lib/xen/boot/hvmloader&lt;/loader&gt;
  &lt;nvram template='/usr/share/OVMF/OVMF_VARS.fd'&gt;/var/lib/libvirt/nvram/guest_VARS.fd&lt;/nvram&gt;
  &lt;boot dev='hd'/&gt;
  &lt;boot dev='cdrom'/&gt;
  &lt;bootmenu enable='yes' timeout='3000'/&gt;
  &lt;smbios mode='sysinfo'/&gt;
  &lt;bios useserial='yes' rebootTimeout='0'/&gt;
&lt;/os&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
141 142 143 144 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>type</code></dt>
      <dd>The content of the <code>type</code> element specifies the
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
145 146 147 148 149 
        type of operating system to be booted in the virtual machine.
        <code>hvm</code> indicates that the OS is one designed to run
        on bare metal, so requires full virtualization. <code>linux</code>
        (badly named!) refers to an OS that supports the Xen 3 hypervisor
        guest ABI. There are also two optional attributes, <code>arch</code>
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
150 151 152 153 154 
        specifying the CPU architecture to virtualization,
        and <code>machine</code> referring to the machine
        type. The <a href="formatcaps.html">Capabilities XML</a>
        provides details on allowed values for
        these. <span class="since">Since 0.0.1</span></dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
155 
      <dt><code>loader</code></dt>
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
156 157 
      <dd>The optional <code>loader</code> tag refers to a firmware blob,
        which is specified by absolute path,
C
docs: update docs for setting the QEMU BIOS path  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
158 159 160 
        used to assist the domain creation process. It is used by Xen
        fully virtualized domains as well as setting the QEMU BIOS file
        path for QEMU/KVM domains. <span class="since">Xen since 0.1.0,
M
conf: Extend <loader/> and introduce <nvram/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 
        QEMU/KVM since 0.9.12</span> Then, <span class="since">since
        1.2.8</span> it's possible for the element to have two
        optional attributes: <code>readonly</code> (accepted values are
        <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>) to reflect the fact that the
        image should be writable or read-only. The second attribute
        <code>type</code> accepts values <code>rom</code> and
        <code>pflash</code>. It tells the hypervisor where in the guest
        memory the file should be mapped.  For instance, if the loader
        path points to an UEFI image, <code>type</code> should be
M
Introduce @secure attribute to os loader element  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
170 171 172 173 
        <code>pflash</code>. Moreover, some firmwares may
        implement the Secure boot feature. Attribute
        <code>secure</code> can be used then to control it.
        <span class="since">Since 2.1.0</span></dd>
M
conf: Extend <loader/> and introduce <nvram/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
174 175 
      <dt><code>nvram</code></dt>
      <dd>Some UEFI firmwares may want to use a non-volatile memory to store
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
176 177 178 179 
        some variables. In the host, this is represented as a file and the
        absolute path to the file is stored in this element. Moreover, when the
        domain is started up libvirt copies so called master NVRAM store file
        defined in <code>qemu.conf</code>. If needed, the <code>template</code>
M
qemu: Automatically create NVRAM store  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
180 
        attribute can be used to per domain override map of master NVRAM stores
M
docs: Document NVRAM behavior on transient domains  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
181 182 183 184 
        from the config file. Note, that for transient domains if the NVRAM file
        has been created by libvirt it is left behind and it is management
        application's responsibility to save and remove file (if needed to be
        persistent). <span class="since">Since 1.2.8</span></dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
185 186 
      <dt><code>boot</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>dev</code> attribute takes one of the values "fd", "hd",
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
187 188 
        "cdrom" or "network" and is used to specify the next boot device
        to consider. The <code>boot</code> element can be repeated multiple
J
docs: Enhance documentation of the old-style boot configuration  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 
        times to setup a priority list of boot devices to try in turn.
        Multiple devices of the same type are sorted according to their
        targets while preserving the order of buses. After defining the
        domain, its XML configuration returned by libvirt (through
        virDomainGetXMLDesc) lists devices in the sorted order. Once sorted,
        the first device is marked as bootable. Thus, e.g., a domain
        configured to boot from "hd" with vdb, hda, vda, and hdc disks
        assigned to it will boot from vda (the sorted list is vda, vdb, hda,
        hdc). Similar domain with hdc, vda, vdb, and hda disks will boot from
        hda (sorted disks are: hda, hdc, vda, vdb). It can be tricky to
        configure in the desired way, which is why per-device boot elements
        (see <a href="#elementsDisks">disks</a>,
J
Support booting from hostdev devices  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
201 
        <a href="#elementsNICS">network interfaces</a>, and
P
doc: Fix reference to #elementsUSB  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
202 
        <a href="#elementsHostDev">USB and PCI devices</a> sections below) were
J
docs: Enhance documentation of the old-style boot configuration  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
203 204 205 206 
        introduced and they are the preferred way providing full control over
        booting order. The <code>boot</code> element and per-device boot
        elements are mutually exclusive. <span class="since">Since 0.1.3,
        per-device boot since 0.8.8</span>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
207 
      </dd>
M
docs: Document some -boot option limitations on UEFI  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 
      <dt><code>smbios</code></dt>
      <dd>How to populate SMBIOS information visible in the guest.
        The <code>mode</code> attribute must be specified, and is either
        "emulate" (let the hypervisor generate all values), "host" (copy
        all of Block 0 and Block 1, except for the UUID, from the host's
        SMBIOS values;
        the <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-host.html#virConnectGetSysinfo">
        <code>virConnectGetSysinfo</code></a> call can be
        used to see what values are copied), or "sysinfo" (use the values in
        the <a href="#elementsSysinfo">sysinfo</a> element).  If not
        specified, the hypervisor default is used. <span class="since">
        Since 0.8.7</span>
      </dd>
  </dl>
      <p>Up till here the BIOS/UEFI configuration knobs are generic enough to
      be implemented by majority (if not all) firmwares out there. However,
      from now on not every single setting makes sense to all firmwares. For
      instance, <code>rebootTimeout</code> doesn't make sense for UEFI,
      <code>useserial</code> might not be usable with a BIOS firmware that
      doesn't produce any output onto serial line, etc. Moreover, firmwares
      don't usually export their capabilities for libvirt (or users) to check.
      And the set of their capabilities can change with every new release.
      Hence users are advised to try the settings they use before relying on
      them in production.</p>
  <dl>
C
qemu: Allow setting boot menu on/off  
Cole Robinson 已提交
233 234 235 236 237 
      <dt><code>bootmenu</code></dt>
      <dd> Whether or not to enable an interactive boot menu prompt on guest
      startup. The <code>enable</code> attribute can be either "yes" or "no".
      If not specified, the hypervisor default is used. <span class="since">
      Since 0.8.3</span>
M
docs, conf: add support for bootmenu timeout  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
238 239 
      Additional attribute <code>timeout</code> takes the number of milliseconds
      the boot menu should wait until it times out.  Allowed values are numbers
M
docs: fix bootmenu timeout description  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
240 241 
      in range [0, 65535] inclusive and it is ignored unless <code>enable</code>
      is set to "yes". <span class="since">Since 1.2.8</span>
C
qemu: Allow setting boot menu on/off  
Cole Robinson 已提交
242 
      </dd>
M
bios: Add support for SGA  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
243 244 245 246 247 248 
      <dt><code>bios</code></dt>
      <dd>This element has attribute <code>useserial</code> with possible
        values <code>yes</code> or <code>no</code>. It enables or disables
        Serial Graphics Adapter which allows users to see BIOS messages
        on a serial port. Therefore, one needs to have
        <a href="#elementCharSerial">serial port</a> defined.
M
Add support for reboot-timeout  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
249 250 251 252 253 254 255 
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.4</span>.
        <span class="since">Since 0.10.2 (QEMU only)</span> there is
        another attribute, <code>rebootTimeout</code> that controls
        whether and after how long the guest should start booting
        again in case the boot fails (according to BIOS). The value is
        in milliseconds with maximum of <code>65535</code> and special
        value <code>-1</code> disables the reboot.
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
256 
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
257 258 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
259 
    <h4><a id="elementsOSBootloader">Host bootloader</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
260 261 262 263 

    <p>
      Hypervisors employing paravirtualization do not usually emulate
      a BIOS, and instead the host is responsible to kicking off the
A
fix typos in docs  
Atsushi SAKAI 已提交
264 
      operating system boot. This may use a pseudo-bootloader in the
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
265 
      host to provide an interface to choose a kernel for the guest.
C
bhyve: Support /domain/bootloader configuration for non-FreeBSD guests.  
Conrad Meyer 已提交
266 267 268 
      An example is <code>pygrub</code> with Xen. The Bhyve hypervisor
      also uses a host bootloader, either <code>bhyveload</code> or
      <code>grub-bhyve</code>.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
269 270 
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
271 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
272 273 274 275 
...
&lt;bootloader&gt;/usr/bin/pygrub&lt;/bootloader&gt;
&lt;bootloader_args&gt;--append single&lt;/bootloader_args&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
276 277 278 279 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>bootloader</code></dt>
      <dd>The content of the <code>bootloader</code> element provides
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
280 281 282 283 
        a fully qualified path to the bootloader executable in the
        host OS. This bootloader will be run to choose which kernel
        to boot. The required output of the bootloader is dependent
        on the hypervisor in use. <span class="since">Since 0.1.0</span></dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
284 285 
      <dt><code>bootloader_args</code></dt>
      <dd>The optional <code>bootloader_args</code> element allows
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
286 287 288 
        command line arguments to be passed to the bootloader.
        <span class="since">Since 0.2.3</span>
        </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
289 290 291 

    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
292 
    <h4><a id="elementsOSKernel">Direct kernel boot</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 

    <p>
      When installing a new guest OS it is often useful to boot directly
      from a kernel and initrd stored in the host OS, allowing command
      line arguments to be passed directly to the installer. This capability
      is usually available for both para and full virtualized guests.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
301 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 
...
&lt;os&gt;
  &lt;type&gt;hvm&lt;/type&gt;
  &lt;loader&gt;/usr/lib/xen/boot/hvmloader&lt;/loader&gt;
  &lt;kernel&gt;/root/f8-i386-vmlinuz&lt;/kernel&gt;
  &lt;initrd&gt;/root/f8-i386-initrd&lt;/initrd&gt;
  &lt;cmdline&gt;console=ttyS0 ks=http://example.com/f8-i386/os/&lt;/cmdline&gt;
  &lt;dtb&gt;/root/ppc.dtb&lt;/dtb&gt;
  &lt;acpi&gt;
    &lt;table type='slic'&gt;/path/to/slic.dat&lt;/table&gt;
  &lt;/acpi&gt;
&lt;/os&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
315 316 317 318 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>type</code></dt>
      <dd>This element has the same semantics as described earlier in the
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
319 
        <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS boot section</a></dd>
D
"copy-paste" errors  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
320 
      <dt><code>loader</code></dt>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
321 
      <dd>This element has the same semantics as described earlier in the
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
322 
        <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS boot section</a></dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
323 324 
      <dt><code>kernel</code></dt>
      <dd>The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
325 
        to the kernel image in the host OS.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
326 327 
      <dt><code>initrd</code></dt>
      <dd>The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
328 
        to the (optional) ramdisk image in the host OS.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
329 330 
      <dt><code>cmdline</code></dt>
      <dd>The contents of this element specify arguments to be passed to
O
docs, comments: minor typo fixes  
Oskari Saarenmaa 已提交
331 
        the kernel (or installer) at boot time. This is often used to
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
332 333 
        specify an alternate primary console (eg serial port), or the
        installation media source / kickstart file</dd>
O
conf: support <dtb> tag in XML domain file  
Olivia Yin 已提交
334 335 336 337 
      <dt><code>dtb</code></dt>
      <dd>The contents of this element specify the fully-qualified path
        to the (optional) device tree binary (dtb) image in the host OS.
        <span class="since">Since 1.0.4</span></dd>
J
conf: add <acpi><table> to <os>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
338 339 340 341 342 
      <dt><code>acpi</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>table</code> element contains a fully-qualified path
        to the ACPI table. The <code>type</code> attribute contains the
        ACPI table type (currently only <code>slic</code> is supported)
        <span class="since">Since 1.3.5 (QEMU only)</span></dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
343 344 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
345 
    <h4><a id="elementsOSContainer">Container boot</a></h4>
D
Add support for setting init argv for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 

    <p>
      When booting a domain using container based virtualization, instead
      of a kernel / boot image, a path to the init binary is required, using
      the <code>init</code> element. By default this will be launched with
      no arguments. To specify the initial argv, use the <code>initarg</code>
      element, repeated as many time as is required. The <code>cmdline</code>
      element, if set will be used to provide an equivalent to <code>/proc/cmdline</code>
C
docs: fix a typo in formatdomain  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
354 
      but will not affect init argv.
D
Add support for setting init argv for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
355 
    </p>
C
lxc: allow defining environment variables  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
356 357 358 359 
    <p>
      To set environment variables, use the <code>initenv</code> element, one
      for each variable.
    </p>
C
lxc: allow user to specify command working directory  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
360 361 362 363 
    <p>
      To set a custom work directory for the init, use the <code>initdir</code>
      element.
    </p>
C
lxc: add possibility to define init uid/gid  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
364 365 366 367 368 369 370 
    <p>
      To run the init command as a given user or group, use the <code>inituser</code>
      or <code>initgroup</code> elements respectively. Both elements can be provided
      either a user (resp. group) id or a name. Prefixing the user or group id with
      a <code>+</code> will force it to be considered like a numeric value. Without
      this, it will be first tried as a user or group name.
    </p>
D
Add support for setting init argv for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
371 372 

    <pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
373 374 375 376 377 
&lt;os&gt;
  &lt;type arch='x86_64'&gt;exe&lt;/type&gt;
  &lt;init&gt;/bin/systemd&lt;/init&gt;
  &lt;initarg&gt;--unit&lt;/initarg&gt;
  &lt;initarg&gt;emergency.service&lt;/initarg&gt;
C
lxc: allow defining environment variables  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
378 
  &lt;initenv name='MYENV'&gt;some value&lt;/initenv&gt;
C
lxc: allow user to specify command working directory  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
379 
  &lt;initdir&gt;/my/custom/cwd&lt;/initdir&gt;
C
lxc: add possibility to define init uid/gid  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
380 381 
  &lt;inituser&gt;tester&lt;/inituser&gt;
  &lt;initgroup&gt;1000&lt;/initgroup&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
382 
&lt;/os&gt;
D
Add support for setting init argv for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
383 384 385 
    </pre>
G
LXC: Introduce New XML element for user namespace  
Gao feng 已提交
386 
    <p>
C
docs: grammar fixes in formatdomain  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
387 388 
      If you want to enable user namespace, set the <code>idmap</code> element.
      The <code>uid</code> and <code>gid</code> elements have three attributes:
G
LXC: Introduce New XML element for user namespace  
Gao feng 已提交
389 390 391 392 
    </p>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>start</code></dt>
C
LXC: emphasis uid start of idmap only accept '0' in docs  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
393 
      <dd>First user ID in container. It must be '0'.</dd>
G
LXC: Introduce New XML element for user namespace  
Gao feng 已提交
394 
      <dt><code>target</code></dt>
C
docs: grammar fixes in formatdomain  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
395 396 
      <dd>The first user ID in container will be mapped to this target user
          ID in host.</dd>
G
LXC: Introduce New XML element for user namespace  
Gao feng 已提交
397 
      <dt><code>count</code></dt>
C
docs: grammar fixes in formatdomain  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
398 
      <dd>How many users in container are allowed to map to host's user.</dd>
G
LXC: Introduce New XML element for user namespace  
Gao feng 已提交
399 400 401 
    </dl>

    <pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
402 403 404 405 
&lt;idmap&gt;
  &lt;uid start='0' target='1000' count='10'/&gt;
  &lt;gid start='0' target='1000' count='10'/&gt;
&lt;/idmap&gt;
G
LXC: Introduce New XML element for user namespace  
Gao feng 已提交
406 407 408 
    </pre>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
409 
    <h3><a id="elementsSysinfo">SMBIOS System Information</a></h3>
E
docs: document <sysinfo> and <smbios> elements  
Eric Blake 已提交
410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 

    <p>
      Some hypervisors allow control over what system information is
      presented to the guest (for example, SMBIOS fields can be
      populated by a hypervisor and inspected via
      the <code>dmidecode</code> command in the guest).  The
      optional <code>sysinfo</code> element covers all such categories
      of information. <span class="since">Since 0.8.7</span>
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
421 422 423 
...
&lt;os&gt;
  &lt;smbios mode='sysinfo'/&gt;
E
docs: document <sysinfo> and <smbios> elements  
Eric Blake 已提交
424 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 
&lt;/os&gt;
&lt;sysinfo type='smbios'&gt;
  &lt;bios&gt;
    &lt;entry name='vendor'&gt;LENOVO&lt;/entry&gt;
  &lt;/bios&gt;
  &lt;system&gt;
    &lt;entry name='manufacturer'&gt;Fedora&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='product'&gt;Virt-Manager&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='version'&gt;0.9.4&lt;/entry&gt;
  &lt;/system&gt;
  &lt;baseBoard&gt;
    &lt;entry name='manufacturer'&gt;LENOVO&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='product'&gt;20BE0061MC&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='version'&gt;0B98401 Pro&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='serial'&gt;W1KS427111E&lt;/entry&gt;
  &lt;/baseBoard&gt;
Z
conf: Add support for setting Chassis SMBIOS data fields  
Zhuang Yanying 已提交
441 442 443 444 445 446 447 
  &lt;chassis&gt;
    &lt;entry name='manufacturer'&gt;Dell Inc.&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='version'&gt;2.12&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='serial'&gt;65X0XF2&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='asset'&gt;40000101&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry name='sku'&gt;Type3Sku1&lt;/entry&gt;
  &lt;/chassis&gt;
D
conf: add support for setting OEM strings SMBIOS data fields  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
448 449 450 451 
  &lt;oemStrings&gt;
    &lt;entry&gt;myappname:some arbitrary data&lt;/entry&gt;
    &lt;entry&gt;otherappname:more arbitrary data&lt;/entry&gt;
  &lt;/oemStrings&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
452 453 
&lt;/sysinfo&gt;
...</pre>
E
docs: document <sysinfo> and <smbios> elements  
Eric Blake 已提交
454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 

    <p>
      The <code>sysinfo</code> element has a mandatory
      attribute <code>type</code> that determine the layout of
      sub-elements, with supported values of:
    </p>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>smbios</code></dt>
      <dd>Sub-elements call out specific SMBIOS values, which will
      affect the guest if used in conjunction with
      the <code>smbios</code> sub-element of
      the <a href="#elementsOS"><code>os</code></a> element.  Each
      sub-element of <code>sysinfo</code> names a SMBIOS block, and
      within those elements can be a list of <code>entry</code>
      elements that describe a field within the block.  The following
      blocks and entries are recognized:
        <dl>
          <dt><code>bios</code></dt>
          <dd>
J
docs: Fix/update syntax in Sysinfo/SMBIOS description  
John Ferlan 已提交
474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 
            This is block 0 of SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from:
            <dl>
               <dt><code>vendor</code></dt>
               <dd>BIOS Vendor's Name</dd>
               <dt><code>version</code></dt>
               <dd>BIOS Version</dd>
               <dt><code>date</code></dt>
               <dd>BIOS release date. If supplied, is in either mm/dd/yy or
                   mm/dd/yyyy format. If the year portion of the string is
                   two digits, the year is assumed to be 19yy.</dd>
               <dt><code>release</code></dt>
               <dd>System BIOS Major and Minor release number values
                   concatenated together as one string separated by
                   a period, for example, 10.22.</dd>
           </dl>
E
docs: document <sysinfo> and <smbios> elements  
Eric Blake 已提交
489 490 491 
          </dd>
          <dt><code>system</code></dt>
          <dd>
J
docs: Fix/update syntax in Sysinfo/SMBIOS description  
John Ferlan 已提交
492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 
            This is block 1 of SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from:
            <dl>
                <dt><code>manufacturer</code></dt>
                <dd>Manufacturer of BIOS</dd>
                <dt><code>product</code></dt>
                <dd>Product Name</dd>
                <dt><code>version</code></dt>
                <dd>Version of the product</dd>
                <dt><code>serial</code></dt>
                <dd>Serial number</dd>
                <dt><code>uuid</code></dt>
                <dd>Universal Unique ID number. If this entry is provided
                alongside a top-level
                <a href="#elementsMetadata"><code>uuid</code></a> element,
                then the two values must match.</dd>
                <dt><code>sku</code></dt>
                <dd>SKU number to identify a particular configuration.</dd>
                <dt><code>family</code></dt>
                <dd>Identify the family a particular computer belongs to.</dd>
            </dl>
M
virSysinfo: Introduce SMBIOS type 2 support  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 
          </dd>
          <dt><code>baseBoard</code></dt>
          <dd>
            This is block 2 of SMBIOS. This element can be repeated multiple
            times to describe all the base boards; however, not all
            hypervisors necessarily support the repetition. The element can
            have the following children:
            <dl>
                <dt><code>manufacturer</code></dt>
                <dd>Manufacturer of BIOS</dd>
                <dt><code>product</code></dt>
                <dd>Product Name</dd>
                <dt><code>version</code></dt>
                <dd>Version of the product</dd>
                <dt><code>serial</code></dt>
                <dd>Serial number</dd>
                <dt><code>asset</code></dt>
                <dd>Asset tag</dd>
                <dt><code>location</code></dt>
                <dd>Location in chassis</dd>
            </dl>
            NB: Incorrectly supplied entries for the
            <code>bios</code>, <code>system</code> or <code>baseBoard</code>
            blocks will be ignored without error.  Other than <code>uuid</code>
            validation and <code>date</code> format checking, all values are
            passed as strings to the hypervisor driver.
E
docs: document <sysinfo> and <smbios> elements  
Eric Blake 已提交
538 
          </dd>
Z
conf: Add support for setting Chassis SMBIOS data fields  
Zhuang Yanying 已提交
539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 
          <dt><code>chassis</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <span class="since">Since 4.1.0,</span> this is block 3 of
            SMBIOS, with entry names drawn from:
            <dl>
                <dt><code>manufacturer</code></dt>
                <dd>Manufacturer of Chassis</dd>
                <dt><code>version</code></dt>
                <dd>Version of the Chassis</dd>
                <dt><code>serial</code></dt>
                <dd>Serial number</dd>
                <dt><code>asset</code></dt>
                <dd>Asset tag</dd>
                <dt><code>sku</code></dt>
                <dd>SKU number</dd>
            </dl>
          </dd>
D
conf: add support for setting OEM strings SMBIOS data fields  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 
          <dt><code>oemStrings</code></dt>
          <dd>
            This is block 11 of SMBIOS. This element should appear once and
            can have multiple <code>entry</code> child elements, each providing
            arbitrary string data. There are no restrictions on what data can
            be provided in the entries, however, if the data is intended to be
            consumed by an application in the guest, it is recommended to use
            the application name as a prefix in the string. (<span class="since">Since 4.1.0</span>)
          </dd>
E
docs: document <sysinfo> and <smbios> elements  
Eric Blake 已提交
565 566 567 568 
        </dl>
      </dd>
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
569 
    <h3><a id="elementsCPUAllocation">CPU Allocation</a></h3>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
570
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
571 
<pre>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
572 
&lt;domain&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
573 
  ...
O
qemu: Support numad  
Osier Yang 已提交
574 
  &lt;vcpu placement='static' cpuset="1-4,^3,6" current="1"&gt;2&lt;/vcpu&gt;
P
conf: Add XML for individual vCPU hotplug  
Peter Krempa 已提交
575 576 577 578 
  &lt;vcpus&gt;
    &lt;vcpu id='0' enabled='yes' hotpluggable='no' order='1'/&gt;
    &lt;vcpu id='1' enabled='no' hotpluggable='yes'/&gt;
  &lt;/vcpus&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
579 580 581 
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
582 583 584 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>vcpu</code></dt>
E
vcpu: add current attribute to <vcpu> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
585 
      <dd>The content of this element defines the maximum number of virtual
E
vcpu: improve cpuset attribute  
Eric Blake 已提交
586 
        CPUs allocated for the guest OS, which must be between 1 and
J
formatdomain: Reformat vCPU description  
John Ferlan 已提交
587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 
        the maximum supported by the hypervisor.
        <dl>
         <dt><code>cpuset</code></dt>
         <dd>
           The optional attribute <code>cpuset</code> is a comma-separated
           list of physical CPU numbers that domain process and virtual CPUs
           can be pinned to by default. (NB: The pinning policy of domain
           process and virtual CPUs can be specified separately by
           <code>cputune</code>. If the attribute <code>emulatorpin</code>
           of <code>cputune</code> is specified, the <code>cpuset</code>
           specified by <code>vcpu</code> here will be ignored. Similarly,
           for virtual CPUs which have the <code>vcpupin</code> specified,
           the <code>cpuset</code> specified by <code>cpuset</code> here
           will be ignored. For virtual CPUs which don't have
           <code>vcpupin</code> specified, each will be pinned to the physical
           CPUs specified by <code>cpuset</code> here).
           Each element in that list is either a single CPU number,
           a range of CPU numbers, or a caret followed by a CPU number to
           be excluded from a previous range.
           <span class="since">Since 0.4.4</span>
         </dd>
         <dt><code>current</code></dt>
         <dd>
           The optional attribute <code>current</code> can
           be used to specify whether fewer than the maximum number of
           virtual CPUs should be enabled.
           <span class="since">Since 0.8.5</span>
         </dd>
         <dt><code>placement</code></dt>
         <dd>
           The optional attribute <code>placement</code> can be used to
           indicate the CPU placement mode for domain process. The value can
           be either "static" or "auto", but defaults to <code>placement</code>
           of <code>numatune</code> or "static" if <code>cpuset</code> is
           specified. Using "auto" indicates the domain process will be pinned
           to the advisory nodeset from querying numad and the value of
           attribute <code>cpuset</code> will be ignored if it's specified.
           If both <code>cpuset</code> and <code>placement</code> are not
           specified or if <code>placement</code> is "static", but no
           <code>cpuset</code> is specified, the domain process will be
           pinned to all the available physical CPUs.
           <span class="since">Since 0.9.11 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
         </dd>
        </dl>
E
vcpu: improve cpuset attribute  
Eric Blake 已提交
631 
      </dd>
P
conf: Add XML for individual vCPU hotplug  
Peter Krempa 已提交
632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 
      <dt><code>vcpus</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The vcpus element allows to control state of individual vcpus.

        The <code>id</code> attribute specifies the vCPU id as used by libvirt
        in other places such as vcpu pinning, scheduler information and NUMA
        assignment. Note that the vcpu ID as seen in the guest may differ from
        libvirt ID in certain cases. Valid IDs are from 0 to the maximum vcpu
        count as set by the <code>vcpu</code> element minus 1.

        The <code>enabled</code> attribute allows to control the state of the
        vcpu. Valid values are <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>.

        <code>hotpluggable</code> controls whether given vcpu can be hotplugged
        and hotunplugged in cases when the cpu is enabled at boot. Note that
        all disabled vcpus must be hotpluggable. Valid values are
        <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>.
P
doc: clarify documentation for vcpu order  
Peter Krempa 已提交
650 651 
        <code>order</code> allows to specify the order to add the online vcpus.
        For hypervisors/platforms that require to insert multiple vcpus at once
V
docs: Grammar and spelling fixes  
Ville Skyttä 已提交
652 
        the order may be duplicated across all vcpus that need to be
P
conf: Add XML for individual vCPU hotplug  
Peter Krempa 已提交
653 
        enabled at once. Specifying order is not necessary, vcpus are then
P
doc: clarify documentation for vcpu order  
Peter Krempa 已提交
654 
        added in an arbitrary order. If order info is used, it must be used for
P
qemu: vcpu: Clear vcpu order information rather than making it invalid  
Peter Krempa 已提交
655 656 
        all online vcpus. Hypervisors may clear or update ordering information
        during certain operations to assure valid configuration.
P
conf: Add XML for individual vCPU hotplug  
Peter Krempa 已提交
657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 

        Note that hypervisors may create hotpluggable vcpus differently from
        boot vcpus thus special initialization may be necessary.

        Hypervisors may require that vcpus enabled on boot which are not
        hotpluggable are clustered at the beginning starting with ID 0. It may
        be also required that vcpu 0 is always present and non-hotpluggable.

        Note that providing state for individual cpus may be necessary to enable
        support of addressable vCPU hotplug and this feature may not be
        supported by all hypervisors.
P
qemu: command: Add support for sparse vcpu topologies  
Peter Krempa 已提交
668 669 670 671 672 

        For QEMU the following conditions are required. Vcpu 0 needs to be
        enabled and non-hotpluggable. On PPC64 along with it vcpus that are in
        the same core need to be enabled as well. All non-hotpluggable cpus
        present at boot need to be grouped after vcpu 0.
P
conf: Add XML for individual vCPU hotplug  
Peter Krempa 已提交
673 674 
        <span class="since">Since 2.2.0 (QEMU only)</span>
      </dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
675 676 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
677 
    <h3><a id="elementsIOThreadsAllocation">IOThreads Allocation</a></h3>
J
domain_conf: Introduce iothreads XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 
      <p>
        IOThreads are dedicated event loop threads for supported disk
        devices to perform block I/O requests in order to improve
        scalability especially on an SMP host/guest with many LUNs.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.8 (QEMU only)</span>
      </p>

<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;iothreads&gt;4&lt;/iothreads&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
J
conf: Add new domain XML element 'iothreadids'  
John Ferlan 已提交
691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 
</pre>
<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;iothreadids&gt;
    &lt;iothread id="2"/&gt;
    &lt;iothread id="4"/&gt;
    &lt;iothread id="6"/&gt;
    &lt;iothread id="8"/&gt;
  &lt;/iothreadids&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
J
domain_conf: Introduce iothreads XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
703 704 705 706 707 708 709 
</pre>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>iothreads</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The content of this optional element defines the number
        of IOThreads to be assigned to the domain for use by
J
docs: clarify disk iothread support  
John Ferlan 已提交
710 
        supported target storage devices. There
B
qemu: Allow use of iothreads for virtio ccw disk definitions  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
711 712 
        should be only 1 or 2 IOThreads per host CPU. There may be more
        than one supported device assigned to each IOThread.
J
conf: Add new domain XML element 'iothreadids'  
John Ferlan 已提交
713 
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.8</span>
J
domain_conf: Introduce iothreads XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
714 
      </dd>
J
conf: Add new domain XML element 'iothreadids'  
John Ferlan 已提交
715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 
      <dt><code>iothreadids</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>iothreadids</code> element provides the capability
        to specifically define the IOThread ID's for the domain.  By default,
        IOThread ID's are sequentially numbered starting from 1 through the
        number of <code>iothreads</code> defined for the domain. The
        <code>id</code> attribute is used to define the IOThread ID. The
        <code>id</code> attribute must be a positive integer greater than 0.
        If there are less <code>iothreadids</code> defined than
        <code>iothreads</code> defined for the domain, then libvirt will
        sequentially fill <code>iothreadids</code> starting at 1 avoiding
        any predefined <code>id</code>. If there are more
        <code>iothreadids</code> defined than <code>iothreads</code>
        defined for the domain, then the <code>iothreads</code> value
        will be adjusted accordingly.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.15</span>
       </dd>
J
domain_conf: Introduce iothreads XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
732 
    </dl>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
733
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
734 
    <h3><a id="elementsCPUTuning">CPU Tuning</a></h3>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 

<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;cputune&gt;
    &lt;vcpupin vcpu="0" cpuset="1-4,^2"/&gt;
    &lt;vcpupin vcpu="1" cpuset="0,1"/&gt;
    &lt;vcpupin vcpu="2" cpuset="2,3"/&gt;
    &lt;vcpupin vcpu="3" cpuset="0,4"/&gt;
J
docs: Fix typo in CPU tuning  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
744 
    &lt;emulatorpin cpuset="1-3"/&gt;
J
domain_conf: Add iothreadpin to cputune  
John Ferlan 已提交
745 746 
    &lt;iothreadpin iothread="1" cpuset="5,6"/&gt;
    &lt;iothreadpin iothread="2" cpuset="7,8"/&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
747 748 749 
    &lt;shares&gt;2048&lt;/shares&gt;
    &lt;period&gt;1000000&lt;/period&gt;
    &lt;quota&gt;-1&lt;/quota&gt;
K
docs: formatdomain: add info about global_period and global_quota for cputune  
Katerina Koukiou 已提交
750 751 
    &lt;global_period&gt;1000000&lt;/global_period&gt;
    &lt;global_quota&gt;-1&lt;/global_quota&gt;
P
doc: Fix emulator pinning example in formatdomain.html  
Peter Krempa 已提交
752 753 
    &lt;emulator_period&gt;1000000&lt;/emulator_period&gt;
    &lt;emulator_quota&gt;-1&lt;/emulator_quota&gt;
J
conf: Add IOThread quota and period scheduler/cputune defs  
John Ferlan 已提交
754 755 
    &lt;iothread_period&gt;1000000&lt;/iothread_period&gt;
    &lt;iothread_quota&gt;-1&lt;/iothread_quota&gt;
M
docs, schema, conf: Add support for setting scheduler parameters of guest threads  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
756 757 
    &lt;vcpusched vcpus='0-4,^3' scheduler='fifo' priority='1'/&gt;
    &lt;iothreadsched iothreads='2' scheduler='batch'/&gt;
M
conf: Add support for cputune/cachetune  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
758 759 760 761 
    &lt;cachetune vcpus='0-3'&gt;
      &lt;cache id='0' level='3' type='both' size='3' unit='MiB'/&gt;
      &lt;cache id='1' level='3' type='both' size='3' unit='MiB'/&gt;
    &lt;/cachetune&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
762 763 764 765 766 767 
  &lt;/cputune&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>

    <dl>
O
cputune: Add document for cputune XML  
Osier Yang 已提交
768 
      <dt><code>cputune</code></dt>
O
docs: Fix documentation for cputune parameters  
Osier Yang 已提交
769 770 771 772 773 
      <dd>
         The optional <code>cputune</code> element provides details
         regarding the cpu tunable parameters for the domain.
         <span class="since">Since 0.9.0</span>
      </dd>
O
cputune: Add document for cputune XML  
Osier Yang 已提交
774 
      <dt><code>vcpupin</code></dt>
O
docs: Fix documentation for cputune parameters  
Osier Yang 已提交
775 
      <dd>
M
docs: CPU allocation and pinning clarification  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
776 
        The optional <code>vcpupin</code> element specifies which of host's
O
doc: Sort out the relationship between <vcpu>, <vcpupin>, and <emulatorpin>  
Osier Yang 已提交
777 778 779 780 781 782 783 
        physical CPUs the domain VCPU will be pinned to. If this is omitted,
        and attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code> is
        not specified, the vCPU is pinned to all the physical CPUs by default.
        It contains two required attributes, the attribute <code>vcpu</code>
        specifies vcpu id, and the attribute <code>cpuset</code> is same as
        attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code>.
        (NB: Only qemu driver support)
O
docs: Fix documentation for cputune parameters  
Osier Yang 已提交
784 785 
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.0</span>
       </dd>
T
Support emulatorpin xml parse.  
Tang Chen 已提交
786 787 788 
       <dt><code>emulatorpin</code></dt>
       <dd>
         The optional <code>emulatorpin</code> element specifies which of host
M
conf: Don't mangle vcpu placement randomly  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
789 790 
         physical CPUs the "emulator", a subset of a domain not including vcpu
         or iothreads will be pinned to. If this is omitted, and attribute
O
doc: Sort out the relationship between <vcpu>, <vcpupin>, and <emulatorpin>  
Osier Yang 已提交
791 792 793 
         <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code> is not specified,
         "emulator" is pinned to all the physical CPUs by default. It contains
         one required attribute <code>cpuset</code> specifying which physical
M
conf: Don't mangle vcpu placement randomly  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
794 
         CPUs to pin to.
T
Support emulatorpin xml parse.  
Tang Chen 已提交
795 
       </dd>
J
domain_conf: Add iothreadpin to cputune  
John Ferlan 已提交
796 797 798 799 800 801 802 
       <dt><code>iothreadpin</code></dt>
       <dd>
         The optional <code>iothreadpin</code> element specifies which of host
         physical CPUs the IOThreads will be pinned to. If this is omitted
         and attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code> is
         not specified, the IOThreads are pinned to all the physical CPUs
         by default. There are two required attributes, the attribute
J
Move iothreadspin information into iothreadids  
John Ferlan 已提交
803 804 805 806 807 
         <code>iothread</code> specifies the IOThread ID and the attribute
         <code>cpuset</code> specifying which physical CPUs to pin to. See
         the <code>iothreadids</code>
         <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>description</code></a>
         for valid <code>iothread</code> values.
J
domain_conf: Add iothreadpin to cputune  
John Ferlan 已提交
808 809 
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.9</span>
       </dd>
O
cputune: Add document for cputune XML  
Osier Yang 已提交
810 
      <dt><code>shares</code></dt>
O
docs: Fix documentation for cputune parameters  
Osier Yang 已提交
811 812 
      <dd>
        The optional <code>shares</code> element specifies the proportional
C
docs: fix 'omitted' typo in <cputune> doc  
Christophe Fergeau 已提交
813 
        weighted share for the domain. If this is omitted, it defaults to
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
814 815 816 
        the OS provided defaults. NB, There is no unit for the value,
        it's a relative measure based on the setting of other VM,
        e.g. A VM configured with value
O
docs: Fix documentation for cputune parameters  
Osier Yang 已提交
817 818 819 
        2048 will get twice as much CPU time as a VM configured with value 1024.
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.0</span>
      </dd>
W
doc: Add documentation for new cputune elements period and quota  
Wen Congyang 已提交
820 821 822 823 824 825 
      <dt><code>period</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>period</code> element specifies the enforcement
        interval(unit: microseconds). Within <code>period</code>, each vcpu of
        the domain will not be allowed to consume more than <code>quota</code>
        worth of runtime. The value should be in range [1000, 1000000]. A period
S
Update documentation for CPU quota/period support for LXC  
Sukadev Bhattiprolu 已提交
826 827 828 
        with value 0 means no value.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 0.9.4, LXC since
        0.9.10</span>
W
doc: Add documentation for new cputune elements period and quota  
Wen Congyang 已提交
829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>quota</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>quota</code> element specifies the maximum allowed
        bandwidth(unit: microseconds). A domain with <code>quota</code> as any
        negative value indicates that the domain has infinite bandwidth, which
        means that it is not bandwidth controlled. The value should be in range
        [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A quota with value 0 means no
        value. You can use this feature to ensure that all vcpus run at the same
S
Update documentation for CPU quota/period support for LXC  
Sukadev Bhattiprolu 已提交
838 839 840 
        speed.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 0.9.4, LXC since
        0.9.10</span>
W
doc: Add documentation for new cputune elements period and quota  
Wen Congyang 已提交
841 
      </dd>
K
docs: formatdomain: add info about global_period and global_quota for cputune  
Katerina Koukiou 已提交
842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 
      <dt><code>global_period</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>global_period</code> element specifies the
        enforcement CFS scheduler interval (unit: microseconds) for the whole
        domain in contrast with <code>period</code> which enforces the interval
        per vCPU. The value should be in range 1000, 1000000]. A
        <code>global_period</code> with value 0 means no value.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 1.3.3</span>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>global_quota</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>global_quota</code> element specifies the maximum
        allowed bandwidth (unit: microseconds) within a period for the whole
        domain. A domain with <code>global_quota</code> as any negative
        value indicates that the domain has infinite bandwidth, which means that
        it is not bandwidth controlled. The value should be in range
        [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A <code>global_quota</code>
        with value 0 means no value.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 1.3.3</span>
      </dd>
H
qemu: introduce period/quota tuning for emulator  
Hu Tao 已提交
862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 

      <dt><code>emulator_period</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>emulator_period</code> element specifies the enforcement
        interval(unit: microseconds). Within <code>emulator_period</code>, emulator
        threads(those excluding vcpus) of the domain will not be allowed to consume
        more than <code>emulator_quota</code> worth of runtime. The value should be
        in range [1000, 1000000]. A period with value 0 means no value.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 0.10.0</span>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>emulator_quota</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>emulator_quota</code> element specifies the maximum
        allowed bandwidth(unit: microseconds) for domain's emulator threads(those
        excluding vcpus). A domain with <code>emulator_quota</code> as any negative
        value indicates that the domain has infinite bandwidth for emulator threads
        (those excluding vcpus), which means that it is not bandwidth controlled.
        The value should be in range [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. A
        quota with value 0 means no value.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 0.10.0</span>
      </dd>
J
conf: Add IOThread quota and period scheduler/cputune defs  
John Ferlan 已提交
884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 
      <dt><code>iothread_period</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>iothread_period</code> element specifies the
        enforcement interval(unit: microseconds) for IOThreads. Within
        <code>iothread_period</code>, each IOThread of the domain will
        not be allowed to consume more than <code>iothread_quota</code>
        worth of runtime. The value should be in range [1000, 1000000].
        An iothread_period with value 0 means no value.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 2.1.0</span>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>iothread_quota</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>iothread_quota</code> element specifies the maximum
        allowed bandwidth(unit: microseconds) for IOThreads. A domain with
        <code>iothread_quota</code> as any negative value indicates that the
        domain IOThreads have infinite bandwidth, which means that it is
        not bandwidth controlled. The value should be in range
        [1000, 18446744073709551] or less than 0. An <code>iothread_quota</code>
        with value 0 means no value. You can use this feature to ensure that
        all IOThreads run at the same speed.
        <span class="since">Only QEMU driver support since 2.1.0</span>
      </dd>
M
docs, schema, conf: Add support for setting scheduler parameters of guest threads  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
907 908 909 910 911 912 
      <dt><code>vcpusched</code> and <code>iothreadsched</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>vcpusched</code> elements specifies the scheduler
        type (values <code>batch</code>, <code>idle</code>, <code>fifo</code>,
        <code>rr</code>) for particular vCPU/IOThread threads (based on
        <code>vcpus</code> and <code>iothreads</code>, leaving out
J
conf: Adjust the iothreadsched expectations  
John Ferlan 已提交
913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 
        <code>vcpus</code>/<code>iothreads</code> sets the default). Valid
        <code>vcpus</code> values start at 0 through one less than the
        number of vCPU's defined for the domain. Valid <code>iothreads</code>
        values are described in the <code>iothreadids</code>
        <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>description</code></a>.
        If no <code>iothreadids</code> are defined, then libvirt numbers
        IOThreads from 1 to the number of <code>iothreads</code> available
        for the domain. For real-time schedulers (<code>fifo</code>,
M
docs: Fix trivial copy-paste error  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
921 
        <code>rr</code>), priority must be specified as
J
conf: Adjust the iothreadsched expectations  
John Ferlan 已提交
922 923 
        well (and is ignored for non-real-time ones). The value range
        for the priority depends on the host kernel (usually 1-99).
M
docs: Fix version reference in vcpu/iothread scheduling  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
924 
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.13</span>
M
docs, schema, conf: Add support for setting scheduler parameters of guest threads  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
925 926 
      </dd>
M
conf: Add support for cputune/cachetune  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 
      <dt><code>cachetune</code><span class="since">Since 4.1.0</span></dt>
      <dd>
        Optional <code>cachetune</code> element can control allocations for CPU
        caches using the resctrl on the host. Whether or not is this supported
        can be gathered from capabilities where some limitations like minimum
        size and required granularity are reported as well. The required
        attribute <code>vcpus</code> specifies to which vCPUs this allocation
        applies. A vCPU can only be member of one <code>cachetune</code> element
        allocations. Supported subelements are:
        <dl>
          <dt><code>cache</code></dt>
          <dd>
            This element controls the allocation of CPU cache and has the
            following attributes:
            <dl>
              <dt><code>level</code></dt>
              <dd>
                Host cache level from which to allocate.
              </dd>
              <dt><code>id</code></dt>
              <dd>
                Host cache id from which to allocate.
              </dd>
              <dt><code>type</code></dt>
              <dd>
                Type of allocation. Can be <code>code</code> for code
                (instructions), <code>data</code> for data or <code>both</code>
                for both code and data (unified). Currently the allocation can
                be done only with the same type as the host supports, meaning
                you cannot request <code>both</code> for host with CDP
                (code/data prioritization) enabled.
              </dd>
              <dt><code>size</code></dt>
              <dd>
                The size of the region to allocate. The value by default is in
                bytes, but the <code>unit</code> attribute can be used to scale
                the value.
              </dd>
              <dt><code>unit</code> (optional)</dt>
              <dd>
                If specified it is the unit such as KiB, MiB, GiB, or TiB
                (described in the <code>memory</code> element
                for <a href="#elementsMemoryAllocation">Memory Allocation</a>)
                in which <code>size</code> is specified, defaults to bytes.
              </dd>
            </dl>
          </dd>
        </dl>

      </dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
977 978 979 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
980 
    <h3><a id="elementsMemoryAllocation">Memory Allocation</a></h3>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
981 982 983 984 

<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
P
conf: Add support for parsing and formatting max memory and slot count  
Peter Krempa 已提交
985 
  &lt;maxMemory slots='16' unit='KiB'&gt;1524288&lt;/maxMemory&gt;
E
xml: allow scaled memory on input  
Eric Blake 已提交
986 987 
  &lt;memory unit='KiB'&gt;524288&lt;/memory&gt;
  &lt;currentMemory unit='KiB'&gt;524288&lt;/currentMemory&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
988 989 990 991 992 993 
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>memory</code></dt>
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
994 995 996 
      <dd>The maximum allocation of memory for the guest at boot time. The
        memory allocation includes possible additional memory devices specified
        at start or hotplugged later.
E
xml: allow scaled memory on input  
Eric Blake 已提交
997 
        The units for this value are determined by the optional
Y
Fix some typos in messages, docs and comments.  
Yuri Chornoivan 已提交
998 
        attribute <code>unit</code>, which defaults to "KiB"
E
xml: allow scaled memory on input  
Eric Blake 已提交
999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 
        (kibibytes, 2<sup>10</sup> or blocks of 1024 bytes).  Valid
        units are "b" or "bytes" for bytes, "KB" for kilobytes
        (10<sup>3</sup> or 1,000 bytes), "k" or "KiB" for kibibytes
        (1024 bytes), "MB" for megabytes (10<sup>6</sup> or 1,000,000
        bytes), "M" or "MiB" for mebibytes (2<sup>20</sup> or
        1,048,576 bytes), "GB" for gigabytes (10<sup>9</sup> or
        1,000,000,000 bytes), "G" or "GiB" for gibibytes
        (2<sup>30</sup> or 1,073,741,824 bytes), "TB" for terabytes
        (10<sup>12</sup> or 1,000,000,000,000 bytes), or "T" or "TiB"
        for tebibytes (2<sup>40</sup> or 1,099,511,627,776 bytes).
        However, the value will be rounded up to the nearest kibibyte
        by libvirt, and may be further rounded to the granularity
        supported by the hypervisor.  Some hypervisors also enforce a
M
Add support for limiting guest coredump  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1012 1013 
        minimum, such as 4000KiB.
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
1014 1015 1016 
        In case <a href="#elementsCPU">NUMA</a> is configured for the guest the
        <code>memory</code> element can be omitted.
M
Add support for limiting guest coredump  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 
        In the case of crash, optional attribute <code>dumpCore</code>
        can be used to control whether the guest memory should be
        included in the generated coredump or not (values "on", "off").

        <span class='since'><code>unit</code> since 0.9.11</span>,
        <span class='since'><code>dumpCore</code> since 0.10.2
        (QEMU only)</span></dd>
P
conf: Add support for parsing and formatting max memory and slot count  
Peter Krempa 已提交
1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 
      <dt><code>maxMemory</code></dt>
      <dd>The run time maximum memory allocation of the guest. The initial
        memory specified by either the <code>&lt;memory&gt;</code> element or
        the NUMA cell size configuration can be increased by hot-plugging of
        memory to the limit specified by this element.

        The <code>unit</code> attribute behaves the same as for
        <code>&lt;memory&gt;</code>.

        The <code>slots</code> attribute specifies the number of slots
        available for adding memory to the guest. The bounds are hypervisor
        specific.

        Note that due to alignment of the memory chunks added via memory
        hotplug the full size allocation specified by this element may be
        impossible to achieve.
P
qemu: Implement setup of memory hotplug parameters  
Peter Krempa 已提交
1040 
        <span class='since'>Since 1.2.14 supported by the QEMU driver.</span>
P
conf: Add support for parsing and formatting max memory and slot count  
Peter Krempa 已提交
1041 1042 
      </dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1043 1044 1045 1046 
      <dt><code>currentMemory</code></dt>
      <dd>The actual allocation of memory for the guest. This value can
        be less than the maximum allocation, to allow for ballooning
        up the guests memory on the fly. If this is omitted, it defaults
E
xml: allow scaled memory on input  
Eric Blake 已提交
1047 1048 1049 
        to the same value as the <code>memory</code> element.
        The <code>unit</code> attribute behaves the same as
        for <code>memory</code>.</dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1050 1051 1052 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1053 
    <h3><a id="elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a></h3>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 

<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;memoryBacking&gt;
M
domain: Introduce ./hugepages/page/[@size, @unit, @nodeset]  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1059 1060 1061 
    &lt;hugepages&gt;
      &lt;page size="1" unit="G" nodeset="0-3,5"/&gt;
      &lt;page size="2" unit="M" nodeset="4"/&gt;
C
docs: fix an incorrect example for memoryBacking  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
1062 
    &lt;/hugepages&gt;
O
qemu: New XML to disable memory merge at guest startup  
Osier Yang 已提交
1063 
    &lt;nosharepages/&gt;
J
Add support for locking domain's memory pages  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1064 
    &lt;locked/&gt;
J
conf: Add new xml elements for file memorybacking support  
Jaroslav Safka 已提交
1065 1066 1067 
    &lt;source type="file|anonymous"/&gt;
    &lt;access mode="shared|private"/&gt;
    &lt;allocation mode="immediate|ondemand"/&gt;
M
conf: Introduce memoryBacking/discard  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1068 
    &lt;discard/&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 
  &lt;/memoryBacking&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>
J
Add support for locking domain's memory pages  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1074 1075 1076 1077 
    <p>The optional <code>memoryBacking</code> element may contain several
      elements that influence how virtual memory pages are backed by host
      pages.</p>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1078 
    <dl>
J
Add support for locking domain's memory pages  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1079 1080 
      <dt><code>hugepages</code></dt>
      <dd>This tells the hypervisor that the guest should have its memory
M
domain: Introduce ./hugepages/page/[@size, @unit, @nodeset]  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 
      allocated using hugepages instead of the normal native page size.
      <span class='since'>Since 1.2.5</span> it's possible to set hugepages
      more specifically per numa node. The <code>page</code> element is
      introduced. It has one compulsory attribute <code>size</code> which
      specifies which hugepages should be used (especially useful on systems
      supporting hugepages of different sizes). The default unit for the
      <code>size</code> attribute is kilobytes (multiplier of 1024). If you
      want to use different unit, use optional <code>unit</code> attribute.
      For systems with NUMA, the optional <code>nodeset</code> attribute may
      come handy as it ties given guest's NUMA nodes to certain hugepage
      sizes. From the example snippet, one gigabyte hugepages are used for
      every NUMA node except node number four. For the correct syntax see
      <a href="#elementsNUMATuning">this</a>.</dd>
J
Add support for locking domain's memory pages  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 
      <dt><code>nosharepages</code></dt>
      <dd>Instructs hypervisor to disable shared pages (memory merge, KSM) for
        this domain. <span class="since">Since 1.0.6</span></dd>
      <dt><code>locked</code></dt>
      <dd>When set and supported by the hypervisor, memory pages belonging
        to the domain will be locked in host's memory and the host will not
A
docs: Improve documentation related to memory locking  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 
        be allowed to swap them out, which might be required for some
        workloads such as real-time. For QEMU/KVM guests, the memory used by
        the QEMU process itself will be locked too: unlike guest memory, this
        is an amount libvirt has no way of figuring out in advance, so it has
        to remove the limit on locked memory altogether. Thus, enabling this
        option opens up to a potential security risk: the host will be unable
        to reclaim the locked memory back from the guest when it's running out
        of memory, which means a malicious guest allocating large amounts of
N
docs: Fix typo in memory backing section  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
1108 
        locked memory could cause a denial-of-service attack on the host.
A
docs: Improve documentation related to memory locking  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1109 
        Because of this, using this option is discouraged unless your workload
M
docs: Use proper article in formatdomain.html.in  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1110 
        demands it; even then, it's highly recommended to set a
A
docs: Improve documentation related to memory locking  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1111 1112 1113 1114 
        <code>hard_limit</code> (see
        <a href="#elementsMemoryTuning">memory tuning</a>) on memory allocation
        suitable for the specific environment at the same time to mitigate
        the risks described above. <span class="since">Since 1.0.6</span></dd>
J
conf: Add new xml elements for file memorybacking support  
Jaroslav Safka 已提交
1115 
       <dt><code>source</code></dt>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Wrap long lines  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1116 1117 
       <dd>In this attribute you can switch to file memorybacking or keep
         default anonymous.</dd>
J
conf: Add new xml elements for file memorybacking support  
Jaroslav Safka 已提交
1118 
       <dt><code>access</code></dt>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Wrap long lines  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1119 1120 
       <dd>Specify if memory is shared or private. This can be overridden per
         numa node by <code>memAccess</code></dd>
J
conf: Add new xml elements for file memorybacking support  
Jaroslav Safka 已提交
1121 1122 
       <dt><code>allocation</code></dt>
       <dd>Specify when allocate the memory</dd>
M
conf: Introduce memoryBacking/discard  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1123 1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 
       <dt><code>discard</code></dt>
       <dd>When set and supported by hypervisor the memory
         content is discarded just before guest shuts down (or
         when DIMM module is unplugged). Please note that this is
         just an optimization and is not guaranteed to work in
         all cases (e.g. when hypervisor crashes).
         <span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only)
       </dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1131 1132 1133 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1134 
    <h3><a id="elementsMemoryTuning">Memory Tuning</a></h3>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 

<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;memtune&gt;
E
xml: allow scaled memory on input  
Eric Blake 已提交
1140 1141 1142 1143 
    &lt;hard_limit unit='G'&gt;1&lt;/hard_limit&gt;
    &lt;soft_limit unit='M'&gt;128&lt;/soft_limit&gt;
    &lt;swap_hard_limit unit='G'&gt;2&lt;/swap_hard_limit&gt;
    &lt;min_guarantee unit='bytes'&gt;67108864&lt;/min_guarantee&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 
  &lt;/memtune&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>memtune</code></dt>
      <dd> The optional <code>memtune</code> element provides details
        regarding the memory tunable parameters for the domain. If this is
        omitted, it defaults to the OS provided defaults. For QEMU/KVM, the
        parameters are applied to the QEMU process as a whole. Thus, when
        counting them, one needs to add up guest RAM, guest video RAM, and
        some memory overhead of QEMU itself. The last piece is hard to
E
xml: allow scaled memory on input  
Eric Blake 已提交
1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 
        determine so one needs guess and try.  For each tunable, it
        is possible to designate which unit the number is in on
        input, using the same values as
        for <code>&lt;memory&gt;</code>.  For backwards
        compatibility, output is always in
        KiB.  <span class='since'><code>unit</code>
P
memtune: change the way how we store unlimited value  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
1163 1164 1165 
        since 0.9.11</span>
        Possible values for all *_limit parameters are in range from 0 to
        VIR_DOMAIN_MEMORY_PARAM_UNLIMITED.</dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1166 1167 
      <dt><code>hard_limit</code></dt>
      <dd> The optional <code>hard_limit</code> element is the maximum memory
E
docs: use correct terminology for 1024 bytes  
Eric Blake 已提交
1168 
        the guest can use. The units for this value are kibibytes (i.e. blocks
A
docs: Improve documentation related to memory locking  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1169 1170 1171 
        of 1024 bytes). Users of QEMU and KVM are strongly advised not to set
        this limit as domain may get killed by the kernel if the guess is too
        low, and determining the memory needed for a process to run is an
M
docs: Discourage users to set hard_limit  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1172 
        <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Undecidable_problem">
A
docs: Improve documentation related to memory locking  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180 
        undecidable problem</a>; that said, if you already set
        <code>locked</code> in
        <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">memory backing</a> because your
        workload demands it, you'll have to take into account the specifics of
        your deployment and figure out a value for <code>hard_limit</code> that
        balances the risk of your guest being killed because the limit was set
        too low and the risk of your host crashing because it cannot reclaim
        the memory used by the guest due to <code>locked</code>. Good luck!</dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1181 1182 1183 
      <dt><code>soft_limit</code></dt>
      <dd> The optional <code>soft_limit</code> element is the memory limit to
        enforce during memory contention. The units for this value are
E
docs: use correct terminology for 1024 bytes  
Eric Blake 已提交
1184 
        kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes)</dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1185 1186 1187 
      <dt><code>swap_hard_limit</code></dt>
      <dd> The optional <code>swap_hard_limit</code> element is the maximum
        memory plus swap the guest can use. The units for this value are
E
docs: use correct terminology for 1024 bytes  
Eric Blake 已提交
1188 
        kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes). This has to be more than
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1189 1190 1191 1192 
        hard_limit value provided</dd>
      <dt><code>min_guarantee</code></dt>
      <dd> The optional <code>min_guarantee</code> element is the guaranteed
        minimum memory allocation for the guest. The units for this value are
E
qemu: min_guarantee: Parameter 'min_guarantee' not supported  
Erik Skultety 已提交
1193 1194 
        kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes). This element is only supported
        by VMware ESX and OpenVZ drivers.</dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1195 1196 1197 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1198 
    <h3><a id="elementsNUMATuning">NUMA Node Tuning</a></h3>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1199 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 

<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;numatune&gt;
    &lt;memory mode="strict" nodeset="1-4,^3"/&gt;
M
conf, schema: add support for memnode elements  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1205 1206 
    &lt;memnode cellid="0" mode="strict" nodeset="1"/&gt;
    &lt;memnode cellid="2" mode="preferred" nodeset="2"/&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 
  &lt;/numatune&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>

    <dl>
O
numatune: Add doc for new numatune XML  
Osier Yang 已提交
1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 
      <dt><code>numatune</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>numatune</code> element provides details of
        how to tune the performance of a NUMA host via controlling NUMA policy
        for domain process. NB, only supported by QEMU driver.
        <span class='since'>Since 0.9.3</span>
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1219 
      </dd>
O
numatune: Add doc for new numatune XML  
Osier Yang 已提交
1220 1221 
      <dt><code>memory</code></dt>
      <dd>
O
qemu: Support numad  
Osier Yang 已提交
1222 
        The optional <code>memory</code> element specifies how to allocate memory
O
numad: Set memory policy from numad advisory nodeset  
Osier Yang 已提交
1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 
        for the domain process on a NUMA host. It contains several optional
        attributes. Attribute <code>mode</code> is either 'interleave',
        'strict', or 'preferred', defaults to 'strict'. Attribute
        <code>nodeset</code> specifies the NUMA nodes, using the same syntax as
        attribute <code>cpuset</code> of element <code>vcpu</code>. Attribute
        <code>placement</code> (<span class='since'>since 0.9.12</span>) can be
        used to indicate the memory placement mode for domain process, its value
        can be either "static" or "auto", defaults to <code>placement</code> of
        <code>vcpu</code>, or "static" if <code>nodeset</code> is specified.
        "auto" indicates the domain process will only allocate memory from the
        advisory nodeset returned from querying numad, and the value of attribute
        <code>nodeset</code> will be ignored if it's specified.

        If <code>placement</code> of <code>vcpu</code> is 'auto', and
        <code>numatune</code> is not specified, a default <code>numatune</code>
        with <code>placement</code> 'auto' and <code>mode</code> 'strict' will
        be added implicitly.
O
numatune: Add doc for new numatune XML  
Osier Yang 已提交
1241 1242 
        <span class='since'>Since 0.9.3</span>
      </dd>
M
conf, schema: add support for memnode elements  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 
      <dt><code>memnode</code></dt>
      <dd>
        Optional <code>memnode</code> elements can specify memory allocation
        policies per each guest NUMA node.  For those nodes having no
        corresponding <code>memnode</code> element, the default from
        element <code>memory</code> will be used.  Attribute <code>cellid</code>
        addresses guest NUMA node for which the settings are applied.
        Attributes <code>mode</code> and <code>nodeset</code> have the same
        meaning and syntax as in <code>memory</code> element.

        This setting is not compatible with automatic placement.
        <span class='since'>QEMU Since 1.2.7</span>
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1256 1257 
    </dl>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1258
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1259 
    <h3><a id="elementsBlockTuning">Block I/O Tuning</a></h3>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 
<pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;blkiotune&gt;
    &lt;weight&gt;800&lt;/weight&gt;
H
blkiotune: add interface for blkiotune.device_weight  
Hu Tao 已提交
1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 
    &lt;device&gt;
      &lt;path&gt;/dev/sda&lt;/path&gt;
      &lt;weight&gt;1000&lt;/weight&gt;
    &lt;/device&gt;
    &lt;device&gt;
      &lt;path&gt;/dev/sdb&lt;/path&gt;
      &lt;weight&gt;500&lt;/weight&gt;
C
docs: domain: document blkiotune {read, write}_{bytes, iops}_sec  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1272 1273 1274 1275 
      &lt;read_bytes_sec&gt;10000&lt;/read_bytes_sec&gt;
      &lt;write_bytes_sec&gt;10000&lt;/write_bytes_sec&gt;
      &lt;read_iops_sec&gt;20000&lt;/read_iops_sec&gt;
      &lt;write_iops_sec&gt;20000&lt;/write_iops_sec&gt;
H
blkiotune: add interface for blkiotune.device_weight  
Hu Tao 已提交
1276 
    &lt;/device&gt;
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 
  &lt;/blkiotune&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>blkiotune</code></dt>
      <dd> The optional <code>blkiotune</code> element provides the ability
        to tune Blkio cgroup tunable parameters for the domain. If this is
H
blkiotune: add interface for blkiotune.device_weight  
Hu Tao 已提交
1286 1287 
        omitted, it defaults to the OS provided
        defaults. <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span></dd>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1288 
      <dt><code>weight</code></dt>
H
blkiotune: add interface for blkiotune.device_weight  
Hu Tao 已提交
1289 1290 
      <dd> The optional <code>weight</code> element is the overall I/O
        weight of the guest. The value should be in the range [100,
C
docs: change the minimum weight description for blkio  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
1291 1292 
        1000]. After kernel 2.6.39, the value could be in the
        range [10, 1000].</dd>
H
blkiotune: add interface for blkiotune.device_weight  
Hu Tao 已提交
1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 
      <dt><code>device</code></dt>
      <dd>The domain may have multiple <code>device</code> elements
        that further tune the weights for each host block device in
        use by the domain.  Note that
        multiple <a href="#elementsDisks">guest disks</a> can share a
        single host block device, if they are backed by files within
        the same host file system, which is why this tuning parameter
        is at the global domain level rather than associated with each
L
Support block I/O throttle in XML  
Lei Li 已提交
1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 
        guest disk device (contrast this to
        the <a href="#elementsDisks"><code>&lt;iotune&gt;</code></a>
        element which can apply to an
        individual <code>&lt;disk&gt;</code>).
        Each <code>device</code> element has two
H
blkiotune: add interface for blkiotune.device_weight  
Hu Tao 已提交
1306 1307 1308 
        mandatory sub-elements, <code>path</code> describing the
        absolute path of the device, and <code>weight</code> giving
        the relative weight of that device, in the range [100,
C
docs: change the minimum weight description for blkio  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
1309 
        1000]. After kernel 2.6.39, the value could be in the
C
docs: domain: document blkiotune {read, write}_{bytes, iops}_sec  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1310 1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325 
        range [10, 1000]. <span class="since">Since 0.9.8</span><br/>
        Additionally, the following optional sub-elements can be used:
        <dl>
          <dt><code>read_bytes_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>Read throughput limit in bytes per second.
            <span class="since">Since 1.2.2</span></dd>
          <dt><code>write_bytes_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>Write throughput limit in bytes per second.
            <span class="since">Since 1.2.2</span></dd>
          <dt><code>read_iops_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>Read I/O operations per second limit.
            <span class="since">Since 1.2.2</span></dd>
          <dt><code>write_iops_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>Write I/O operations per second limit.
            <span class="since">Since 1.2.2</span></dd>
      </dl></dd></dl>
C
docs: Break up 'Basic Resources' XML section  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1326 1327
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1328 
    <h3><a id="resPartition">Resource partitioning</a></h3>
D
Add XML config for resource partitions  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 

    <p>
      Hypervisors may allow for virtual machines to be placed into
      resource partitions, potentially with nesting of said partitions.
      The <code>resource</code> element groups together configuration
      related to resource partitioning. It currently supports a child
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
1335 
      element <code>partition</code> whose content defines the absolute path
D
Add XML config for resource partitions  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 
      of the resource partition in which to place the domain. If no
      partition is listed, then the domain will be placed in a default
      partition. It is the responsibility of the app/admin to ensure
      that the partition exists prior to starting the guest. Only the
      (hypervisor specific) default partition can be assumed to exist
      by default.
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1344 1345 1346 1347 1348 
...
&lt;resource&gt;
  &lt;partition&gt;/virtualmachines/production&lt;/partition&gt;
&lt;/resource&gt;
...
D
Add XML config for resource partitions  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1349 1350 1351 1352 
</pre>

    <p>
      Resource partitions are currently supported by the QEMU and
E
docs: fix usage of 'onto'  
Eric Blake 已提交
1353 
      LXC drivers, which map partition paths to cgroups directories,
D
Add XML config for resource partitions  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1354 1355 1356 
      in all mounted controllers. <span class="since">Since 1.0.5</span>
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1357 
    <h3><a id="elementsCPU">CPU model and topology</a></h3>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364 

    <p>
      Requirements for CPU model, its features and topology can be specified
      using the following collection of elements.
      <span class="since">Since 0.7.5</span>
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
1365 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 
...
&lt;cpu match='exact'&gt;
  &lt;model fallback='allow'&gt;core2duo&lt;/model&gt;
  &lt;vendor&gt;Intel&lt;/vendor&gt;
  &lt;topology sockets='1' cores='2' threads='1'/&gt;
J
Add support for CPU cache specification  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1371 
  &lt;cache level='3' mode='emulate'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1372 1373 1374 
  &lt;feature policy='disable' name='lahf_lm'/&gt;
&lt;/cpu&gt;
...</pre>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1375
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1376 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1377 1378 1379 1380 1381 
&lt;cpu mode='host-model'&gt;
  &lt;model fallback='forbid'/&gt;
  &lt;topology sockets='1' cores='2' threads='1'/&gt;
&lt;/cpu&gt;
...</pre>
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1382 1383 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1384 
&lt;cpu mode='host-passthrough'&gt;
J
Add support for CPU cache specification  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1385 
  &lt;cache mode='passthrough'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1386 1387 
  &lt;feature policy='disable' name='lahf_lm'/&gt;
...</pre>
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1388
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 
    <p>
      In case no restrictions need to be put on CPU model and its features, a
      simpler <code>cpu</code> element can be used.
      <span class="since">Since 0.7.6</span>
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
1395 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1396 1397 1398 1399 1400 
...
&lt;cpu&gt;
  &lt;topology sockets='1' cores='2' threads='1'/&gt;
&lt;/cpu&gt;
...</pre>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1401 1402 1403 1404 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>cpu</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>cpu</code> element is the main container for describing
J
docs: Clarify /domain/cpu/@match description  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1405 1406 
        guest CPU requirements. Its <code>match</code> attribute specifies how
        strictly the virtual CPU provided to the guest matches these
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 
        requirements. <span class="since">Since 0.7.6</span> the
        <code>match</code> attribute can be omitted if <code>topology</code>
        is the only element within <code>cpu</code>. Possible values for the
        <code>match</code> attribute are:

        <dl>
          <dt><code>minimum</code></dt>
          <dd>The specified CPU model and features describes the minimum
J
docs: Clarify /domain/cpu/@match description  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 
            requested CPU. A better CPU will be provided to the guest if it
            is possible with the requested hypervisor on the current host.
            This is a constrained <code>host-model</code> mode; the domain
            will not be created if the provided virtual CPU does not meet
            the requirements.</dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1421 
          <dt><code>exact</code></dt>
J
docs: Clarify /domain/cpu/@match description  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1422 1423 1424 1425 
          <dd>The virtual CPU provided to the guest should exactly match the
            specification. If such CPU is not supported, libvirt will refuse
            to start the domain.</dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1426 
          <dt><code>strict</code></dt>
J
docs: Clarify /domain/cpu/@match description  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1427 1428 1429 
          <dd>The domain will not be created unless the host CPU exactly
            matches the specification. This is not very useful in practice
            and should only be used if there is a real reason.</dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1430 
        </dl>
D
Set sensible defaults for cpu match and feature policy  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1431
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
1432 1433 
        <span class="since">Since 0.8.5</span> the <code>match</code>
        attribute can be omitted and will default to <code>exact</code>.
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1434
J
Introduce /domain/cpu/@check XML attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 
        Sometimes the hypervisor is not able to create a virtual CPU exactly
        matching the specification passed by libvirt.
        <span class="since">Since 3.2.0</span>, an optional <code>check</code>
        attribute can be used to request a specific way of checking whether
        the virtual CPU matches the specification. It is usually safe to omit
        this attribute when starting a domain and stick with the default
        value. Once the domain starts, libvirt will automatically change the
        <code>check</code> attribute to the best supported value to ensure the
        virtual CPU does not change when the domain is migrated to another
        host. The following values can be used:

        <dl>
          <dt><code>none</code></dt>
          <dd>Libvirt does no checking and it is up to the hypervisor to
            refuse to start the domain if it cannot provide the requested CPU.
            With QEMU this means no checking is done at all since the default
            behavior of QEMU is to emit warnings, but start the domain anyway.
          </dd>

          <dt><code>partial</code></dt>
          <dd>Libvirt will check the guest CPU specification before starting
            a domain, but the rest is left on the hypervisor. It can still
            provide a different virtual CPU.</dd>

          <dt><code>full</code></dt>
          <dd>The virtual CPU created by the hypervisor will be checked
            against the CPU specification and the domain will not be started
            unless the two CPUs match.</dd>
        </dl>
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.10</span>, an optional <code>mode</code>
        attribute may be used to make it easier to configure a guest CPU to be
        as close to host CPU as possible. Possible values for the
        <code>mode</code> attribute are:

        <dl>
          <dt><code>custom</code></dt>
          <dd>In this mode, the <code>cpu</code> element describes the CPU
          that should be presented to the guest. This is the default when no
          <code>mode</code> attribute is specified. This mode makes it so that
          a persistent guest will see the same hardware no matter what host
          the guest is booted on.</dd>
          <dt><code>host-model</code></dt>
          <dd>The <code>host-model</code> mode is essentially a shortcut to
          copying host CPU definition from capabilities XML into domain XML.
          Since the CPU definition is copied just before starting a domain,
          exactly the same XML can be used on different hosts while still
P
cpu: Allow fine tuning of "host-model" cpu  
Peter Krempa 已提交
1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 
          providing the best guest CPU each host supports. The
          <code>match</code> attribute can't be used in this mode. Specifying
          CPU model is not supported either, but <code>model</code>'s
          <code>fallback</code> attribute may still be used. Using the
          <code>feature</code> element, specific flags may be enabled or
          disabled specifically in addition to the host model. This may be
          used to fine tune features that can be emulated.
          <span class="since">(Since 1.1.1)</span>.
          Libvirt does not model every aspect of each CPU so
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 
          the guest CPU will not match the host CPU exactly. On the other
          hand, the ABI provided to the guest is reproducible. During
          migration, complete CPU model definition is transferred to the
          destination host so the migrated guest will see exactly the same CPU
          model even if the destination host contains more capable CPUs for
          the running instance of the guest; but shutting down and restarting
          the guest may present different hardware to the guest according to
J
docs: Update description of the host-model CPU mode  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 
          the capabilities of the new host. Prior to libvirt 3.2.0 and QEMU
          2.9.0 detection of the host CPU model via QEMU is not supported.
          Thus the CPU configuration created using <code>host-model</code>
          may not work as expected.
          <span class="since">Since 3.2.0 and QEMU 2.9.0</span> this mode
          works the way it was designed and it is indicated by the
          <code>fallback</code> attribute set to <code>forbid</code> in the
          host-model CPU definition advertised in
          <a href="formatdomaincaps.html#elementsCPU">domain capabilities XML</a>.
          When <code>fallback</code> attribute is set to <code>allow</code>
          in the domain capabilities XML, it is recommended to use
          <code>custom</code> mode with just the CPU model from the host
          capabilities XML. <span class="since">Since 1.2.11</span> PowerISA
          allows processors to run VMs in binary compatibility mode supporting
          an older version of ISA.  Libvirt on PowerPC architecture uses the
P
docs: Add documentation for compat mode.  
Prerna Saxena 已提交
1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 
          <code>host-model</code> to signify a guest mode CPU running in
          binary compatibility mode. Example:
          When a user needs a power7 VM to run in compatibility mode
          on a Power8 host, this can be described in XML as follows :
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1518 1519 1520 1521 
&lt;cpu mode='host-model'&gt;
  &lt;model&gt;power7&lt;/model&gt;
&lt;/cpu&gt;
...</pre>
P
docs: Add documentation for compat mode.  
Prerna Saxena 已提交
1522 
          </dd>
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 
          <dt><code>host-passthrough</code></dt>
          <dd>With this mode, the CPU visible to the guest should be exactly
          the same as the host CPU even in the aspects that libvirt does not
          understand. Though the downside of this mode is that the guest
          environment cannot be reproduced on different hardware. Thus, if you
M
qemu: Allow enabling/disabling features with host-passthrough  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1528 
          hit any bugs, you are on your own. Further details of that CPU can
J
docs: document cpu host-passthrough migration issue  
Jason J. Herne 已提交
1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 
          be changed using <code>feature</code> elements. Migration of a guest
          using host-passthrough is dangerous if the source and destination
          hosts are not identical in both hardware and configuration. If such
          a migration is attempted then the guest may hang or crash upon
          resuming execution on the destination host.</dd>
J
Add support for cpu mode attribute  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1534 
        </dl>
J
docs: Update description of the host-model CPU mode  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1541 1542 1543 

        Both <code>host-model</code> and <code>host-passthrough</code> modes
        make sense when a domain can run directly on the host CPUs (for
        example, domains with type <code>kvm</code>). The actual host CPU is
        irrelevant for domains with emulated virtual CPUs (such as domains with
        type <code>qemu</code>). However, for backward compatibility
        <code>host-model</code> may be implemented even for domains running on
        emulated CPUs in which case the best CPU the hypervisor is able to
        emulate may be used rather then trying to mimic the host CPU model.
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 
      </dd>

      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>The content of the <code>model</code> element specifies CPU model
        requested by the guest. The list of available CPU models and their
        definition can be found in <code>cpu_map.xml</code> file installed
J
cpu: Optionally forbid fallback CPU models  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 
        in libvirt's data directory. If a hypervisor is not able to use the
        exact CPU model, libvirt automatically falls back to a closest model
        supported by the hypervisor while maintaining the list of CPU
        features. <span class="since">Since 0.9.10</span>, an optional
        <code>fallback</code> attribute can be used to forbid this behavior,
        in which case an attempt to start a domain requesting an unsupported
        CPU model will fail. Supported values for <code>fallback</code>
        attribute are: <code>allow</code> (this is the default), and
H
docs: added description of the vendor_id attribute  
Hendrik Schwartke 已提交
1558 
        <code>forbid</code>. The optional <code>vendor_id</code> attribute
E
build: commit to 0.10.0 release naming  
Eric Blake 已提交
1559 
        (<span class="since">Since 0.10.0</span>)  can be used to set the
H
docs: added description of the vendor_id attribute  
Hendrik Schwartke 已提交
1560 1561 1562 
        vendor id seen by the guest. It must be exactly 12 characters long.
        If not set the vendor id of the host is used. Typical possible
        values are "AuthenticAMD" and "GenuineIntel".</dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1563
J
cpu: Add support for CPU vendor  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 
      <dt><code>vendor</code></dt>
      <dd><span class="since">Since 0.8.3</span> the content of the
        <code>vendor</code> element specifies CPU vendor requested by the
        guest. If this element is missing, the guest can be run on a CPU
        matching given features regardless on its vendor. The list of
        supported vendors can be found in <code>cpu_map.xml</code>.</dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 
      <dt><code>topology</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>topology</code> element specifies requested topology of
        virtual CPU provided to the guest. Three non-zero values have to be
        given for <code>sockets</code>, <code>cores</code>, and
        <code>threads</code>: total number of CPU sockets, number of cores per
P
docs: Document limitation of maximum vcpu count used with <topology>  
Peter Krempa 已提交
1576 1577 1578 1579 
        socket, and number of threads per core, respectively. Hypervisors may
        require that the maximum number of vCPUs specified by the
        <code>cpus</code> element equals to the number of vcpus resulting
        from the topology.</dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1587 1588 1589 1590 1591 1592 1593 

      <dt><code>feature</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>cpu</code> element can contain zero or more
        <code>elements</code> used to fine-tune features provided by the
        selected CPU model. The list of known feature names can be found in
        the same file as CPU models. The meaning of each <code>feature</code>
        element depends on its <code>policy</code> attribute, which has to be
        set to one of the following values:

        <dl>
          <dt><code>force</code></dt>
          <dd>The virtual CPU will claim the feature is supported regardless
            of it being supported by host CPU.</dd>
          <dt><code>require</code></dt>
K
docs: formatdomain: Clarify CPU feature policy option "require"  
Kashyap Chamarthy 已提交
1594 1595 
          <dd>Guest creation will fail unless the feature is supported by the
            host CPU or the hypervisor is able to emulate it.</dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 1602 1603 1604 
          <dt><code>optional</code></dt>
          <dd>The feature will be supported by virtual CPU if and only if it
            is supported by host CPU.</dd>
          <dt><code>disable</code></dt>
          <dd>The feature will not be supported by virtual CPU.</dd>
          <dt><code>forbid</code></dt>
          <dd>Guest creation will fail if the feature is supported by host
            CPU.</dd>
        </dl>
D
Set sensible defaults for cpu match and feature policy  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1605
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
1606 1607 
        <span class="since">Since 0.8.5</span> the <code>policy</code>
        attribute can be omitted and will default to <code>require</code>.
K
docs: formatdomain: Document the CPU feature 'name' attribute  
Kashyap Chamarthy 已提交
1608 1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617 1618 1619 1620 1621 1622 

        <p> Individual CPU feature names are specified as part of the
        <code>name</code> attribute. For example, to explicitly specify
        the 'pcid' feature with Intel IvyBridge CPU model:
        </p>

<pre>
...
&lt;cpu match='exact'&gt;
  &lt;model fallback='forbid'&gt;IvyBridge&lt;/model&gt;
  &lt;vendor&gt;Intel&lt;/vendor&gt;
  &lt;feature policy='require' name='pcid'/&gt;
&lt;/cpu&gt;
...</pre>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1623 
      </dd>
J
Add support for CPU cache specification  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1624 1625 1626 1627 1628 1629 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 1645 1646 1647 1648 1649 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 

      <dt><code>cache</code></dt>
      <dd><span class="since">Since 3.3.0</span> the <code>cache</code>
        element describes the virtual CPU cache. If the element is missing,
        the hypervisor will use a sensible default.

        <dl>
          <dt><code>level</code></dt>
          <dd>This optional attribute specifies which cache level is described
            by the element. Missing attribute means the element describes all
            CPU cache levels at once. Mixing <code>cache</code> elements with
            the <code>level</code> attribute set and those without the
            attribute is forbidden.</dd>

          <dt><code>mode</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The following values are supported:
            <dl>
              <dt><code>emulate</code></dt>
              <dd>The hypervisor will provide a fake CPU cache data.</dd>

              <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt>
              <dd>The real CPU cache data reported by the host CPU will be
                passed through to the virtual CPU.</dd>

              <dt><code>disable</code></dt>
              <dd>The virtual CPU will report no CPU cache of the specified
                level (or no cache at all if the <code>level</code> attribute
                is missing).</dd>
            </dl>
          </dd>
        </dl>
      </dd>
J
Document <cpu> elements in capabilities and domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1657 1658 
    </dl>
B
XML definitions for guest NUMA and parsing routines  
Bharata B Rao 已提交
1659 
    <p>
Y
Fix minor typos in messages and docs  
Yuri Chornoivan 已提交
1660 
      Guest NUMA topology can be specified using the <code>numa</code> element.
B
XML definitions for guest NUMA and parsing routines  
Bharata B Rao 已提交
1661 1662 1663 1664 
      <span class="since">Since 0.9.8</span>
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1665 1666 
...
&lt;cpu&gt;
B
XML definitions for guest NUMA and parsing routines  
Bharata B Rao 已提交
1667 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1668 
  &lt;numa&gt;
M
conf: Introduce memoryBacking/discard  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1669 
    &lt;cell id='0' cpus='0-3' memory='512000' unit='KiB' discard='yes'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 
    &lt;cell id='1' cpus='4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'/&gt;
  &lt;/numa&gt;
  ...
&lt;/cpu&gt;
...</pre>
B
XML definitions for guest NUMA and parsing routines  
Bharata B Rao 已提交
1675 1676 1677 

    <p>
      Each <code>cell</code> element specifies a NUMA cell or a NUMA node.
M
conf, schema: add 'id' field for cells  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1678 1679 1680 
      <code>cpus</code> specifies the CPU or range of CPUs that are
      part of the node. <code>memory</code> specifies the node memory
      in kibibytes (i.e. blocks of 1024 bytes).
P
cpu_conf: Allow specification of 'units' for @memory on numa nodes.  
Prerna Saxena 已提交
1681 1682 1683 
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.11</span> one can use an additional <a
          href="#elementsMemoryAllocation"><code>unit</code></a> attribute to
      define units in which <code>memory</code> is specified.
M
conf, schema: add 'id' field for cells  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.7</span> all cells should
      have <code>id</code> attribute in case referring to some cell is
      necessary in the code, otherwise the cells are
      assigned <code>id</code>s in the increasing order starting from
      0.  Mixing cells with and without the <code>id</code> attribute
      is not recommended as it may result in unwanted behaviour.
M
docs, conf, schema: add support for shared memory mapping  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1690 1691 1692 1693 

      <span class='since'>Since 1.2.9</span> the optional attribute
      <code>memAccess</code> can control whether the memory is to be
      mapped as "shared" or "private".  This is valid only for
M
conf: Introduce @access to <memory/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1694 
      hugepages-backed memory and nvdimm modules.
M
conf: Introduce memoryBacking/discard  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1695 1696 1697 1698 1699 1700 1701 

      Each <code>cell</code> element can have an optional
      <code>discard</code> attribute which fine tunes the discard
      feature for given numa node as described under
      <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a>.
      Accepted values are <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>.
      <span class='since'>Since 4.4.0</span>
B
XML definitions for guest NUMA and parsing routines  
Bharata B Rao 已提交
1702 1703 1704 
    </p>

    <p>
W
numa: describe siblings distances within cells  
Wim ten Have 已提交
1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 
      This guest NUMA specification is currently available only for
      QEMU/KVM and Xen.
    </p>

    <p>
      A NUMA hardware architecture supports the notion of distances
      between NUMA cells. <span class="since">Since 3.10.0</span> it
      is possible to define the distance between NUMA cells using the
      <code>distances</code> element within a NUMA <code>cell</code>
      description. The <code>sibling</code> sub-element is used to
      specify the distance value between sibling NUMA cells. For more
      details, see the chapter explaining the system's SLIT (System
      Locality Information Table) within the ACPI (Advanced
      Configuration and Power Interface) specification.
    </p>

<pre>
...
&lt;cpu&gt;
  ...
  &lt;numa&gt;
    &lt;cell id='0' cpus='0,4-7' memory='512000' unit='KiB'&gt;
      &lt;distances&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='0' value='10'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='1' value='21'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='2' value='31'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='3' value='41'/&gt;
      &lt;/distances&gt;
    &lt;/cell&gt;
    &lt;cell id='1' cpus='1,8-10,12-15' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'&gt;
      &lt;distances&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='0' value='21'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='1' value='10'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='2' value='21'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='3' value='31'/&gt;
      &lt;/distances&gt;
    &lt;/cell&gt;
    &lt;cell id='2' cpus='2,11' memory='512000' unit='KiB' memAccess='shared'&gt;
      &lt;distances&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='0' value='31'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='1' value='21'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='2' value='10'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='3' value='21'/&gt;
      &lt;/distances&gt;
    &lt;/cell&gt;
    &lt;cell id='3' cpus='3' memory='512000' unit='KiB'&gt;
      &lt;distances&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='0' value='41'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='1' value='31'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='2' value='21'/&gt;
        &lt;sibling id='3' value='10'/&gt;
      &lt;/distances&gt;
    &lt;/cell&gt;
  &lt;/numa&gt;
  ...
&lt;/cpu&gt;
...</pre>

    <p>
      Describing distances between NUMA cells is currently only supported
M
qemu: Support setting NUMA distances  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1765 
      by Xen and QEMU. If no <code>distances</code> are given to describe
W
numa: describe siblings distances within cells  
Wim ten Have 已提交
1766 1767 
      the SLIT data between different cells, it will default to a scheme
      using 10 for local and 20 for remote distances.
B
XML definitions for guest NUMA and parsing routines  
Bharata B Rao 已提交
1768 1769 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1770 
    <h3><a id="elementsEvents">Events configuration</a></h3>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1771 1772 

    <p>
A
fix typos in docs  
Atsushi SAKAI 已提交
1773 
      It is sometimes necessary to override the default actions taken
J
docs: Update formatdomain for lifecycle events  
John Ferlan 已提交
1774 1775 
      on various events. Not all hypervisors support all events and actions.
      The actions may be taken as a result of calls to libvirt APIs
M
docs: Correct invalid hyperlinks  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 1785 
      <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainReboot">
        <code>virDomainReboot</code>
      </a>,
      <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainShutdown">
        <code>virDomainShutdown</code>
      </a>,
      or
      <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainShutdownFlags">
        <code>virDomainShutdownFlags</code>
      </a>.
J
docs: Update formatdomain for lifecycle events  
John Ferlan 已提交
1786 1787 
      Using <code>virsh reboot</code> or <code>virsh shutdown</code> would
      also trigger the event.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1788 1789 
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
1790 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 
...
&lt;on_poweroff&gt;destroy&lt;/on_poweroff&gt;
&lt;on_reboot&gt;restart&lt;/on_reboot&gt;
&lt;on_crash&gt;restart&lt;/on_crash&gt;
&lt;on_lockfailure&gt;poweroff&lt;/on_lockfailure&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1797
J
conf: Rename life cycle actions to event actions  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 
    <p>
      The following collections of elements allow the actions to be
      specified when a guest OS triggers a lifecycle operation. A
      common use case is to force a reboot to be treated as a poweroff
      when doing the initial OS installation. This allows the VM to be
      re-configured for the first post-install bootup.
    </p>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1805 1806 1807 
    <dl>
      <dt><code>on_poweroff</code></dt>
      <dd>The content of this element specifies the action to take when
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
1808 
        the guest requests a poweroff.</dd>
D
"copy-paste" errors  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
1809 
      <dt><code>on_reboot</code></dt>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1810 
      <dd>The content of this element specifies the action to take when
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
1811 
        the guest requests a reboot.</dd>
D
"copy-paste" errors  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
1812 
      <dt><code>on_crash</code></dt>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1813 
      <dd>The content of this element specifies the action to take when
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
1814 
        the guest crashes.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 
    </dl>

    <p>
      Each of these states allow for the same four possible actions.
    </p>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>destroy</code></dt>
      <dd>The domain will be terminated completely and all resources
J
docs: Update formatdomain for lifecycle events  
John Ferlan 已提交
1824 
        released.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1825 
      <dt><code>restart</code></dt>
J
docs: Update formatdomain for lifecycle events  
John Ferlan 已提交
1826 1827 
      <dd>The domain will be terminated and then restarted with
        the same configuration.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1828 
      <dt><code>preserve</code></dt>
J
docs: Update formatdomain for lifecycle events  
John Ferlan 已提交
1829 
      <dd>The domain will be terminated and its resource preserved
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
1830 
        to allow analysis.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1831 
      <dt><code>rename-restart</code></dt>
J
docs: Update formatdomain for lifecycle events  
John Ferlan 已提交
1832 1833 
      <dd>The domain will be terminated and then restarted with
        a new name.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1834 1835 
    </dl>
J
Add actions to virDomainLifecycle enum  
Jim Fehlig 已提交
1836 
    <p>
J
docs: Update formatdomain for lifecycle events  
John Ferlan 已提交
1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 
    QEMU/KVM supports the <code>on_poweroff</code> and <code>on_reboot</code>
    events handling the <code>destroy</code> and <code>restart</code> actions.
    The <code>preserve</code> action for an <code>on_reboot</code> event
    is treated as a <code>destroy</code> and the <code>rename-restart</code>
    action for an <code>on_poweroff</code> event is treated as a
    <code>restart</code> event.
    </p>

    <p>
      The <code>on_crash</code> event supports these additional
J
Add actions to virDomainLifecycle enum  
Jim Fehlig 已提交
1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 
      actions <span class="since">since 0.8.4</span>.
    </p>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>coredump-destroy</code></dt>
      <dd>The crashed domain's core will be dumped, and then the
        domain will be terminated completely and all resources
        released</dd>
      <dt><code>coredump-restart</code></dt>
      <dd>The crashed domain's core will be dumped, and then the
        domain will be restarted with the same configuration</dd>
    </dl>
P
lib: introduce virDomainSetLifecycleAction() API  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 
    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 3.9.0</span>, the lifecycle events can
      be configured via the
      <a href="html/libvirt-libvirt-domain.html#virDomainSetLifecycleAction">
        <code>virDomainSetLifecycleAction</code></a> API.
    </p>
J
conf: Add on_lockfailure event configuration  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1867 1868 
    <p>
      The <code>on_lockfailure</code> element (<span class="since">since
E
maint: prepare for next release number  
Eric Blake 已提交
1869 
      1.0.0</span>) may be used to configure what action should be
J
conf: Add on_lockfailure event configuration  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 
      taken when a lock manager loses resource locks. The following
      actions are recognized by libvirt, although not all of them need
      to be supported by individual lock managers. When no action is
      specified, each lock manager will take its default action.
    </p>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>poweroff</code></dt>
      <dd>The domain will be forcefully powered off.</dd>
      <dt><code>restart</code></dt>
      <dd>The domain will be powered off and started up again to
        reacquire its locks.</dd>
      <dt><code>pause</code></dt>
      <dd>The domain will be paused so that it can be manually resumed
        when lock issues are solved.</dd>
      <dt><code>ignore</code></dt>
      <dd>Keep the domain running as if nothing happened.</dd>
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1888 
    <h3><a id="elementsPowerManagement">Power Management</a></h3>
M
Add per-guest S3/S4 state configuration  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 

    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 0.10.2</span> it is possible to
      forcibly enable or disable BIOS advertisements to the guest
      OS. (NB: Only qemu driver support)
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 
...
&lt;pm&gt;
  &lt;suspend-to-disk enabled='no'/&gt;
  &lt;suspend-to-mem enabled='yes'/&gt;
&lt;/pm&gt;
...</pre>
M
Add per-guest S3/S4 state configuration  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1903 1904 1905 1906 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>pm</code></dt>
      <dd>These elements enable ('yes') or disable ('no') BIOS support
J
doc: Fix explanation of S3 and S4 states  
Jingjing Shao 已提交
1907 
        for S3 (suspend-to-mem) and S4 (suspend-to-disk) ACPI sleep
M
Add per-guest S3/S4 state configuration  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1908 
        states. If nothing is specified, then the hypervisor will be
M
docs: Document the real behaviour of suspend-to-{mem,disk}  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1909 1910 1911 1912 1913 
        left with its default value.<br/>
        Note: This setting cannot prevent the guest OS from performing
        a suspend as the guest OS itself can choose to circumvent the
        unavailability of the sleep states (e.g. S4 by turning off
        completely).</dd>
M
Add per-guest S3/S4 state configuration  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1914 1915 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1916 
    <h3><a id="elementsFeatures">Hypervisor features</a></h3>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 

    <p>
      Hypervisors may allow certain CPU / machine features to be
      toggled on/off.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
1923 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935 1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 
...
&lt;features&gt;
  &lt;pae/&gt;
  &lt;acpi/&gt;
  &lt;apic/&gt;
  &lt;hap/&gt;
  &lt;privnet/&gt;
  &lt;hyperv&gt;
    &lt;relaxed state='on'/&gt;
    &lt;vapic state='on'/&gt;
    &lt;spinlocks state='on' retries='4096'/&gt;
    &lt;vpindex state='on'/&gt;
    &lt;runtime state='on'/&gt;
    &lt;synic state='on'/&gt;
    &lt;reset state='on'/&gt;
    &lt;vendor_id state='on' value='KVM Hv'/&gt;
  &lt;/hyperv&gt;
  &lt;kvm&gt;
    &lt;hidden state='on'/&gt;
  &lt;/kvm&gt;
  &lt;pvspinlock state='on'/&gt;
  &lt;gic version='2'/&gt;
J
conf: add <ioapic driver> to <features>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
1946 
  &lt;ioapic driver='qemu'/&gt;
A
conf: Parse and format HPT maxpagesize  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1947 1948 1949 
  &lt;hpt resizing='required'&gt;
    &lt;maxpagesize unit='MiB'&gt;16&lt;/maxpagesize&gt;
  &lt;/hpt&gt;
C
conf: format/parse <vmcoreinfo> as tristate  
Cole Robinson 已提交
1950 
  &lt;vmcoreinfo state='on'/&gt;
M
conf, schema, docs: Add support for TSEG size setting  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1951 1952 1953 
  &lt;smm state='on'&gt;
    &lt;tseg unit='MiB'&gt;48&lt;/tseg&gt;
  &lt;/smm&gt;
A
conf: Parse and format the HTM pSeries feature  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1954 
  &lt;htm state='on'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
1955 1956 
&lt;/features&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 

    <p>
      All features are listed within the <code>features</code>
      element, omitting a togglable feature tag turns it off.
      The available features can be found by asking
A
docs: Document the new XML elements  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
1962 1963 
      for the <a href="formatcaps.html">capabilities XML</a> and
      <a href="formatdomaincaps.html">domain capabilities XML</a>,
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 
      but a common set for fully virtualized domains are:
    </p>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>pae</code></dt>
      <dd>Physical address extension mode allows 32-bit guests
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
1970 
        to address more than 4 GB of memory.</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1971 1972 
      <dt><code>acpi</code></dt>
      <dd>ACPI is useful for power management, for example, with
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
1973 
        KVM guests it is required for graceful shutdown to work.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1974 
      </dd>
M
Add support for EOI with APIC  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1975 1976 
      <dt><code>apic</code></dt>
      <dd>APIC allows the use of programmable IRQ
M
Fix minor details not only in apic eoi  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1977 1978 1979 
      management. <span class="since">Since 0.10.2 (QEMU only)</span> there is
      an optional attribute <code>eoi</code> with values <code>on</code>
      and <code>off</code> which toggles the availability of EOI (End of
M
Add support for EOI with APIC  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
1980 1981 
      Interrupt) for the guest.
      </dd>
J
Document HAP domain feature  
Jim Fehlig 已提交
1982 
      <dt><code>hap</code></dt>
J
conf: add 'state' attribute to <hap> feature  
Jim Fehlig 已提交
1983 1984 1985 1986 
      <dd>Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>,
        <code>off</code>) enable or disable use of Hardware Assisted Paging.
        The default is <code>on</code> if the hypervisor detects availability
        of Hardware Assisted Paging.
J
Document HAP domain feature  
Jim Fehlig 已提交
1987 
      </dd>
D
Add missing docs for <viridian/> feature flag  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1988 1989 1990 1991 
      <dt><code>viridian</code></dt>
      <dd>Enable Viridian hypervisor extensions for paravirtualizing
        guest operating systems
      </dd>
D
Add support for forcing a private network namespace for LXC guests  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 
      <dt><code>privnet</code></dt>
      <dd>Always create a private network namespace. This is
        automatically set if any interface devices are defined.
        This feature is only relevant for container based
        virtualization drivers, such as LXC.
      </dd>
P
conf: Add support for HyperV Enlightenment features  
Peter Krempa 已提交
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 
      <dt><code>hyperv</code></dt>
      <dd>Enable various features improving behavior of guests
        running Microsoft Windows.
      <table class="top_table">
        <tr>
          <th>Feature</th>
          <th>Description</th>
          <th>Value</th>
J
conf: add vapic and spinlocks to hyperv features  
Ján Tomko 已提交
2006 
          <th>Since</th>
P
conf: Add support for HyperV Enlightenment features  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2007 2008 2009 
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>relaxed</td>
O
docs, comments: minor typo fixes  
Oskari Saarenmaa 已提交
2010 
          <td>Relax constraints on timers</td>
P
conf: Add support for HyperV Enlightenment features  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2011 
          <td> on, off</td>
J
docs: Update the hyperv feature qemu supported version  
John Ferlan 已提交
2012 
          <td><span class="since">1.0.0 (QEMU 2.0)</span></td>
J
conf: add vapic and spinlocks to hyperv features  
Ján Tomko 已提交
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>vapic</td>
          <td>Enable virtual APIC</td>
          <td>on, off</td>
J
docs: Update the hyperv feature qemu supported version  
John Ferlan 已提交
2018 
          <td><span class="since">1.1.0 (QEMU 2.0)</span></td>
J
conf: add vapic and spinlocks to hyperv features  
Ján Tomko 已提交
2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>spinlocks</td>
          <td>Enable spinlock support</td>
          <td>on, off; retries - at least 4095</td>
J
docs: Update the hyperv feature qemu supported version  
John Ferlan 已提交
2024 
          <td><span class="since">1.1.0 (QEMU 2.0)</span></td>
P
conf: Add support for HyperV Enlightenment features  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2025 
        </tr>
M
conf: qemu: Add support for more HyperV Enlightenment features  
Maxim Nestratov 已提交
2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 
        <tr>
          <td>vpindex</td>
          <td>Virtual processor index</td>
          <td> on, off</td>
          <td><span class="since">1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</span></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>runtime</td>
          <td>Processor time spent on running guest code and on behalf of guest code</td>
          <td> on, off</td>
          <td><span class="since">1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</span></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>synic</td>
          <td>Enable Synthetic Interrupt Controller (SyNIC)</td>
          <td> on, off</td>
P
docs: fix qemu version for hyperv features  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
2042 
          <td><span class="since">1.3.3 (QEMU 2.6)</span></td>
M
conf: qemu: Add support for more HyperV Enlightenment features  
Maxim Nestratov 已提交
2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>stimer</td>
          <td>Enable SyNIC timers</td>
          <td> on, off</td>
P
docs: fix qemu version for hyperv features  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
2048 
          <td><span class="since">1.3.3 (QEMU 2.6)</span></td>
M
conf: qemu: Add support for more HyperV Enlightenment features  
Maxim Nestratov 已提交
2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054 2055 2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>reset</td>
          <td>Enable hypervisor reset</td>
          <td> on, off</td>
          <td><span class="since">1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</span></td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>vendor_id</td>
          <td>Set hypervisor vendor id</td>
          <td>on, off; value - string, up to 12 characters</td>
          <td><span class="since">1.3.3 (QEMU 2.5)</span></td>
        </tr>
P
conf: Add support for HyperV Enlightenment features  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2062 2063 
      </table>
      </dd>
P
qemu: Add support for paravirtual spinlocks in the guest  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 
      <dt><code>pvspinlock</code></dt>
      <dd>Notify the guest that the host supports paravirtual spinlocks
          for example by exposing the pvticketlocks mechanism. This feature
          can be explicitly disabled by using <code>state='off'</code>
          attribute.
      </dd>
A
Add new 'kvm' domain feature and ability to hide KVM signature  
Alex Williamson 已提交
2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 
      <dt><code>kvm</code></dt>
      <dd>Various features to change the behavior of the KVM hypervisor.
      <table class="top_table">
        <tr>
          <th>Feature</th>
          <th>Description</th>
          <th>Value</th>
          <th>Since</th>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td>hidden</td>
          <td>Hide the KVM hypervisor from standard MSR based discovery</td>
          <td>on, off</td>
L
docs: correct version requirements for <kvm><hidden='on'/></kvm>  
Laine Stump 已提交
2083 
          <td><span class="since">1.2.8 (QEMU 2.1.0)</span></td>
A
Add new 'kvm' domain feature and ability to hide KVM signature  
Alex Williamson 已提交
2084 2085 2086 
        </tr>
      </table>
      </dd>
M
docs, schema, conf: Add support for PMU feature  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 
      <dt><code>pmu</code></dt>
      <dd>Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>,
        <code>off</code>, default <code>on</code>) enable or disable the
        performance monitoring unit for the guest.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.12</span>
      </dd>
M
docs: add domain vmport feature  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
2093 2094 2095 
      <dt><code>vmport</code></dt>
      <dd>Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>,
        <code>off</code>, default <code>on</code>) enable or disable
J
Spell VMware with a lowercase w  
Ján Tomko 已提交
2096 
        the emulation of VMware IO port, for vmmouse etc.
M
docs: add domain vmport feature  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
2097 2098 
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.16</span>
      </dd>
M
Introduce GIC feature  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 
      <dt><code>gic</code></dt>
      <dd>Enable for architectures using a General Interrupt
          Controller instead of APIC in order to handle interrupts.
          For example, the 'aarch64' architecture uses
          <code>gic</code> instead of <code>apic</code>. The optional
          attribute <code>version</code> specifies the GIC version;
A
docs: List possible GIC versions  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2105 2106 2107 
          however, it may not be supported by all hypervisors. Accepted
          values are <code>2</code>, <code>3</code> and <code>host</code>.
          <span class="since">Since 1.2.16</span>
M
Introduce GIC feature  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2108 
      </dd>
M
Introduce SMM feature  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2109 
      <dt><code>smm</code></dt>
M
conf, schema, docs: Add support for TSEG size setting  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
2110 2111 2112 
      <dd>
        <p>
          Depending on the <code>state</code> attribute (values <code>on</code>,
M
docs: Tiny fix for the SMM description  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
2113 2114 
          <code>off</code>, default <code>on</code>) enable or disable
          System Management Mode.
M
Introduce SMM feature  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2115 
          <span class="since">Since 2.1.0</span>
M
conf, schema, docs: Add support for TSEG size setting  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158 
        </p><p> Optional sub-element <code>tseg</code> can be used to specify
          the amount of memory dedicated to SMM's extended TSEG. That offers a
          fourth option size apart from the existing ones (1 MiB, 2 MiB and 8
          MiB) that the guest OS (or rather loader) can choose from. The size
          can be specified as a value of that element, optional attribute
          <code>unit</code> can be used to specify the unit of the
          aforementioned value (defaults to 'MiB').  If set to 0 the extended
          size is not advertised and only the default ones (see above) are
          available.
        </p><p>
          <b>If the VM is booting you should leave this option alone, unless you
          are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
        </p><p>
          This value is configurable due to the fact that the calculation cannot
          be done right with the guarantee that it will work correctly.  In
          QEMU, the user-configurable extended TSEG feature was unavailable up
          to and including <code>pc-q35-2.9</code>. Starting with
          <code>pc-q35-2.10</code> the feature is available, with default size
          16 MiB.  That should suffice for up to roughly 272 VCPUs, 5 GiB guest
          RAM in total, no hotplug memory range, and 32 GiB of 64-bit PCI MMIO
          aperture.  Or for 48 VCPUs, with 1TB of guest RAM, no hotplug DIMM
          range, and 32GB of 64-bit PCI MMIO aperture. The values may also vary
          based on the loader the VM is using.
        </p><p>
          Additional size might be needed for significantly higher VCPU counts
          or increased address space (that can be memory, maxMemory, 64-bit PCI
          MMIO aperture size; roughly 8 MiB of TSEG per 1 TiB of address space)
          which can also be rounded up.
        </p><p>
          Due to the nature of this setting being similar to "how much RAM
          should the guest have" users are advised to either consult the
          documentation of the guest OS or loader (if there is any), or test
          this by trial-and-error changing the value until the VM boots
          successfully.  Yet another guiding value for users might be the fact
          that 48 MiB should be enough for pretty large guests (240 VCPUs and
          4TB guest RAM), but it is on purpose not set as default as 48 MiB of
          unavailable RAM might be too much for small guests (e.g. with 512 MiB
          of RAM).
        </p><p>
          See <a href="#elementsMemoryAllocation">Memory Allocation</a>
          for more details about the <code>unit</code> attribute.
          <span class="since">Since 4.5.0</span> (QEMU only)
        </p>
M
Introduce SMM feature  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2159 
      </dd>
J
conf: add <ioapic driver> to <features>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
2160 2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 
      <dt><code>ioapic</code></dt>
      <dd>Tune the I/O APIC. Possible values for the
          <code>driver</code> attribute are:
          <code>kvm</code> (default for KVM domains)
          and <code>qemu</code> which puts I/O APIC in userspace
          which is also known as a split I/O APIC mode.
          <span class="since">Since 3.4.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only)
      </dd>
A
docs: Document configuration of HPT resizing  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2168 2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176 
      <dt><code>hpt</code></dt>
      <dd>Configure the HPT (Hash Page Table) of a pSeries guest. Possible
          values for the <code>resizing</code> attribute are
          <code>enabled</code>, which causes HPT resizing to be enabled if
          both the guest and the host support it; <code>disabled</code>, which
          causes HPT resizing to be disabled regardless of guest and host
          support; and <code>required</code>, which prevents the guest from
          starting unless both the guest and the host support HPT resizing. If
          the attribute is not defined, the hypervisor default will be used.
A
conf: Parse and format HPT maxpagesize  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2177 2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 
          <span class="since">Since 3.10.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only).

          <p>The optional <code>maxpagesize</code> subelement can be used to
          limit the usable page size for HPT guests. Common values are 64 KiB,
          16 MiB and 16 GiB; when not specified, the hypervisor default will
          be used. <span class="since">Since 4.5.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only).</p>
A
docs: Document configuration of HPT resizing  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2183 
      </dd>
M
qemu: add vmcoreinfo support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
2184 2185 
      <dt><code>vmcoreinfo</code></dt>
      <dd>Enable QEMU vmcoreinfo device to let the guest kernel save debug
C
conf: format/parse <vmcoreinfo> as tristate  
Cole Robinson 已提交
2186 
          details. <span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span> (QEMU only)
M
qemu: add vmcoreinfo support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
2187 
      </dd>
A
conf: Parse and format the HTM pSeries feature  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 
      <dt><code>htm</code></dt>
      <dd>Configure HTM (Hardware Transational Memory) availability for
          pSeries guests. Possible values for the <code>state</code> attribute
          are <code>on</code> and <code>off</code>. If the attribute is not
          defined, the hypervisor default will be used.
          <span class="since">Since 4.6.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only)
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2195 2196 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2197 
    <h3><a id="elementsTime">Time keeping</a></h3>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 

    <p>
      The guest clock is typically initialized from the host clock.
      Most operating systems expect the hardware clock to be kept
      in UTC, and this is the default. Windows, however, expects
      it to be in so called 'localtime'.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
2206 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213 2214 
...
&lt;clock offset='localtime'&gt;
  &lt;timer name='rtc' tickpolicy='catchup' track='guest'&gt;
    &lt;catchup threshold='123' slew='120' limit='10000'/&gt;
  &lt;/timer&gt;
  &lt;timer name='pit' tickpolicy='delay'/&gt;
&lt;/clock&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2215 2216 2217 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>clock</code></dt>
D
Expand docs about clock modes  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2218 
      <dd>
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2219 2220 2221 2222 2223 2224 2225 2226 
        <p>The <code>offset</code> attribute takes four possible
          values, allowing fine grained control over how the guest
          clock is synchronized to the host. NB, not all hypervisors
          support all modes.</p>
        <dl>
          <dt><code>utc</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The guest clock will always be synchronized to UTC when
P
Support clock=variable relative to localtime  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
2227 2228 2229 2230 2231 2232 2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 
            booted.
            <span class="since">Since 0.9.11</span> 'utc' mode can be converted
            to 'variable' mode, which can be controlled by using the
            <code>adjustment</code> attribute. If the value is 'reset', the
            conversion is never done (not all hypervisors can
            synchronize to UTC on each boot; use of 'reset' will cause
            an error on those hypervisors). A numeric value
            forces the conversion to 'variable' mode using the value as the
            initial adjustment. The default <code>adjustment</code> is
            hypervisor specific.
          </dd>
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2238 2239 2240 2241 
          <dt><code>localtime</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The guest clock will be synchronized to the host's configured
            timezone when booted, if any.
P
Support clock=variable relative to localtime  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
2242 2243 
            <span class="since">Since 0.9.11,</span> the <code>adjustment</code>
            attribute behaves the same as in 'utc' mode.
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249 2250 2251 2252 2253 
          </dd>
          <dt><code>timezone</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The guest clock will be synchronized to the requested timezone
            using the <code>timezone</code> attribute.
            <span class="since">Since 0.7.7</span>
          </dd>
          <dt><code>variable</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The guest clock will have an arbitrary offset applied
P
Support clock=variable relative to localtime  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
2254 2255 
            relative to UTC or localtime, depending on the <code>basis</code>
            attribute. The delta relative to UTC (or localtime) is specified
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2256 
            in seconds, using the <code>adjustment</code> attribute.
P
documentation: trivial spelling fix  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
2257 
            The guest is free to adjust the RTC over time and expect
P
Support clock=variable relative to localtime  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
2258 2259 2260 
            that it will be honored at next reboot. This is in
            contrast to 'utc' and 'localtime' mode (with the optional
            attribute adjustment='reset'), where the RTC adjustments are
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2261 
            lost at each reboot. <span class="since">Since 0.7.7</span>
P
Support clock=variable relative to localtime  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
2262 2263 
            <span class="since">Since 0.9.11</span> the <code>basis</code>
            attribute can be either 'utc' (default) or 'localtime'.
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2264 2265 2266 2267 
          </dd>
        </dl>
        <p>
          A <code>clock</code> may have zero or more
C
doc: Add missing space in <clock> documentation  
Christophe Fergeau 已提交
2268 
          <code>timer</code> sub-elements. <span class="since">Since
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2269 2270 
          0.8.0</span>
        </p>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2271 
      </dd>
E
docs: mention domain <clock> improvements  
Eric Blake 已提交
2272 2273 
      <dt><code>timer</code></dt>
      <dd>
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 
        <p>
          Each timer element requires a <code>name</code> attribute,
          and has other optional attributes that depend on
          the <code>name</code> specified.  Various hypervisors
          support different combinations of attributes.
        </p>
        <dl>
          <dt><code>name</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The <code>name</code> attribute selects which timer is
P
docs: Document hypervisor drivers that support certain timer models  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2284 2285 2286 
            being modified, and can be one of
            "platform" (currently unsupported),
            "hpet" (libxl, xen, qemu), "kvmclock" (qemu),
P
qemu: hyperv: Add support for timer enlightenments  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 
            "pit" (qemu), "rtc" (qemu), "tsc" (libxl) or "hypervclock"
            (qemu - <span class="since">since 1.2.2</span>).

            The <code>hypervclock</code> timer adds support for the
            reference time counter and the reference page for iTSC
            feature for guests running the Microsoft Windows
            operating system.
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 
          </dd>
          <dt><code>track</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The <code>track</code> attribute specifies what the timer
            tracks, and can be "boot", "guest", or "wall".
            Only valid for <code>name="rtc"</code>
            or <code>name="platform"</code>.
          </dd>
          <dt><code>tickpolicy</code></dt>
          <dd>
D
Expand docs for timer tick policy  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2304 2305 
            <p>
            The <code>tickpolicy</code> attribute determines what
O
docs, comments: minor typo fixes  
Oskari Saarenmaa 已提交
2306 
            happens when QEMU misses a deadline for injecting a
D
Expand docs for timer tick policy  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2307 2308 2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 
            tick to the guest:
            </p>
            <dl>
              <dt><code>delay</code></dt>
              <dd>Continue to deliver ticks at the normal rate.
                The guest time will be delayed due to the late
                tick</dd>
              <dt><code>catchup</code></dt>
              <dd>Deliver ticks at a higher rate to catch up
                with the missed tick. The guest time should
                not be delayed once catchup is complete.</dd>
              <dt><code>merge</code></dt>
              <dd>Merge the missed tick(s) into one tick and
                inject. The guest time may be delayed, depending
                on how the OS reacts to the merging of ticks</dd>
              <dt><code>discard</code></dt>
              <dd>Throw away the missed tick(s) and continue
                with future injection normally. The guest time
                may be delayed, unless the OS has explicit
                handling of lost ticks</dd>
            </dl>
            <p>If the policy is "catchup", there can be further details in
            the <code>catchup</code> sub-element.</p>
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2330 2331 2332 2333 2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 
            <dl>
              <dt><code>catchup</code></dt>
              <dd>
                The <code>catchup</code> element has three optional
                attributes, each a positive integer.  The attributes
                are <code>threshold</code>, <code>slew</code>,
                and <code>limit</code>.
              </dd>
            </dl>
D
Expand docs for timer tick policy  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2339 2340 2341 
            <p>
              Note that hypervisors are not required to support all policies across all time sources
            </p>
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 
          </dd>
          <dt><code>frequency</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The <code>frequency</code> attribute is an unsigned
            integer specifying the frequency at
            which <code>name="tsc"</code> runs.
          </dd>
          <dt><code>mode</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The <code>mode</code> attribute controls how
            the <code>name="tsc"</code> timer is managed, and can be
            "auto", "native", "emulate", "paravirt", or "smpsafe".
            Other timers are always emulated.
          </dd>
          <dt><code>present</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The <code>present</code> attribute can be "yes" or "no" to
            specify whether a particular timer is available to the guest.
          </dd>
        </dl>
E
docs: mention domain <clock> improvements  
Eric Blake 已提交
2362 
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2363 2364 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2365 
    <h3><a id="elementsPerf">Performance monitoring events</a></h3>
P
docs: Add at least some docs and fix schema entry for perf events  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2366 2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 

    <p>
      Some platforms allow monitoring of performance of the virtual machine and
      the code executed inside. To enable the performance monitoring events
      you can either specify them in the <code>perf</code> element or enable
      them via <code>virDomainSetPerfEvents</code> API. The performance values
      are then retrieved using the virConnectGetAllDomainStats API.
      <span class="since">Since 2.0.0</span>
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384 2385 
...
&lt;perf&gt;
  &lt;event name='cmt' enabled='yes'/&gt;
  &lt;event name='mbmt' enabled='no'/&gt;
  &lt;event name='mbml' enabled='yes'/&gt;
  &lt;event name='cpu_cycles' enabled='no'/&gt;
  &lt;event name='instructions' enabled='yes'/&gt;
  &lt;event name='cache_references' enabled='no'/&gt;
  &lt;event name='cache_misses' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add one more perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2386 
  &lt;event name='branch_instructions' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add branch_misses perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2387 
  &lt;event name='branch_misses' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add bus_cycles perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2388 
  &lt;event name='bus_cycles' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add stalled_cycles_frontend perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2389 
  &lt;event name='stalled_cycles_frontend' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add stalled_cycles_backend perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2390 
  &lt;event name='stalled_cycles_backend' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add ref_cpu_cycles perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2391 
  &lt;event name='ref_cpu_cycles' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add cpu_clock software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2392 
  &lt;event name='cpu_clock' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add task_clock software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2393 
  &lt;event name='task_clock' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add page_faults software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2394 
  &lt;event name='page_faults' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add context_switches software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2395 
  &lt;event name='context_switches' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add cpu_migrations software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2396 
  &lt;event name='cpu_migrations' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add page_faults_min software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2397 
  &lt;event name='page_faults_min' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add page_faults_maj software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2398 
  &lt;event name='page_faults_maj' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add alignment_faults software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2399 
  &lt;event name='alignment_faults' enabled='no'/&gt;
N
perf: add emulation_faults software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2400 
  &lt;event name='emulation_faults' enabled='no'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2401 2402 
&lt;/perf&gt;
...
P
docs: Add at least some docs and fix schema entry for perf events  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416 2417 2418 2419 2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 
</pre>

  <table class="top_table">
    <tr>
      <th>event name</th>
      <th>Description</th>
      <th>stats parameter name</th>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td><code>cmt</code></td>
      <td>usage of l3 cache in bytes by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.cmt</code></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td><code>mbmt</code></td>
      <td>total system bandwidth from one level of cache</td>
      <td><code>perf.mbmt</code></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td><code>mbml</code></td>
      <td>bandwidth of memory traffic for a memory controller</td>
      <td><code>perf.mbml</code></td>
    </tr>
Q
perf: add more perf events support  
Qiaowei Ren 已提交
2426 2427 
    <tr>
      <td><code>cpu_cycles</code></td>
J
docs: Alter descriptions of perf cpu_cycles  
John Ferlan 已提交
2428 
      <td>the count of cpu cycles (total/elapsed)</td>
Q
perf: add more perf events support  
Qiaowei Ren 已提交
2429 2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441 2442 2443 2444 2445 
      <td><code>perf.cpu_cycles</code></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td><code>instructions</code></td>
      <td>the count of instructions by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.instructions</code></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td><code>cache_references</code></td>
      <td>the count of cache hits by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.cache_references</code></td>
    </tr>
    <tr>
      <td><code>cache_misses</code></td>
      <td>the count of cache misses by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.cache_misses</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add one more perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 
    <tr>
      <td><code>branch_instructions</code></td>
      <td>the count of branch instructions by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.branch_instructions</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add branch_misses perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2451 2452 2453 2454 2455 
    <tr>
      <td><code>branch_misses</code></td>
      <td>the count of branch misses by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.branch_misses</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add bus_cycles perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 
    <tr>
      <td><code>bus_cycles</code></td>
      <td>the count of bus cycles by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.bus_cycles</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add stalled_cycles_frontend perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2461 2462 2463 2464 2465 2466 
    <tr>
      <td><code>stalled_cycles_frontend</code></td>
      <td>the count of stalled cpu cycles in the frontend of the instruction
          processor pipeline by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.stalled_cycles_frontend</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add stalled_cycles_backend perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 
    <tr>
      <td><code>stalled_cycles_backend</code></td>
      <td>the count of stalled cpu cycles in the backend of the instruction
          processor pipeline by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.stalled_cycles_backend</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add ref_cpu_cycles perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2473 2474 2475 2476 2477 2478 
    <tr>
      <td><code>ref_cpu_cycles</code></td>
      <td>the count of total cpu cycles not affected by CPU frequency scaling
         by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.ref_cpu_cycles</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add cpu_clock software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2479 2480 2481 2482 2483 2484 2485 
    <tr>
      <td><code>cpu_clock</code></td>
      <td>the count of cpu clock time, as measured by a monotonic
          high-resolution per-CPU timer, by applications running on
          the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.cpu_clock</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add task_clock software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 
    <tr>
      <td><code>task_clock</code></td>
      <td>the count of task clock time, as measured by a monotonic
          high-resolution CPU timer, specific to the task that
          is run by applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.task_clock</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add page_faults software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2493 2494 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 
    <tr>
      <td><code>page_faults</code></td>
      <td>the count of page faults by applications running on the
          platform. This includes minor, major, invalid and other
          types of page faults</td>
      <td><code>perf.page_faults</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add context_switches software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 2505 
    <tr>
      <td><code>context_switches</code></td>
      <td>the count of context switches by applications running on
          the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.context_switches</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add cpu_migrations software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2506 2507 2508 2509 2510 2511 2512 
    <tr>
      <td><code>cpu_migrations</code></td>
      <td>the count of cpu migrations, that is, where the process
          moved from one logical processor to another, by
          applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.cpu_migrations</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add page_faults_min software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2513 2514 2515 2516 2517 2518 2519 2520 
    <tr>
      <td><code>page_faults_min</code></td>
      <td>the count of minor page faults, that is, where the
          page was present in the page cache, and therefore
          the fault avoided loading it from storage, by
          applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.page_faults_min</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add page_faults_maj software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 
    <tr>
      <td><code>page_faults_maj</code></td>
      <td>the count of major page faults, that is, where the
          page was not present in the page cache, and
          therefore had to be fetched from storage, by
          applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.page_faults_maj</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add alignment_faults software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2529 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 
    <tr>
      <td><code>alignment_faults</code></td>
      <td>the count of alignment faults, that is when
          the load or store is not aligned properly, by
          applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.alignment_faults</code></td>
    </tr>
N
perf: add emulation_faults software perf event support  
Nitesh Konkar 已提交
2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 
    <tr>
      <td><code>emulation_faults</code></td>
      <td>the count of emulation faults, that is when
          the kernel traps on unimplemented instrucions
          and emulates them for user space, by
          applications running on the platform</td>
      <td><code>perf.emulation_faults</code></td>
    </tr>
P
docs: Add at least some docs and fix schema entry for perf events  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2544 2545 
  </table>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2546 
    <h3><a id="elementsDevices">Devices</a></h3>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2547 2548 

    <p>
A
fix typos in docs  
Atsushi SAKAI 已提交
2549 
      The final set of XML elements are all used to describe devices
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 
      provided to the guest domain. All devices occur as children
      of the main <code>devices</code> element.
      <span class="since">Since 0.1.3</span>
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
2555 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;emulator&gt;/usr/lib/xen/bin/qemu-dm&lt;/emulator&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2561 2562 2563 2564 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>emulator</code></dt>
      <dd>
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
2565 2566 2567 2568 2569 
        The contents of the <code>emulator</code> element specify
        the fully qualified path to the device model emulator binary.
        The <a href="formatcaps.html">capabilities XML</a> specifies
        the recommended default emulator to use for each particular
        domain type / architecture combination.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2570 2571 2572 
      </dd>
    </dl>
M
docs: Document user aliases  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578 2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 
    <p>
      To help users identifying devices they care about, every
      device can have direct child <code>alias</code> element
      which then has <code>name</code> attribute where users can
      store identifier for the device. The identifier has to have
      "ua-" prefix and must be unique within the domain. Additionally, the
      identifier must consist only of the following characters:
      <code>[a-zA-Z0-9_-]</code>.
      <span class="since">Since 3.9.0</span>
    </p>

<pre>
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;disk type='file'&gt;
    &lt;alias name='ua-myDisk'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network' trustGuestRxFilters='yes'&gt;
    &lt;alias name='ua-myNIC'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  ...
&lt;/devices&gt;
</pre>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2596 
    <h4><a id="elementsDisks">Hard drives, floppy disks, CDROMs</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603 

    <p>
      Any device that looks like a disk, be it a floppy, harddisk,
      cdrom, or paravirtualized driver is specified via the <code>disk</code>
      element.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
2604 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617 2618 2619 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;disk type='file' snapshot='external'&gt;
    &lt;driver name="tap" type="aio" cache="default"/&gt;
    &lt;source file='/var/lib/xen/images/fv0' startupPolicy='optional'&gt;
      &lt;seclabel relabel='no'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hda' bus='ide'/&gt;
    &lt;iotune&gt;
      &lt;total_bytes_sec&gt;10000000&lt;/total_bytes_sec&gt;
      &lt;read_iops_sec&gt;400000&lt;/read_iops_sec&gt;
      &lt;write_iops_sec&gt;100000&lt;/write_iops_sec&gt;
    &lt;/iotune&gt;
    &lt;boot order='2'/&gt;
    &lt;encryption type='...'&gt;
M
update docs for network disks  
MORITA Kazutaka 已提交
2620 
      ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2626 2627 2628 2629 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636 2637 2638 2639 2640 2641 2642 2643 
    &lt;/encryption&gt;
    &lt;shareable/&gt;
    &lt;serial&gt;
      ...
    &lt;/serial&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
    ...
  &lt;disk type='network'&gt;
    &lt;driver name="qemu" type="raw" io="threads" ioeventfd="on" event_idx="off"/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol="sheepdog" name="image_name"&gt;
      &lt;host name="hostname" port="7000"/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev="hdb" bus="ide"/&gt;
    &lt;boot order='1'/&gt;
    &lt;transient/&gt;
    &lt;address type='drive' controller='0' bus='1' unit='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network'&gt;
    &lt;driver name="qemu" type="raw"/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol="rbd" name="image_name2"&gt;
      &lt;host name="hostname" port="7000"/&gt;
      &lt;snapshot name="snapname"/&gt;
      &lt;config file="/path/to/file"/&gt;
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the auth in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
2644 2645 2646 
      &lt;auth username='myuser'&gt;
        &lt;secret type='ceph' usage='mypassid'/&gt;
      &lt;/auth&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2647 2648 2649 2650 2651 2652 2653 2654 2655 2656 2657 2658 2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666 2667 2668 2669 2670 2671 2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677 2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685 2686 2687 2688 2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev="hdc" bus="ide"/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='block' device='cdrom'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hdd' bus='ide' tray='open'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network' device='cdrom'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol="http" name="url_path"&gt;
      &lt;host name="hostname" port="80"/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hde' bus='ide' tray='open'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network' device='cdrom'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol="https" name="url_path"&gt;
      &lt;host name="hostname" port="443"/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hdf' bus='ide' tray='open'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network' device='cdrom'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol="ftp" name="url_path"&gt;
      &lt;host name="hostname" port="21"/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hdg' bus='ide' tray='open'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network' device='cdrom'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol="ftps" name="url_path"&gt;
      &lt;host name="hostname" port="990"/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hdh' bus='ide' tray='open'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network' device='cdrom'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol="tftp" name="url_path"&gt;
      &lt;host name="hostname" port="69"/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hdi' bus='ide' tray='open'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='block' device='lun'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
M
virstoragefile: Introduce virStoragePRDef  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2697 
    &lt;source dev='/dev/sda'&gt;
P
util: storage: Drop pointless 'enabled' form PR definition  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2698 
      &lt;reservations managed='no'&gt;
M
virstoragefile: Introduce virStoragePRDef  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2699 2700 
        &lt;source type='unix' path='/path/to/qemu-pr-helper' mode='client'/&gt;
      &lt;/reservations&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2701 2702 2703 2704 2705 2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2717 2718 2719 
    &lt;target dev='sda' bus='scsi'/&gt;
    &lt;address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='3' unit='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='block' device='disk'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source dev='/dev/sda'/&gt;
    &lt;geometry cyls='16383' heads='16' secs='63' trans='lba'/&gt;
    &lt;blockio logical_block_size='512' physical_block_size='4096'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hdj' bus='ide'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='volume' device='disk'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source pool='blk-pool0' volume='blk-pool0-vol0'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='hdk' bus='ide'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network' device='disk'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/2'&gt;
      &lt;host name='example.com' port='3260'/&gt;
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the auth in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
2720 2721 2722 
      &lt;auth username='myuser'&gt;
        &lt;secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/&gt;
      &lt;/auth&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2723 2724 2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vda' bus='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='network' device='lun'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-nopool/1'&gt;
      &lt;host name='example.com' port='3260'/&gt;
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the auth in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
2730 2731 2732 
      &lt;auth username='myuser'&gt;
        &lt;secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/&gt;
      &lt;/auth&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2733 2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target dev='sdb' bus='scsi'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='volume' device='disk'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source pool='iscsi-pool' volume='unit:0:0:1' mode='host'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vdb' bus='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='volume' device='disk'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;source pool='iscsi-pool' volume='unit:0:0:2' mode='direct'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vdc' bus='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
  &lt;disk type='file' device='disk'&gt;
L
qemu: Support multiqueue virtio-blk  
Lin Ma 已提交
2747 
    &lt;driver name='qemu' type='qcow2' queues='4'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2748 2749 2750 2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 
    &lt;source file='/var/lib/libvirt/images/domain.qcow'/&gt;
    &lt;backingStore type='file'&gt;
      &lt;format type='qcow2'/&gt;
      &lt;source file='/var/lib/libvirt/images/snapshot.qcow'/&gt;
      &lt;backingStore type='block'&gt;
        &lt;format type='raw'/&gt;
        &lt;source dev='/dev/mapper/base'/&gt;
        &lt;backingStore/&gt;
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
2756 
      &lt;/backingStore&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 
    &lt;/backingStore&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vdd' bus='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;/disk&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2762 2763 2764 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>disk</code></dt>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2765 2766 
      <dd>The <code>disk</code> element is the main container for
      describing disks and supports the following attributes:
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2767 
        <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2768 
          <dt><code>type</code></dt>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2769 2770 2771 2772 2773 2774 
            <dd>
            Valid values are "file", "block",
            "dir" (<span class="since">since 0.7.5</span>),
            "network" (<span class="since">since 0.8.7</span>), or
            "volume" (<span class="since">since 1.0.5</span>)
            and refer to the underlying source for the disk.
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2775 
            <span class="since">Since 0.0.3</span>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2776 
            </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2777 
          <dt><code>device</code></dt>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 
            <dd>
            Indicates how the disk is to be exposed to the guest OS. Possible
            values for this attribute are "floppy", "disk", "cdrom", and "lun",
            defaulting to "disk".
            <p>
            Using "lun" (<span class="since">since 0.9.10</span>) is only
J
scsi: Need to translate disk source pool in config attach path  
John Ferlan 已提交
2784 2785 
            valid when the <code>type</code> is "block" or "network" for
            <code>protocol='iscsi'</code> or when the <code>type</code>
J
docs: Clarification for when allowed to use 'lun' for "volume"  
John Ferlan 已提交
2786 
            is "volume" when using an iSCSI source <code>pool</code>
J
docs: Add Fibre Channel NPIV supported option for volume lun config  
John Ferlan 已提交
2787 2788 2789 
            for <code>mode</code> "host" or as an
            <a href="http://wiki.libvirt.org/page/NPIV_in_libvirt">NPIV</a>
            virtual Host Bus Adapter (vHBA) using a Fibre Channel storage pool.
J
scsi: Need to translate disk source pool in config attach path  
John Ferlan 已提交
2790 
            Configured in this manner, the LUN behaves identically to "disk",
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 
            except that generic SCSI commands from the guest are accepted
            and passed through to the physical device. Also note that
            device='lun' will only be recognized for actual raw devices,
            but never for individual partitions or LVM partitions (in those
            cases, the kernel will reject the generic SCSI commands, making
            it identical to device='disk').
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2797 
            <span class="since">Since 0.1.4</span>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2798 2799 
            </p>
            </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2800 
          <dt><code>rawio</code></dt>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2801 
            <dd>
J
hostdev: Add "rawio" attribute to _virDomainHostdevSubsysSCSI  
John Ferlan 已提交
2802 
            Indicates whether the disk needs rawio capability. Valid
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2803 2804 2805 2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 
            settings are "yes" or "no" (default is "no"). If any one disk
            in a domain has rawio='yes', rawio capability will be enabled
            for all disks in the domain (because, in the case of QEMU, this
            capability can only be set on a per-process basis). This attribute
            is only valid when device is "lun". NB, <code>rawio</code> intends
            to confine the capability per-device, however, current QEMU
            implementation gives the domain process broader capability
            than that (per-process basis, affects all the domain disks).
            To confine the capability as much as possible for QEMU driver
            as this stage, <code>sgio</code> is recommended, it's more
            secure than <code>rawio</code>.
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2814 
            <span class="since">Since 0.9.10</span>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2815 
            </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2816 
          <dt><code>sgio</code></dt>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2817 
            <dd>
J
docs: Clarify unprivileged sgio feature  
John Ferlan 已提交
2818 2819 2820 2821 
            If supported by the hypervisor and OS, indicates whether
            unprivileged SG_IO commands are filtered for the disk. Valid
            settings are "filtered" or "unfiltered" where the default is
            "filtered". Only available when the <code>device</code> is 'lun'.
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2822 
            <span class="since">Since 1.0.2</span>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2823 
            </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2824 
          <dt><code>snapshot</code></dt>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2825 2826 
            <dd>
            Indicates the default behavior of the disk during disk snapshots:
P
docs: domain: Fix documentation of the 'snapshot' attribute for <disk>  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832 2833 
            "<code>internal</code>" requires a file format such as qcow2 that
            can store both the snapshot and the data changes since the snapshot;
            "<code>external</code>" will separate the snapshot from the live
            data; and "<code>no</code>" means the disk will not participate in
            snapshots. Read-only disks default to "<code>no</code>", while the
            default for other disks depends on the hypervisor's capabilities.
            Some hypervisors allow a per-snapshot choice as well, during
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2834 
            <a href="formatsnapshot.html">domain snapshot creation</a>.
P
docs: domain: Fix documentation of the 'snapshot' attribute for <disk>  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2835 2836 
            Not all snapshot modes are supported; for example, enabling
            snapshots with a transient disk generally does not make sense.
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2837 
            <span class="since">Since 0.9.5</span>
J
docs: Reformat <disk> attribute description in formatdomain  
John Ferlan 已提交
2838 2839 2840 
            </dd>
        </dl>
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
2841 
      <dt><code>source</code></dt>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2842 2843 2844 
      <dd>Representation of the disk <code>source</code> depends on the
      disk <code>type</code> attribute value as follows:
          <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2845 
            <dt><code>file</code></dt>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2846 2847 2848 
              <dd>
              The <code>file</code> attribute specifies the fully-qualified
              path to the file holding the disk.
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2849 
              <span class="since">Since 0.0.3</span>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2850 
              </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2851 
            <dt><code>block</code></dt>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2852 
              <dd>
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
2853 2854 
              The <code>dev</code> attribute specifies the fully-qualified path
              to the host device to serve as the disk.
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2855 
              <span class="since">Since 0.0.3</span>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2856 
              </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2857 
            <dt><code>dir</code></dt>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2858 2859 2860 
              <dd>
              The <code>dir</code> attribute specifies the fully-qualified path
              to the directory to use as the disk.
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2861 
              <span class="since">Since 0.7.5</span>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2862 
              </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2863 
            <dt><code>network</code></dt>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2864 2865 2866 
              <dd>
              The <code>protocol</code> attribute specifies the protocol to
              access to the requested image. Possible values are "nbd",
J
docs: Clean up the description for network disk protocol options  
John Ferlan 已提交
2867 2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 
              "iscsi", "rbd", "sheepdog", "gluster" or "vxhs".

              <p>If the <code>protocol</code> attribute is "rbd", "sheepdog",
              "gluster", or "vxhs", an additional attribute <code>name</code>
              is mandatory to specify which volume/image will be used.
              </p>
P
qemu: domain: Add support for TLS for NBD  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 
              <p>For "nbd", the <code>name</code> attribute is optional. TLS
              transport for NBD can be enabled by setting the <code>tls</code>
              attribute to <code>yes</code>. For the QEMU hypervisor, usage of
              a TLS environment can also be globally controlled on the host by
              the <code>nbd_tls</code> and <code>nbd_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> in
              /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf.
              ('tls' <span class="since">Since 4.5.0</span>)
J
docs: Clean up the description for network disk protocol options  
John Ferlan 已提交
2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 
              </p>

              <p>For "iscsi" (<span class="since">since 1.0.4</span>), the
              <code>name</code> attribute may include a logical unit number,
              separated from the target's name by a slash (e.g.,
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2886 2887 
              <code>iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool/1</code>). If not
              specified, the default LUN is zero.
J
docs: Clean up the description for network disk protocol options  
John Ferlan 已提交
2888 2889 
              </p>
A
util: Add TLS attributes to virStorageSource  
Ashish Mittal 已提交
2890 
              <p>For "vxhs" (<span class="since">since 3.8.0</span>), the
A
docs: Add schema and docs for Veritas HyperScale (VxHS)  
Ashish Mittal 已提交
2891 
              <code>name</code> is the UUID of the volume, assigned by the
A
util: Add TLS attributes to virStorageSource  
Ashish Mittal 已提交
2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 
              HyperScale server. Additionally, an optional attribute
              <code>tls</code> (QEMU only) can be used to control whether a
              VxHS block device would utilize a hypervisor configured TLS
              X.509 certificate environment in order to encrypt the data
              channel. For the QEMU hypervisor, usage of a TLS environment can
              also be globally controlled on the host by the
              <code>vxhs_tls</code> and <code>vxhs_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> or
              <code>default_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> settings in the file
              /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. If <code>vxhs_tls</code> is enabled,
              then unless the domain <code>tls</code> attribute is set to "no",
              libvirt will use the host configured TLS environment. If the
              <code>tls</code> attribute is set to "yes", then regardless of
              the qemu.conf setting, TLS authentication will be attempted.
J
docs: Clean up the description for network disk protocol options  
John Ferlan 已提交
2905 
              </p>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2906 
              <span class="since">Since 0.8.7</span>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2907 
              </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2908 
            <dt><code>volume</code></dt>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2909 2910 2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932 2933 2934 
              <dd>
              The underlying disk source is represented by attributes
              <code>pool</code> and <code>volume</code>. Attribute
              <code>pool</code> specifies the name of the
              <a href="formatstorage.html">storage pool</a> (managed
              by libvirt) where the disk source resides. Attribute
              <code>volume</code> specifies the name of storage volume (managed
              by libvirt) used as the disk source. The value for the
              <code>volume</code> attribute will be the output from the "Name"
              column of a <code>virsh vol-list [pool-name]</code> command.
              <p>
              Use the attribute <code>mode</code>
              (<span class="since">since 1.1.1</span>) to indicate how to
              represent the LUN as the disk source. Valid values are
              "direct" and "host". If <code>mode</code> is not specified,
              the default is to use "host".

              Using "direct" as the <code>mode</code> value indicates to use
              the <a href="formatstorage.html">storage pool's</a>
              <code>source</code> element <code>host</code> attribute as
              the disk source to generate the libiscsi URI (e.g.
              'file=iscsi://example.com:3260/iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool/1').

              Using "host" as the <code>mode</code> value indicates to use the
              LUN's path as it shows up on host (e.g.
              'file=/dev/disk/by-path/ip-example.com:3260-iscsi-iqn.2013-07.com.example:iscsi-pool-lun-1').
J
scsi: Need to translate disk source pool in config attach path  
John Ferlan 已提交
2935 2936 2937 

              Using a LUN from an iSCSI source pool provides the same
              features as a <code>disk</code> configured using
J
docs: Fix disk "volume" description  
John Ferlan 已提交
2938 
              <code>type</code> 'block' or 'network' and <code>device</code>
J
scsi: Need to translate disk source pool in config attach path  
John Ferlan 已提交
2939 
              of 'lun' with respect to how the LUN is presented to and
J
docs: Fix disk "volume" description  
John Ferlan 已提交
2940 
              may be used by the guest.
J
scsi: Need to translate disk source pool in config attach path  
John Ferlan 已提交
2941
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
2942 
              <span class="since">Since 1.0.5</span>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2943 2944 2945 2946 
              </p>
              </dd>
          </dl>
        With "file", "block", and "volume", one or more optional
M
Multiple security drivers in XML data  
Marcelo Cerri 已提交
2947 
        sub-elements <code>seclabel</code>, <a href="#seclabel">described
E
seclabel: extend XML to allow per-disk label overrides  
Eric Blake 已提交
2948 2949 
        below</a> (and <span class="since">since 0.9.9</span>), can be
        used to override the domain security labeling policy for just
O
Support seclabels for volume type disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
2950 2951 
        that source file. (NB, for "volume" type disk, <code>seclabel</code>
        is only valid when the specified storage volume is of 'file' or
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2952 2953 
        'block' type).
        <p>
P
storage: rbd: qemu: Add support for specifying internal RBD snapshots  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2954 
        The <code>source</code> element may contain the following sub elements:
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
2955 
        </p>
P
docs: domain: Move docs for storage hosts under the <source> element  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 

        <dl>
          <dt><code>host</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
P
storage: rbd: qemu: Add support for specifying internal RBD snapshots  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2961 2962 2963 2964 
            When the disk <code>type</code> is "network", the <code>source</code>
            may have zero or more <code>host</code> sub-elements used to
            specify the hosts to connect.
P
docs: domain: Move docs for storage hosts under the <source> element  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971 2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982 2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 
            The <code>host</code> element supports 4 attributes, viz.  "name",
            "port", "transport" and "socket", which specify the hostname,
            the port number, transport type and path to socket, respectively.
            The meaning of this element and the number of the elements depend
            on the protocol attribute.
            </p>
            <table class="top_table">
              <tr>
                <th> Protocol </th>
                <th> Meaning </th>
                <th> Number of hosts </th>
                <th> Default port </th>
              </tr>
              <tr>
                <td> nbd </td>
                <td> a server running nbd-server </td>
                <td> only one </td>
                <td> 10809 </td>
              </tr>
              <tr>
                <td> iscsi </td>
                <td> an iSCSI server </td>
                <td> only one </td>
                <td> 3260 </td>
              </tr>
              <tr>
                <td> rbd </td>
                <td> monitor servers of RBD </td>
                <td> one or more </td>
W
rbd: Do not append Ceph monitor port number 6789 if not provided  
Wido den Hollander 已提交
2994 
                <td> librados default </td>
P
docs: domain: Move docs for storage hosts under the <source> element  
Peter Krempa 已提交
2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 
              </tr>
              <tr>
                <td> sheepdog </td>
                <td> one of the sheepdog servers (default is localhost:7000) </td>
                <td> zero or one </td>
                <td> 7000 </td>
              </tr>
              <tr>
                <td> gluster </td>
                <td> a server running glusterd daemon </td>
P
qemu: command: Add support for multi-host gluster disks  
Prasanna Kumar Kalever 已提交
3005 
                <td> one or more (<span class="since">Since 2.1.0</span>), just one prior to that </td>
P
docs: domain: Move docs for storage hosts under the <source> element  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3006 3007 
                <td> 24007 </td>
              </tr>
A
docs: Add schema and docs for Veritas HyperScale (VxHS)  
Ashish Mittal 已提交
3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 
              <tr>
                <td> vxhs </td>
                <td> a server running Veritas HyperScale daemon </td>
                <td> only one </td>
                <td> 9999 </td>
              </tr>
P
docs: domain: Move docs for storage hosts under the <source> element  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3014 3015 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 
            </table>
            <p>
            gluster supports "tcp", "rdma", "unix" as valid values for the
            transport attribute.  nbd supports "tcp" and "unix".  Others only
            support "tcp".  If nothing is specified, "tcp" is assumed. If the
            transport is "unix", the socket attribute specifies the path to an
            AF_UNIX socket.
            </p>
          </dd>
P
storage: rbd: qemu: Add support for specifying internal RBD snapshots  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3023 3024 3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 
          <dt><code>snapshot</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The <code>name</code> attribute of <code>snapshot</code> element can
            optionally specify an internal snapshot name to be used as the
            source for storage protocols.
            Supported for 'rbd' <span class="since">since 1.2.11 (QEMU only).</span>
          </dd>
P
storage: rbd: Implement support for passing config file option  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 
          <dt><code>config</code></dt>
          <dd>
            The <code>file</code> attribute for the <code>config</code> element
            provides a fully qualified path to a configuration file to be
            provided as a parameter to the client of a networked storage
            protocol. Supported for 'rbd' <span class="since">since 1.2.11
            (QEMU only).</span>
          </dd>
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the auth in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 
          <dt><code>auth</code></dt>
          <dd><span class="since">Since libvirt 3.9.0</span>, the
            <code>auth</code> element is supported for a disk
            <code>type</code> "network" that is using a <code>source</code>
            element with the <code>protocol</code> attributes "rbd" or "iscsi".
            If present, the <code>auth</code> element provides the
            authentication credentials needed to access the source.  It
            includes a mandatory attribute <code>username</code>, which
            identifies the username to use during authentication, as well
            as a sub-element <code>secret</code> with mandatory
            attribute <code>type</code>, to tie back to
            a <a href="formatsecret.html">libvirt secret object</a> that
            holds the actual password or other credentials (the domain XML
            intentionally does not expose the password, only the reference
            to the object that does manage the password).
            Known secret types are "ceph" for Ceph RBD network sources and
            "iscsi" for CHAP authentication of iSCSI targets.
            Both will require either a <code>uuid</code> attribute
            with the UUID of the secret object or a <code>usage</code>
            attribute matching the key that was specified in the
            secret object.
          </dd>
J
docs: Add missing element encryption description term entry  
John Ferlan 已提交
3060 
          <dt><code>encryption</code></dt>
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the encryption in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 
          <dd><span class="since">Since libvirt 3.9.0</span>, the
            <code>encryption</code> can be a sub-element of the
            <code>source</code> element for encrypted storage sources.
            If present, specifies how the storage source is encrypted
            See the
            <a href="formatstorageencryption.html">Storage Encryption</a>
            page for more information.
P
qemu: domain: Forbid storage with old QCOW2 encryption  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3068 3069 3070 3071 
            <p/>
            Note that the 'qcow' format of encryption is broken and thus is no
            longer supported for use with disk images.
            (<span class="since">Since libvirt 4.5.0</span>)
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the encryption in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
3072 
          </dd>
M
virstoragefile: Introduce virStoragePRDef  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3073 3074 3075 3076 
          <dt><code>reservations</code></dt>
          <dd><span class="since">Since libvirt 4.4.0</span>, the
            <code>reservations</code> can be a sub-element of the
            <code>source</code> element for storage sources (QEMU driver only).
P
util: storage: Drop pointless 'enabled' form PR definition  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3077 
            If present it enables persistent reservations for SCSI
M
virstoragefile: Introduce virStoragePRDef  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3078 
            based disks. The element has one mandatory attribute
P
util: storage: Drop pointless 'enabled' form PR definition  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084 3085 3086 3087 
            <code>managed</code> with accepted values <code>yes</code> and
            <code>no</code>. If <code>managed</code> is enabled libvirt prepares
            and manages any resources needed. When the persistent reservations
            are unmanaged, then the hypervisor acts as a client and the path to
            the server socket must be provided in the child element
            <code>source</code>, which currently accepts only the following
            attributes:
            <code>type</code> with one value <code>unix</code>,
            <code>path</code> path to the socket, and
M
virstoragefile: Introduce virStoragePRDef  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3088 
            finally <code>mode</code> which accepts one value
P
util: storage: Drop pointless 'enabled' form PR definition  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3089 
            <code>client</code> specifying the role of hypervisor.
M
virstoragefile: Introduce virStoragePRDef  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3090 3091 3092 
            It's recommended to allow libvirt manage the persistent
            reservations.
          </dd>
P
docs: domain: Move docs for storage hosts under the <source> element  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3093 3094 
        </dl>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
3095 
        <p>
O
Support startupPolicy for 'volume' disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3096 
        For a "file" or "volume" disk type which represents a cdrom or floppy
C
Add documentation for <disk><source type="dir">  
Christophe Fergeau 已提交
3097 3098 
        (the <code>device</code> attribute), it is possible to define
        policy what to do with the disk if the source file is not accessible.
O
Support startupPolicy for 'volume' disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3099 3100 
        (NB, <code>startupPolicy</code> is not valid for "volume" disk unless
         the specified storage volume is of "file" type). This is done by the
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
3101 3102 
        <code>startupPolicy</code> attribute
        (<span class="since">since 0.9.7</span>),
G
conf: add startupPolicy attribute for harddisk  
Guannan Ren 已提交
3103 
        accepting these values:
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
3104 
        </p>
M
conf: Introduce optional startupPolicy attribute for cdrom and floppy  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3110 3111 3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 
        <table class="top_table">
          <tr>
            <td> mandatory </td>
            <td> fail if missing for any reason (the default) </td>
          </tr>
          <tr>
            <td> requisite </td>
            <td> fail if missing on boot up,
                 drop if missing on migrate/restore/revert </td>
          </tr>
          <tr>
            <td> optional </td>
            <td> drop if missing at any start attempt </td>
          </tr>
        </table>
J
docs: Update the formatdomain disk examples  
John Ferlan 已提交
3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 
        <p>
        <span class="since">Since 1.1.2</span> the <code>startupPolicy</code>
        is extended to support hard disks besides cdrom and floppy. On guest
        cold bootup, if a certain disk is not accessible or its disk chain is
        broken, with startupPolicy 'optional' the guest will drop this disk.
        This feature doesn't support migration currently.
        </p>
M
conf: Introduce optional startupPolicy attribute for cdrom and floppy  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3127 
        </dd>
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3128 3129 
      <dt><code>backingStore</code></dt>
      <dd>
D
doc: Fix doc for backingStore  
Deepak Shetty 已提交
3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143 
        This element describes the backing store used by the disk
        specified by sibling <code>source</code> element. It is
        currently ignored on input and only used for output to
        describe the detected backing chains of running
        domains <span class="since">since 1.2.4</span> (although a
        future version of libvirt may start accepting chains on input,
        or output information for offline domains). An
        empty <code>backingStore</code> element means the sibling
        source is self-contained and is not based on any backing
        store. For backing chain information to be accurate, the
        backing format must be correctly specified in the metadata of
        each file of the chain (files created by libvirt satisfy this
        property, but using existing external files for snapshot or
        block copy operations requires the end user to pre-create the
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3144 
        file correctly). The following attributes are
D
doc: Fix doc for backingStore  
Deepak Shetty 已提交
3145 
        supported in <code>backingStore</code>:
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3146 
        <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3147 
          <dt><code>type</code></dt>
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 
          <dd>
            The <code>type</code> attribute represents the type of disk used
            by the backing store, see disk type attribute above for more
            details and possible values.
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3153 
          <dt><code>index</code></dt>
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 
          <dd>
            This attribute is only valid in output (and ignored on input) and
            it can be used to refer to a specific part of the disk chain when
            doing block operations (such as via the
            <code>virDomainBlockRebase</code> API). For example,
            <code>vda[2]</code> refers to the backing store with
            <code>index='2'</code> of the disk with <code>vda</code> target.
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3162 3163 3164 3165 
        </dl>
        Moreover, <code>backingStore</code> supports the following sub-elements:
        <dl>
          <dt><code>format</code></dt>
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3166 3167 3168 3169 3170 
          <dd>
            The <code>format</code> element contains <code>type</code>
            attribute which specifies the internal format of the backing
            store, such as <code>raw</code> or <code>qcow2</code>.
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3171 
          <dt><code>source</code></dt>
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 
          <dd>
            This element has the same structure as the <code>source</code>
            element in <code>disk</code>. It specifies which file, device,
            or network location contains the data of the described backing
            store.
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3178 
          <dt><code>backingStore</code></dt>
J
conf: Output disk backing store details in domain XML  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 
          <dd>
            If the backing store is not self-contained, the next element
            in the chain is described by nested <code>backingStore</code>
            element.
          </dd>
        </dl>
      </dd>
E
blockjob: enhance xml to track mirrors across libvirtd restart  
Eric Blake 已提交
3186 3187 
      <dt><code>mirror</code></dt>
      <dd>
E
blockcommit: track job type in xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
3188 3189 3190 3191 
        This element is present if the hypervisor has started a
        long-running block job operation, where the mirror location in
        the <code>source</code> sub-element will eventually have the
        same contents as the source, and with the file format in the
E
conf: alter disk mirror xml output  
Eric Blake 已提交
3192 3193 3194 3195 
        sub-element <code>format</code> (which might differ from the
        format of the source).  The details of the <code>source</code>
        sub-element are determined by the <code>type</code> attribute
        of the mirror, similar to what is done for the
E
blockcommit: track job type in xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
3196 3197 3198 3199 3200 
        overall <code>disk</code> device element. The <code>job</code>
        attribute mentions which API started the operation ("copy" for
        the <code>virDomainBlockRebase</code> API, or "active-commit"
        for the <code>virDomainBlockCommit</code>
        API), <span class="since">since 1.2.7</span>.  The
E
blockcopy: add more XML for state tracking  
Eric Blake 已提交
3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 
        attribute <code>ready</code>, if present, tracks progress of
        the job: <code>yes</code> if the disk is known to be ready to
        pivot, or, <span class="since">since
        1.2.7</span>, <code>abort</code> or <code>pivot</code> if the
        job is in the process of completing.  If <code>ready</code> is
        not present, the disk is probably still
E
blockjob: enhance xml to track mirrors across libvirtd restart  
Eric Blake 已提交
3207 
        copying.  For now, this element only valid in output; it is
E
blockjob: don't remove older-style mirror XML  
Eric Blake 已提交
3208 3209 3210 3211 3212 3213 3214 
        ignored on input.  The <code>source</code> sub-element exists
        for all two-phase jobs <span class="since">since 1.2.6</span>.
        Older libvirt supported only block copy to a
        file, <span class="since">since 0.9.12</span>; for
        compatibility with older clients, such jobs include redundant
        information in the attributes <code>file</code>
        and <code>format</code> in the <code>mirror</code> element.
E
blockjob: enhance xml to track mirrors across libvirtd restart  
Eric Blake 已提交
3215 
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3216 
      <dt><code>target</code></dt>
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
3217 3218 3219 3220 3221 3222 3223 3224 
      <dd>The <code>target</code> element controls the bus / device
        under which the disk is exposed to the guest
        OS. The <code>dev</code> attribute indicates the "logical"
        device name. The actual device name specified is not
        guaranteed to map to the device name in the guest OS. Treat it
        as a device ordering hint.  The optional <code>bus</code>
        attribute specifies the type of disk device to emulate;
        possible values are driver specific, with typical values being
C
domain_conf: Add disk bus=sd, wire it up for qemu  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3225 3226 
        "ide", "scsi", "virtio", "xen", "usb", "sata", or
        "sd" <span class="since">"sd" since 1.1.2</span>. If omitted, the bus
M
docs: aesthetical cleanups  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
3227 3228 
        type is inferred from the style of the device name (e.g. a device named
        'sda' will typically be exported using a SCSI bus). The optional
O
docs: Add documentation for new attribute tray of disk target  
Osier Yang 已提交
3229 3230 3231 3232 
        attribute <code>tray</code> indicates the tray status of the
        removable disks (i.e. CDROM or Floppy disk), the value can be either
        "open" or "closed", defaults to "closed". NB, the value of
        <code>tray</code> could be updated while the domain is running.
F
qemu: Support setting the 'removable' flag for USB disks  
Fred A. Kemp 已提交
3233 3234 3235 3236 
        The optional attribute <code>removable</code> sets the
        removable flag for USB disks, and its value can be either "on"
        or "off", defaulting to "off". <span class="since">Since
        0.0.3; <code>bus</code> attribute since 0.4.3;
O
docs: Add documentation for new attribute tray of disk target  
Osier Yang 已提交
3237 
        <code>tray</code> attribute since 0.9.11; "usb" attribute value since
F
qemu: Support setting the 'removable' flag for USB disks  
Fred A. Kemp 已提交
3238 3239 
        after 0.4.4; "sata" attribute value since 0.9.7; "removable" attribute
        value since 1.1.3</span>
O
docs: Add documentation for new attribute tray of disk target  
Osier Yang 已提交
3240 
      </dd>
L
Support block I/O throttle in XML  
Lei Li 已提交
3241 3242 3243 3244 3245 3246 3247 3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 
      <dt><code>iotune</code></dt>
      <dd>The optional <code>iotune</code> element provides the
        ability to provide additional per-device I/O tuning, with
        values that can vary for each device (contrast this to
        the <a href="#elementsBlockTuning"><code>&lt;blkiotune&gt;</code></a>
        element, which applies globally to the domain).  Currently,
        the only tuning available is Block I/O throttling for qemu.
        This element has optional sub-elements; any sub-element not
        specified or given with a value of 0 implies no
        limit.  <span class="since">Since 0.9.8</span>
        <dl>
          <dt><code>total_bytes_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>total_bytes_sec</code> element is the
            total throughput limit in bytes per second.  This cannot
            appear with <code>read_bytes_sec</code>
            or <code>write_bytes_sec</code>.</dd>
          <dt><code>read_bytes_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>read_bytes_sec</code> element is the
            read throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd>
          <dt><code>write_bytes_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>write_bytes_sec</code> element is the
            write throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd>
          <dt><code>total_iops_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>total_iops_sec</code> element is the
            total I/O operations per second.  This cannot
            appear with <code>read_iops_sec</code>
            or <code>write_iops_sec</code>.</dd>
          <dt><code>read_iops_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>read_iops_sec</code> element is the
            read I/O operations per second.</dd>
          <dt><code>write_iops_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>write_iops_sec</code> element is the
            write I/O operations per second.</dd>
M
qemu: Modify the structure _virDomainBlockIoTuneInfo.  
Matthias Gatto 已提交
3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279 3280 3281 3282 3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291 3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 
          <dt><code>total_bytes_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>total_bytes_sec_max</code> element is the
            maximum total throughput limit in bytes per second.  This cannot
            appear with <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code>
            or <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code>.</dd>
          <dt><code>read_bytes_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code> element is the
            maximum read throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd>
          <dt><code>write_bytes_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code> element is the
            maximum write throughput limit in bytes per second.</dd>
          <dt><code>total_iops_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>total_iops_sec_max</code> element is the
            maximum total I/O operations per second.  This cannot
            appear with <code>read_iops_sec_max</code>
            or <code>write_iops_sec_max</code>.</dd>
          <dt><code>read_iops_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>read_iops_sec_max</code> element is the
            maximum read I/O operations per second.</dd>
          <dt><code>write_iops_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>write_iops_sec_max</code> element is the
            maximum write I/O operations per second.</dd>
          <dt><code>size_iops_sec</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>size_iops_sec</code> element is the
J
conf: Add support for blkiotune "_length" options  
John Ferlan 已提交
3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 
            size of I/O operations per second.
          <p>
            <span class="since">Throughput limits since 1.2.11 and QEMU 1.7</span>
          </p>
          </dd>
J
conf: Add support for blkiotune group_name option  
John Ferlan 已提交
3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 3310 3311 3312 3313 
          <dt><code>group_name</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>group_name</code> provides the cability
            to share I/O throttling quota between multiple drives. This
            prevents end-users from circumventing a hosting provider's
            throttling policy by splitting 1 large drive in N small drives
            and getting N times the normal throttling quota. Any name may
            be used.
          <p>
            <span class="since">group_name since 3.0.0 and QEMU 2.4</span>
          </p>
          </dd>
J
conf: Add support for blkiotune "_length" options  
John Ferlan 已提交
3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322 3323 3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346 3347 
          <dt><code>total_bytes_sec_max_length</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>total_bytes_sec_max_length</code>
            element is the maximum duration in seconds for the
            <code>total_bytes_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid
            when the <code>total_bytes_sec_max</code> is set.</dd>
          <dt><code>read_bytes_sec_max_length</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>read_bytes_sec_max_length</code>
            element is the maximum duration in seconds for the
            <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid
            when the <code>read_bytes_sec_max</code> is set.</dd>
          <dt><code>write_bytes_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>write_bytes_sec_max_length</code>
            element is the maximum duration in seconds for the
            <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid
            when the <code>write_bytes_sec_max</code> is set.</dd>
          <dt><code>total_iops_sec_max_length</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>total_iops_sec_max_length</code>
            element is the maximum duration in seconds for the
            <code>total_iops_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid
            when the <code>total_iops_sec_max</code> is set.</dd>
          <dt><code>read_iops_sec_max_length</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>read_iops_sec_max_length</code>
            element is the maximum duration in seconds for the
            <code>read_iops_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid
            when the <code>read_iops_sec_max</code> is set.</dd>
          <dt><code>write_iops_sec_max</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>write_iops_sec_max_length</code>
            element is the maximum duration in seconds for the
            <code>write_iops_sec_max</code> burst period. Only valid
            when the <code>write_iops_sec_max</code> is set.
          <p>
            <span class="since">Throughput length since 2.4.0 and QEMU 2.6</span>
          </p>
          </dd>
L
Support block I/O throttle in XML  
Lei Li 已提交
3348 
        </dl>
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3349 
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3350 
      <dt><code>driver</code></dt>
M
qemu aio: add XML parsing  
Matthias Dahl 已提交
3351 3352 3353 
      <dd>
        The optional driver element allows specifying further details
        related to the hypervisor driver used to provide the disk.
C
docs/formatdomain: Add release info for disk <driver> attributes  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3354 
        <span class="since">Since 0.1.8</span>
M
qemu aio: add XML parsing  
Matthias Dahl 已提交
3355 3356 3357 3358 3359 3360 3361 3362 3363 3364 3365 3366 3367 3368 
        <ul>
          <li>
            If the hypervisor supports multiple backend drivers, then
            the <code>name</code> attribute selects the primary
            backend driver name, while the optional <code>type</code>
            attribute provides the sub-type.  For example, xen
            supports a name of "tap", "tap2", "phy", or "file", with a
            type of "aio", while qemu only supports a name of "qemu",
            but multiple types including "raw", "bochs", "qcow2", and
            "qed".
          </li>
          <li>
            The optional <code>cache</code> attribute controls the
            cache mechanism, possible values are "default", "none",
O
Add unsafe cache mode support for disk driver  
Oskari Saarenmaa 已提交
3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376 3377 
            "writethrough", "writeback", "directsync" (like
            "writethrough", but it bypasses the host page cache) and
            "unsafe" (host may cache all disk io, and sync requests from
            guest are ignored).
            <span class="since">
              Since 0.6.0,
              "directsync" since 0.9.5,
              "unsafe" since 0.9.7
            </span>
M
qemu aio: add XML parsing  
Matthias Dahl 已提交
3378 3379 3380 
          </li>
          <li>
            The optional <code>error_policy</code> attribute controls
L
qemu: add separate rerror_policy for disk errors  
Laine Stump 已提交
3381 3382 3383 
            how the hypervisor will behave on a disk read or write
            error, possible values are "stop", "report", "ignore", and
            "enospace".<span class="since">Since 0.8.0, "report" since
P
doc: Correct the default werror policy  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
3384 3385 
            0.9.7</span> The default is left to the discretion of the
            hypervisor. There is also an
L
qemu: add separate rerror_policy for disk errors  
Laine Stump 已提交
3386 3387 
            optional <code>rerror_policy</code> that controls behavior
            for read errors only. <span class="since">Since
E
docs: fix html bug  
Eric Blake 已提交
3388 
            0.9.7</span>. If no rerror_policy is given, error_policy
L
qemu: add separate rerror_policy for disk errors  
Laine Stump 已提交
3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 
            is used for both read and write errors. If rerror_policy
            is given, it overrides the <code>error_policy</code> for
            read errors. Also note that "enospace" is not a valid
            policy for read errors, so if <code>error_policy</code> is
            set to "enospace" and no <code>rerror_policy</code> is
P
doc: Correct the default werror policy  
Philipp Hahn 已提交
3394 
            given, the read error policy will be left at its default.
M
qemu aio: add XML parsing  
Matthias Dahl 已提交
3395 3396 3397 3398 
          </li>
          <li>
            The optional <code>io</code> attribute controls specific
            policies on I/O; qemu guests support "threads" and
C
docs/formatdomain: Add release info for disk <driver> attributes  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3399 
            "native". <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span>
M
qemu aio: add XML parsing  
Matthias Dahl 已提交
3400 
          </li>
M
qemu: domain I/O asynchronous handling  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 
          <li>
            The optional <code>ioeventfd</code> attribute allows users to
            set <a href='https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/'>
            domain I/O asynchronous handling</a> for disk device.
            The default is left to the discretion of the hypervisor.
            Accepted values are "on" and "off". Enabling this allows
            qemu to execute VM while a separate thread handles I/O.
            Typically guests experiencing high system CPU utilization
            during I/O will benefit from this. On the other hand,
            on overloaded host it could increase guest I/O latency.
            <span class="since">Since 0.9.3 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
            <b>In general you should leave this option alone, unless you
            are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
          </li>
L
qemu: support event_idx parameter for virtio disk and net devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
3415 3416 3417 3418 
          <li>
            The optional <code>event_idx</code> attribute controls
            some aspects of device event processing. The value can be
            either 'on' or 'off' - if it is on, it will reduce the
Y
Fix some typos in messages, docs and comments.  
Yuri Chornoivan 已提交
3419 
            number of interrupts and exits for the guest. The default
L
qemu: support event_idx parameter for virtio disk and net devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427 
            is determined by QEMU; usually if the feature is
            supported, default is on. In case there is a situation
            where this behavior is suboptimal, this attribute provides
            a way to force the feature off.
            <span class="since">Since 0.9.5 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
            <b>In general you should leave this option alone, unless you
            are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
          </li>
O
qemu: Support copy on read for disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3428 3429 
          <li>
            The optional <code>copy_on_read</code> attribute controls
Y
Fix some typos in messages, docs and comments.  
Yuri Chornoivan 已提交
3430 
            whether to copy read backing file into the image file. The
O
qemu: Support copy on read for disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 
            value can be either "on" or "off".
            Copy-on-read avoids accessing the same backing file sectors
            repeatedly and is useful when the backing file is over a slow
            network. By default copy-on-read is off.
            <span class='since'>Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
          </li>
O
qemu: Support discard for disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3437 3438 
          <li>
            The optional <code>discard</code> attribute controls whether
C
docs: formatdomain: Tweak disk discard= docs  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3439 
            discard requests (also known as "trim" or "unmap") are
O
qemu: Support discard for disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3440 
            ignored or passed to the filesystem. The value can be either
O
qemu: Change values of disk discard  
Osier Yang 已提交
3441 3442 
            "unmap" (allow the discard request to be passed) or "ignore"
            (ignore the discard request).
O
qemu: Support discard for disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3443 3444 
            <span class='since'>Since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
          </li>
M
conf: Add support of zero-detection for disks  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
3445 3446 3447 3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 
          <li>
            The optional <code>detect_zeroes</code> attribute controls whether
            to detect zero write requests.  The value can be "off", "on" or
            "unmap".  First two values turn the detection off and on,
            respectively.  The third value ("unmap") turns the detection on
            and additionally tries to discard such areas from the image based
            on the value of <code>discard</code> above (it will act as "on"
            if <code>discard</code> is set to "ignore").  NB enabling the
            detection is a compute intensive operation, but can save file
            space and/or time on slow media.
M
Change 1.3.6 occurrences to 2.0.0 to follow version bump  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
3455 
            <span class='since'>Since 2.0.0</span>
M
conf: Add support of zero-detection for disks  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
3456 
          </li>
J
domain_conf: Add support for iothreads in disk definition  
John Ferlan 已提交
3457 3458 3459 3460 
          <li>
            The optional <code>iothread</code> attribute assigns the
            disk to an IOThread as defined by the range for the domain
            <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>iothreads</code></a>
J
docs: clarify disk iothread support  
John Ferlan 已提交
3461 3462 3463 3464 3465 
            value. Multiple disks may be assigned to the same IOThread and
            are numbered from 1 to the domain iothreads value. Available
            for a disk device <code>target</code> configured to use "virtio"
            <code>bus</code> and "pci" or "ccw" <code>address</code> types.
            <span class='since'>Since 1.2.8 (QEMU 2.1)</span>
J
domain_conf: Add support for iothreads in disk definition  
John Ferlan 已提交
3466 
          </li>
L
qemu: Support multiqueue virtio-blk  
Lin Ma 已提交
3467 3468 3469 3470 
          <li>
            The optional <code>queues</code> attribute specifies the number of
            virt queues for virtio-blk. (<span class="since">Since 3.9.0</span>)
          </li>
J
Add virtio-related options to disks  
Ján Tomko 已提交
3471 3472 3473 3474 3475 
          <li>
          For virtio disks,
          <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
          set. (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
          </li>
M
qemu aio: add XML parsing  
Matthias Dahl 已提交
3476 
        </ul>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3477 
      </dd>
M
conf: support backend domain name in disk and network devices  
Marek Marczykowski 已提交
3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 
      <dt><code>backenddomain</code></dt>
      <dd>The optional <code>backenddomain</code> element allows specifying a
          backend domain (aka driver domain) hosting the disk.  Use the
          <code>name</code> attribute to specify the backend domain name.
          <span class="since">Since 1.2.13 (Xen only)</span>
      </dd>
J
Introduce per-device boot element  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3484 3485 3486 
      <dt><code>boot</code></dt>
      <dd>Specifies that the disk is bootable. The <code>order</code>
        attribute determines the order in which devices will be tried during
F
conf: Add loadparm boot option for a boot device  
Farhan Ali 已提交
3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 
        boot sequence. On the S390 architecture only the first boot device is
        used. The optional <code>loadparm</code> attribute is an 8 character
        string which can be queried by guests on S390 via sclp or diag 308.
        Linux guests on S390 can use <code>loadparm</code> to select a boot
        entry. <span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>
        The per-device <code>boot</code> elements cannot be used together
        with general boot elements in
J
Introduce per-device boot element  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3494 3495 3496 
        <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section.
        <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span>
      </dd>
M
Attach encryption information to virDomainDiskDef.  
Miloslav Trmač 已提交
3497 
      <dt><code>encryption</code></dt>
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the encryption in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 
      <dd>Starting with <span class="since">libvirt 3.9.0</span> the
        <code>encryption</code> element is preferred to be a sub-element
        of the <code>source</code> element. If present, specifies how the
        volume is encrypted using "qcow". See the
        <a href="formatstorageencryption.html">Storage Encryption</a> page
M
Attach encryption information to virDomainDiskDef.  
Miloslav Trmač 已提交
3503 3504 
        for more information.
      </dd>
E
snapshot: additions to domain xml for disks  
Eric Blake 已提交
3505 3506 3507 
      <dt><code>readonly</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this indicates the device cannot be modified by
        the guest.  For now, this is the default for disks with
J
docs: Fix documentation for readonly element  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
3508 
        attribute <code>device='cdrom'</code>.
E
snapshot: additions to domain xml for disks  
Eric Blake 已提交
3509 
      </dd>
D
add missing doc for device <shareable/> option  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 
      <dt><code>shareable</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this indicates the device is expected to be shared
          between domains (assuming the hypervisor and OS support this),
          which means that caching should be deactivated for that device.
      </dd>
E
snapshot: additions to domain xml for disks  
Eric Blake 已提交
3515 3516 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 
      <dt><code>transient</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this indicates that changes to the device
        contents should be reverted automatically when the guest
        exits.  With some hypervisors, marking a disk transient
        prevents the domain from participating in migration or
        snapshots. <span class="since">Since 0.9.5</span>
      </dd>
М
Add docs on drive <serial> element  
Марк Коренберг 已提交
3522 3523 
      <dt><code>serial</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this specify serial number of virtual hard drive.
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
3524 3525 
          For example, it may look
          like <code>&lt;serial&gt;WD-WMAP9A966149&lt;/serial&gt;</code>.
J
qemu: Do not support 'serial' scsi-block 'lun' devices  
John Ferlan 已提交
3526 3527 3528 
          Not supported for scsi-block devices, that is those using
          disk <code>type</code> 'block' using <code>device</code> 'lun'
          on <code>bus</code> 'scsi'.
М
Add docs on drive <serial> element  
Марк Коренберг 已提交
3529 3530 
          <span class="since">Since 0.7.1</span>
      </dd>
O
schema: Add schema for disk <wwn>  
Osier Yang 已提交
3531 3532 3533 
      <dt><code>wwn</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this element specifies the WWN (World Wide Name)
        of a virtual hard disk or CD-ROM drive. It must be composed
P
docs: Drop mention that WWN for disks must be unique  
Peter Krempa 已提交
3534 
        of 16 hexadecimal digits.
O
schema: Add schema for disk <wwn>  
Osier Yang 已提交
3535 3536 
        <span class='since'>Since 0.10.1</span>
      </dd>
O
qemu: Allow the user to specify vendor and product for disk  
Osier Yang 已提交
3537 3538 3539 3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548 
      <dt><code>vendor</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this element specifies the vendor of a virtual hard
        disk or CD-ROM device. It must not be longer than 8 printable
        characters.
        <span class='since'>Since 1.0.1</span>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>product</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this element specifies the product of a virtual hard
        disk or CD-ROM device. It must not be longer than 16 printable
        characters.
        <span class='since'>Since 1.0.1</span>
      </dd>
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
3549 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 
      <dt><code>address</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, the <code>address</code> element ties the disk
        to a given slot of a controller (the
        actual <code>&lt;controller&gt;</code> device can often be
        inferred by libvirt, although it can
        be <a href="#elementsControllers">explicitly specified</a>).
        The <code>type</code> attribute is mandatory, and is typically
        "pci" or "drive".  For a "pci" controller, additional
        attributes for <code>bus</code>, <code>slot</code>,
L
qemu: make PCI multifunction support more manual  
Laine Stump 已提交
3558 3559 3560 3561 3562 
        and <code>function</code> must be present, as well as
        optional <code>domain</code> and <code>multifunction</code>.
        Multifunction defaults to 'off'; any other value requires
        QEMU 0.1.3 and <span class="since">libvirt 0.9.7</span>.  For a
        "drive" controller, additional attributes
O
conf: Introduce new attribute for device address format  
Osier Yang 已提交
3563 3564 3565 
        <code>controller</code>, <code>bus</code>, <code>target</code>
        (<span class="since">libvirt 0.9.11</span>), and <code>unit</code>
        are available, each defaulting to 0.
J
storage: add auth to virDomainDiskDef  
Josh Durgin 已提交
3566 3567 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>auth</code></dt>
J
conf: Add/Allow parsing the auth in the disk source  
John Ferlan 已提交
3568 3569 3570 3571 3572 3573 3574 3575 
      <dd>Starting with <span class="since">libvirt 3.9.0</span> the
        <code>auth</code> element is preferred to be a sub-element of
        the <code>source</code> element. The element is still read and
        managed as a <code>disk</code> sub-element. It is invalid to use
        <code>auth</code> as both a sub-element of <code>disk</code>
        and <code>source</code>. The <code>auth</code> element was
        introduced as a <code>disk</code> sub-element in
        <span class="since">libvirt 0.9.7.</span>
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
3576 
      </dd>
J
Support for Disk Geometry Override  
J.B. Joret 已提交
3577 3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595 
      <dt><code>geometry</code></dt>
      <dd>The optional <code>geometry</code> element provides the
        ability to override geometry settings. This mostly useful for
        S390 DASD-disks or older DOS-disks.  <span class="since">0.10.0</span>
        <dl>
          <dt><code>cyls</code></dt>
          <dd>The <code>cyls</code> attribute is the
            number of cylinders. </dd>
          <dt><code>heads</code></dt>
          <dd>The <code>heads</code> attribute is the
            number of heads. </dd>
          <dt><code>secs</code></dt>
          <dd>The <code>secs</code> attribute is the
            number of sectors per track. </dd>
          <dt><code>trans</code></dt>
          <dd>The optional <code>trans</code> attribute is the
            BIOS-Translation-Modus (none, lba or auto)</dd>
        </dl>
      </dd>
V
Rename iolimit to blockio.  
Viktor Mihajlovski 已提交
3596 3597 
      <dt><code>blockio</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, the <code>blockio</code> element allows
V
conf: Support for Block Device IO Limits  
Viktor Mihajlovski 已提交
3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 
        to override any of the block device properties listed below.
        <span class="since">Since 0.10.2 (QEMU and KVM)</span>
        <dl>
          <dt><code>logical_block_size</code></dt>
          <dd>The logical block size the disk will report to the guest
            OS. For Linux this would be the value returned by the
            BLKSSZGET ioctl and describes the smallest units for disk
            I/O.
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3606 
          </dd>
V
conf: Support for Block Device IO Limits  
Viktor Mihajlovski 已提交
3607 3608 3609 3610 3611 
          <dt><code>physical_block_size</code></dt>
          <dd>The physical block size the disk will report to the guest
            OS. For Linux this would be the value returned by the
            BLKPBSZGET ioctl and describes the disk's hardware sector
            size which can be relevant for the alignment of disk data.
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3612 
          </dd>
V
conf: Support for Block Device IO Limits  
Viktor Mihajlovski 已提交
3613 3614 
        </dl>
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3615 3616 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3617 
    <h4><a id="elementsFilesystems">Filesystems</a></h4>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 

    <p>
      A directory on the host that can be accessed directly from the guest.
      <span class="since">since 0.3.3, since 0.8.5 for QEMU/KVM</span>
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3625 3626 3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;filesystem type='template'&gt;
    &lt;source name='my-vm-template'/&gt;
    &lt;target dir='/'/&gt;
  &lt;/filesystem&gt;
  &lt;filesystem type='mount' accessmode='passthrough'&gt;
    &lt;driver type='path' wrpolicy='immediate'/&gt;
    &lt;source dir='/export/to/guest'/&gt;
    &lt;target dir='/import/from/host'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/filesystem&gt;
  &lt;filesystem type='file' accessmode='passthrough'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='loop' type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;driver type='path' wrpolicy='immediate'/&gt;
    &lt;source file='/export/to/guest.img'/&gt;
    &lt;target dir='/import/from/host'/&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
  &lt;/filesystem&gt;
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3644 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3645 3646 
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654 3655 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>filesystem</code></dt>
      <dd>

      The filesystem attribute <code>type</code> specifies the type of the
      <code>source</code>. The possible values are:

        <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3656 
        <dt><code>mount</code></dt>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3657 3658 3659 3660 
        <dd>
        A host directory to mount in the guest. Used by LXC,
        OpenVZ <span class="since">(since 0.6.2)</span>
        and QEMU/KVM <span class="since">(since 0.8.5)</span>.
C
docs: <filesystem> attr is 'accessmode', not 'mode'  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3661 
        This is the default <code>type</code> if one is not specified.
H
Introduce <driver> under <filesystem> to support open-by-handle  
Harsh Prateek Bora 已提交
3662 3663 3664 3665 
        This mode also has an optional
        sub-element <code>driver</code>, with an
        attribute <code>type='path'</code>
        or <code>type='handle'</code> <span class="since">(since
D
Add new attribute wrpolicy to <driver> element  
Deepak C Shetty 已提交
3666 3667 3668 3669 3670 3671 
        0.9.7)</span>. The driver block has an optional attribute
        <code>wrpolicy</code> that further controls interaction with
        the host page cache; omitting the attribute gives default behavior,
        while the value <code>immediate</code> means that a host writeback
        is immediately triggered for all pages touched during a guest file
        write operation <span class="since">(since 0.9.10)</span>.
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3672 
        </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3673 
        <dt><code>template</code></dt>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3674 3675 3676 
        <dd>
        OpenVZ filesystem template. Only used by OpenVZ driver.
        </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3677 
        <dt><code>file</code></dt>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3678 
        <dd>
D
Add support for RAM filesystems for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3679 3680 3681 
        A host file will be treated as an image and mounted in
        the guest. The filesystem format will be autodetected.
        Only used by LXC driver.
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3682 
        </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3683 
        <dt><code>block</code></dt>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3684 
        <dd>
R
docs: Document filesystem type='block' for LXC  
Ryota Ozaki 已提交
3685 3686 3687 
        A host block device to mount in the guest. The filesystem
        format will be autodetected. Only used by LXC driver
        <span class="since">(since 0.9.5)</span>.
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3688 
        </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3689 
        <dt><code>ram</code></dt>
D
Add support for RAM filesystems for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3690 3691 3692 
        <dd>
          An in-memory filesystem, using memory from the host OS.
          The source element has a single attribute <code>usage</code>
J
LXC: Fix handling of RAM filesystem size units  
Ján Tomko 已提交
3693 3694 
          which gives the memory usage limit in KiB, unless units
          are specified by the <code>units</code> attribute. Only used
D
Add support for RAM filesystems for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3695 3696 
          by LXC driver.
          <span class="since"> (since 0.9.13)</span></dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3697 
        <dt><code>bind</code></dt>
D
Add support for guest bind mounts with LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3698 3699 3700 3701 
        <dd>
          A directory inside the guest will be bound to another
          directory inside the guest. Only used by LXC driver
          <span class="since"> (since 0.9.13)</span></dd>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3702 3703 
        </dl>
C
docs: <filesystem> attr is 'accessmode', not 'mode'  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3704 
      The filesystem block has an optional attribute <code>accessmode</code>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3705 3706 3707 3708 3709 3710 
      which specifies the security mode for accessing the source
      <span class="since">(since 0.8.5)</span>. Currently this only works
      with <code>type='mount'</code> for the QEMU/KVM driver. The possible
      values are:

        <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3711 
        <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3712 3713 
        <dd>
        The <code>source</code> is accessed with the permissions of the
C
docs: <filesystem> attr is 'accessmode', not 'mode'  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3714 
        user inside the guest. This is the default <code>accessmode</code> if
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3715 3716 3717 
        one is not specified.
        <a href="http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-05/msg02673.html">More info</a>
        </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3718 
        <dt><code>mapped</code></dt>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3719 3720 3721 3722 3723 
        <dd>
        The <code>source</code> is accessed with the permissions of the
        hypervisor (QEMU process).
        <a href="http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-05/msg02673.html">More info</a>
        </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3724 
        <dt><code>squash</code></dt>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732 3733 3734 3735 
        <dd>
        Similar to 'passthrough', the exception is that failure of
        privileged operations like 'chown' are ignored. This makes a
        passthrough-like mode usable for people who run the hypervisor
        as non-root.
        <a href="http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/qemu-devel/2010-09/msg00121.html">More info</a>
        </dd>
        </dl>

      </dd>
D
Add support for storage format in FS <driver>  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3736 3737 3738 3739 3740 3741 3742 3743 3744 3745 3746 
      <dt><code>driver</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional driver element allows specifying further details
        related to the hypervisor driver used to provide the filesystem.
        <span class="since">Since 1.0.6</span>
        <ul>
          <li>
            If the hypervisor supports multiple backend drivers, then
            the <code>type</code> attribute selects the primary
            backend driver name, while the <code>format</code>
            attribute provides the format type. For example, LXC
D
Add 'nbd' as a valid filesystem driver type  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3747 3748 
            supports a type of "loop", with a format of "raw" or
            "nbd" with any format. QEMU supports a type of "path"
S
docs: Rename 'parallels' to 'vz'  
Sergey Bronnikov 已提交
3749 
            or "handle", but no formats. Virtuozzo driver supports
D
add ploop fs driver type  
Dmitry Guryanov 已提交
3750 
            a type of "ploop" with a format of "ploop".
D
Add support for storage format in FS <driver>  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3751 
          </li>
J
Add virtio-related options to filesystems  
Ján Tomko 已提交
3752 3753 3754 3755 3756 
          <li>
          For virtio-backed devices,
          <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
          set. (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
          </li>
D
Add support for storage format in FS <driver>  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3757 3758 3759 
        </ul>
      </dd>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 
      <dt><code>source</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The resource on the host that is being accessed in the guest. The
        <code>name</code> attribute must be used with
        <code>type='template'</code>, and the <code>dir</code> attribute must
D
Add support for RAM filesystems for LXC  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3765 
        be used with <code>type='mount'</code>. The <code>usage</code> attribute
J
LXC: Fix handling of RAM filesystem size units  
Ján Tomko 已提交
3766 3767 
        is used with <code>type='ram'</code> to set the memory limit in KiB,
        unless units are specified by the <code>units</code> attribute.
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779 
      </dd>

      <dt><code>target</code></dt>
      <dd>
        Where the <code>source</code> can be accessed in the guest. For
        most drivers this is an automatic mount point, but for QEMU/KVM
        this is merely an arbitrary string tag that is exported to the
        guest as a hint for where to mount.
      </dd>

      <dt><code>readonly</code></dt>
      <dd>
O
docs, comments: minor typo fixes  
Oskari Saarenmaa 已提交
3780 
        Enables exporting filesystem as a readonly mount for guest, by
O
qemu: Support readonly filesystem passthrough  
Osier Yang 已提交
3781 3782 
        default read-write access is given (currently only works for
        QEMU/KVM driver).
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3783 
      </dd>
G
Introduce filesystem limits to virDomainFSDef  
Guido Günther 已提交
3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792 3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 

      <dt><code>space_hard_limit</code></dt>
      <dd>
        Maximum space available to this guest's filesystem.
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.13</span>
      </dd>

      <dt><code>space_soft_limit</code></dt>
      <dd>
        Maximum space available to this guest's filesystem. The container is
        permitted to exceed its soft limits for a grace period of time. Afterwards the
        hard limit is enforced.
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.13</span>
      </dd>
C
docs: Document <filesystem> device  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3798 3799 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3800 
    <h4><a id="elementsAddress">Device Addresses</a></h4>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 

    <p>
      Many devices have an optional <code>&lt;address&gt;</code>
      sub-element to describe where the device is placed on the
      virtual bus presented to the guest.  If an address (or any
      optional attribute within an address) is omitted on
      input, libvirt will generate an appropriate address; but an
      explicit address is required if more control over layout is
      required.  See below for device examples including an address
      element.
    </p>

    <p>
      Every address has a mandatory attribute <code>type</code> that
      describes which bus the device is on.  The choice of which
      address to use for a given device is constrained in part by the
      device and the architecture of the guest.  For example,
      a <code>&lt;disk&gt;</code> device
M
docs: fix address type for disks  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
3819 
      uses <code>type='drive'</code>, while
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3820 3821 3822 3823 3824 3825 3826 3827 
      a <code>&lt;console&gt;</code> device would
      use <code>type='pci'</code> on i686 or x86_64 guests,
      or <code>type='spapr-vio'</code> on PowerPC64 pseries guests.
      Each address type has further optional attributes that control
      where on the bus the device will be placed:
    </p>

    <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3828 
      <dt><code>pci</code></dt>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3829 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 
      <dd>PCI addresses have the following additional
        attributes: <code>domain</code> (a 2-byte hex integer, not
        currently used by qemu), <code>bus</code> (a hex value between
        0 and 0xff, inclusive), <code>slot</code> (a hex value between
        0x0 and 0x1f, inclusive), and <code>function</code> (a value
        between 0 and 7, inclusive).  Also available is
        the <code>multifunction</code> attribute, which controls
        turning on the multifunction bit for a particular
        slot/function in the PCI control register
        (<span class="since">since 0.9.7, requires QEMU
        0.13</span>). <code>multifunction</code> defaults to 'off',
        but should be set to 'on' for function 0 of a slot that will
L
conf: allow type='pci' addresses with no address attributes specified  
Laine Stump 已提交
3841 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847 
        have multiple functions used.<br/>
        <span class="since">Since 1.3.5</span>, some hypervisor
        drivers may accept an <code>&lt;address type='pci'/&gt;</code>
        element with no other attributes as an explicit request to
        assign a PCI address for the device rather than some other
        type of address that may also be appropriate for that same
        device (e.g. virtio-mmio).
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3848 
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3849 
      <dt><code>drive</code></dt>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3850 3851 3852 
      <dd>Drive addresses have the following additional
        attributes: <code>controller</code> (a 2-digit controller
        number), <code>bus</code> (a 2-digit bus number),
E
docs: Correct typos in scsi hostdev and address elements  
Eric Farman 已提交
3853 
        <code>target</code> (a 2-digit target number),
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3854 3855 
        and <code>unit</code> (a 2-digit unit number on the bus).
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3856 
      <dt><code>virtio-serial</code></dt>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3857 3858 3859 3860 3861 
      <dd>Each virtio-serial address has the following additional
        attributes: <code>controller</code> (a 2-digit controller
        number), <code>bus</code> (a 2-digit bus number),
        and <code>slot</code> (a 2-digit slot within the bus).
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3862 
      <dt><code>ccid</code></dt>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3863 3864 3865 3866 
      <dd>A CCID address, for smart-cards, has the following
        additional attributes: <code>bus</code> (a 2-digit bus
        number), and <code>slot</code> attribute (a 2-digit slot
        within the bus).  <span class="since">Since 0.8.8.</span>
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3867 
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3868 
      <dt><code>usb</code></dt>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3869 3870 3871 3872 3873 
      <dd>USB addresses have the following additional
        attributes: <code>bus</code> (a hex value between 0 and 0xfff,
        inclusive), and <code>port</code> (a dotted notation of up to
        four octets, such as 1.2 or 2.1.3.1).
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3874 
      <dt><code>spapr-vio</code></dt>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3875 3876 3877 3878 3879 3880 3881 3882 
      <dd>On PowerPC pseries guests, devices can be assigned to the
        SPAPR-VIO bus.  It has a flat 64-bit address space; by
        convention, devices are generally assigned at a non-zero
        multiple of 0x1000, but other addresses are valid and
        permitted by libvirt.  Each address has the following
        additional attribute: <code>reg</code> (the hex value address
        of the starting register).  <span class="since">Since
        0.9.9.</span>
V
S390: Documentation for CCW address type  
Viktor Mihajlovski 已提交
3883 
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3884 
      <dt><code>ccw</code></dt>
B
docs: align spelling of S390  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
3885 
      <dd>S390 guests with a <code>machine</code> value of
V
S390: Documentation for CCW address type  
Viktor Mihajlovski 已提交
3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 
        s390-ccw-virtio use the native CCW bus for I/O devices.
        CCW bus addresses have the following additional attributes:
        <code>cssid</code> (a hex value between 0 and 0xfe, inclusive),
        <code>ssid</code> (a value between 0 and 3, inclusive) and
        <code>devno</code> (a hex value between 0 and 0xffff, inclusive).
        Partially specified bus addresses are not allowed.
        If omitted, libvirt will assign a free bus address with
S
S390: Documentation for ccw address type  
Stefan Zimmermann 已提交
3893 3894 
        cssid=0xfe and ssid=0. Virtio-ccw devices must have their cssid
        set to 0xfe.
V
S390: Documentation for CCW address type  
Viktor Mihajlovski 已提交
3895 
        <span class="since">Since 1.0.4</span>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3896 
      </dd>
C
docs: formatdomain: document virtio-mmio device addresses  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3897 3898 3899 3900 3901 
      <dt><code>virtio-mmio</code></dt>
      <dd>This places the device on the virtio-mmio transport, which is
        currently only available for some <code>armv7l</code> and
        <code>aarch64</code> virtual machines. virtio-mmio addresses
        do not have any additional attributes.
A
docs: Document virtio-pci by default for mach-virt guests  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 
        <span class="since">Since 1.1.3</span><br/>
        If the guest architecture is <code>aarch64</code> and the machine
        type is <code>virt</code>, libvirt will automatically assign PCI
        addresses to devices; however, the presence of a single device
        with virtio-mmio address in the guest configuration will cause
        libvirt to assign virtio-mmio addresses to all further devices.
        <span class="since">Since 3.0.0</span>
C
docs: formatdomain: document virtio-mmio device addresses  
Cole Robinson 已提交
3909 
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3910 
      <dt><code>isa</code></dt>
H
conf: introduce generic ISA address  
Hu Tao 已提交
3911 3912 3913 3914 
      <dd>ISA addresses have the following additional
        attributes: <code>iobase</code> and <code>irq</code>.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.1</span>
      </dd>
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3915 3916 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3917 
    <h4><a id="elementsVirtio">Virtio-related options</a></h4>
J
Add virtio-related options to interfaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
3918 3919 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 

    <p>
      QEMU's virtio devices have some attributes related to the virtio transport under
      the <code>driver</code> element:
      The <code>iommu</code> attribute enables the use of emulated IOMMU
      by the device. The attribute <code>ats</code> controls the Address
      Translation Service support for PCIe devices. This is needed to make use
      of IOTLB support (see <a href="#elementsIommu">IOMMU device</a>).
      Possible values are <code>on</code> or <code>off</code>.
      <span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
3930 
    <h4><a id="elementsControllers">Controllers</a></h4>
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
3931 3932 

    <p>
O
docs, comments: minor typo fixes  
Oskari Saarenmaa 已提交
3933 
      Depending on the guest architecture, some device buses can
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
3934 3935 
      appear more than once, with a group of virtual devices tied to a
      virtual controller.  Normally, libvirt can automatically infer such
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
3936 
      controllers without requiring explicit XML markup, but sometimes
A
docs: Add "PCI topology and hotplug" guidelines  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
3937 3938 3939 
      it is necessary to provide an explicit controller element, notably
      when planning the <a href="pci-hotplug.html">PCI topology</a>
      for guests where device hotplug is expected.
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
3940 3941 3942 
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3943 3944 3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;controller type='ide' index='0'/&gt;
  &lt;controller type='virtio-serial' index='0' ports='16' vectors='4'/&gt;
  &lt;controller type='virtio-serial' index='1'&gt;
    &lt;address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0a' function='0x0'/&gt;
  &lt;/controller&gt;
  &lt;controller type='scsi' index='0' model='virtio-scsi'&gt;
    &lt;driver iothread='4'/&gt;
    &lt;address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x0b' function='0x0'/&gt;
  &lt;/controller&gt;
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
3954 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
3955 3956 
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
3957 3958 3959 

    <p>
      Each controller has a mandatory attribute <code>type</code>,
J
docs: Reformat the Controllers description  
John Ferlan 已提交
3960 3961 
      which must be one of 'ide', 'fdc', 'scsi', 'sata', 'usb',
      'ccid', 'virtio-serial' or 'pci', and a mandatory
M
Add a new controller type 'usb' with optionnal 'model'  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
3962 3963 
      attribute <code>index</code> which is the decimal integer
      describing in which order the bus controller is encountered (for
J
docs: Reformat the Controllers description  
John Ferlan 已提交
3964 
      use in <code>controller</code> attributes of
L
conf: permit auto-assignment of controller indexes  
Laine Stump 已提交
3965 3966 3967 3968 3969 
      <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> elements).
      <span class="since">Since 1.3.5</span> the index is optional; if
      not specified, it will be auto-assigned to be the lowest unused
      index for the given controller type. Some controller types have
      additional attributes that control specific features, such as:
J
docs: Reformat the Controllers description  
John Ferlan 已提交
3970 3971 3972 3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982 3983 3984 3985 3986 
    </p>

      <dl>
        <dt><code>virtio-serial</code></dt>
        <dd>The <code>virtio-serial</code> controller has two additional
        optional attributes <code>ports</code> and <code>vectors</code>,
        which control how many devices can be connected through the
        controller.</dd>
        <dt><code>scsi</code></dt>
        <dd>A <code>scsi</code> controller has an optional attribute
        <code>model</code>, which is one of 'auto', 'buslogic', 'ibmvscsi',
        'lsilogic', 'lsisas1068', 'lsisas1078', 'virtio-scsi' or
        'vmpvscsi'.</dd>
        <dt><code>usb</code></dt>
        <dd>A <code>usb</code> controller has an optional attribute
        <code>model</code>, which is one of "piix3-uhci", "piix4-uhci",
        "ehci", "ich9-ehci1", "ich9-uhci1", "ich9-uhci2", "ich9-uhci3",
C
extend usb controller model to support xen pvusb  
Chunyan Liu 已提交
3987 
        "vt82c686b-uhci", "pci-ohci", "nec-xhci", "qusb1" (xen pvusb
P
qemu: add support for qemu-xhci USB controller  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
3988 3989 
        with qemu backend, version 1.1), "qusb2" (xen pvusb with qemu
        backend, version 2.0) or "qemu-xhci". Additionally,
J
docs: Reformat the Controllers description  
John Ferlan 已提交
3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 
         <span class="since">since 0.10.0</span>, if the USB bus needs to
         be explicitly disabled for the guest, <code>model='none'</code>
         may be used.  <span class="since">Since 1.0.5</span>, no default
         USB controller will be built on s390.
         <span class="since">Since 1.3.5</span>, USB controllers accept a
         <code>ports</code> attribute to configure how many devices can be
         connected to the controller.</dd>
D
domain: Allow 'model' attribute for ide controller  
Dawid Zamirski 已提交
3997 3998 3999 4000 
        <dt><code>ide</code></dt>
        <dd><span class="since">Since 3.10.0</span> for the vbox driver, the
        <code>ide</code> controller has an optional attribute
        <code>model</code>, which is one of "piix3", "piix4" or "ich6".</dd>
J
docs: Reformat the Controllers description  
John Ferlan 已提交
4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 
      </dl>

    <p>
      Note: The PowerPC64 "spapr-vio" addresses do not have an
      associated controller.
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 
    </p>

    <p>
      For controllers that are themselves devices on a PCI or USB bus,
      an optional sub-element <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> can specify
      the exact relationship of the controller to its master bus, with
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
4012 
      semantics <a href="#elementsAddress">given above</a>.
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
4013 4014 
    </p>
O
Introduce a sub-element <driver> for controller  
Osier Yang 已提交
4015 4016 
    <p>
      An optional sub-element <code>driver</code> can specify the driver
M
qemu: Add cmd_per_lun, max_sectors to virtio-scsi  
Mike Perez 已提交
4017 
      specific options:
O
Introduce a sub-element <driver> for controller  
Osier Yang 已提交
4018 
    </p>
M
qemu: Add cmd_per_lun, max_sectors to virtio-scsi  
Mike Perez 已提交
4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 
    <dl>
      <dt><code>queues</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>queues</code> attribute specifies the number of
        queues for the controller. For best performance, it's recommended to
        specify a value matching the number of vCPUs.
        <span class="since">Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>cmd_per_lun</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>cmd_per_lun</code> attribute specifies the maximum
        number of commands that can be queued on devices controlled by the
        host.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.7 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>max_sectors</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>max_sectors</code> attribute specifies the maximum
        amount of data in bytes that will be transferred to or from the device
        in a single command. The transfer length is measured in sectors, where
        a sector is 512 bytes.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.7 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
      </dd>
M
conf: Add ioeventfd option for controllers  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 
      <dt><code>ioeventfd</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>ioeventfd</code> attribute specifies
        whether the controller should use
        <a href='https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/'>
        I/O asynchronous handling</a> or not.  Accepted values are
        "on" and "off". <span class="since">Since 1.2.18</span>
      </dd>
J
conf: Add support for virtio-scsi iothreads  
John Ferlan 已提交
4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 
      <dt><code>iothread</code></dt>
      <dd>
        Supported for controller type <code>scsi</code> using model
        <code>virtio-scsi</code> for <code>address</code> types
        <code>pci</code> and <code>ccw</code>
        <span class="since">since 1.3.5 (QEMU 2.4)</span>.

        The optional <code>iothread</code> attribute assigns the controller
        to an IOThread as defined by the range for the domain
        <a href="#elementsIOThreadsAllocation"><code>iothreads</code></a>
        value. Each SCSI <code>disk</code> assigned to use the specified
        <code>controller</code> will utilize the same IOThread. If a specific
        IOThread is desired for a specific SCSI <code>disk</code>, then
        multiple controllers must be defined each having a specific
        <code>iothread</code> value. The <code>iothread</code> value
        must be within the range 1 to the domain iothreads value.
      </dd>
J
Add virtio-related options to controllers  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4067 4068 4069 4070 4071 4072 
      <dt>virtio options</dt>
      <dd>
        For virtio controllers,
        <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
        set. (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
      </dd>
M
qemu: Add cmd_per_lun, max_sectors to virtio-scsi  
Mike Perez 已提交
4073 
    </dl>
M
Add USB companion controllers support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 
    <p>
      USB companion controllers have an optional
      sub-element <code>&lt;master&gt;</code> to specify the exact
      relationship of the companion to its master controller.
      A companion controller is on the same bus as its master, so
      the companion <code>index</code> value should be equal.
M
docs: Document how libvirt handles companion controllers  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 
      Not all controller models can be used as companion controllers
      and libvirt might provide some sensible defaults (settings
      of <code>master startport</code> and <code>function</code> of an
      address) for some particular models.
      Preferred companion controllers are <code>ich-uhci[123]</code>.
M
Add USB companion controllers support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
4085 4086 4087 
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4088 4089 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;controller type='usb' index='0' model='ich9-ehci1'&gt;
    &lt;address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='4' function='7'/&gt;
  &lt;/controller&gt;
  &lt;controller type='usb' index='0' model='ich9-uhci1'&gt;
    &lt;master startport='0'/&gt;
    &lt;address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='4' function='0' multifunction='on'/&gt;
  &lt;/controller&gt;
M
Add USB companion controllers support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
4097 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4098 4099 
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
J
conf: add PCI controllers  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4100 4101 

    <p>
A
docs: Tweak PCI controller model documentation  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120 4121 4122 
      PCI controllers have an optional <code>model</code> attribute; possible
      values for this attribute are
    </p>
    <ul>
      <li>
        <code>pci-root</code>, <code>pci-bridge</code>
        (<span class="since">since 1.0.5</span>)
      </li>
      <li>
        <code>pcie-root</code>, <code>dmi-to-pci-bridge</code>
        (<span class="since">since 1.1.2</span>)
      </li>
      <li>
        <code>pcie-root-port</code>, <code>pcie-switch-upstream-port</code>,
        <code>pcie-switch-downstream-port</code>
        (<span class="since">since 1.2.19</span>)
      </li>
      <li>
        <code>pci-expander-bus</code>, <code>pcie-expander-bus</code>
        (<span class="since">since 1.3.4</span>)
      </li>
A
qemu: Implement pcie-to-pci-bridge controller  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4123 4124 4125 4126 
      <li>
        <code>pcie-to-pci-bridge</code>
        (<span class="since">since 4.3.0</span>)
      </li>
A
docs: Tweak PCI controller model documentation  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4127 4128 4129 
    </ul>
    <p>
      The root controllers (<code>pci-root</code>
L
conf: new pci controller model pcie-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4130 4131 4132 
      and <code>pcie-root</code>) have an
      optional <code>pcihole64</code> element specifying how big (in
      kilobytes, or in the unit specified by <code>pcihole64</code>'s
J
Add pcihole64 element to root PCI controllers  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 
      <code>unit</code> attribute) the 64-bit PCI hole should be. Some guests (like
      Windows XP or Windows Server 2003) might crash when QEMU and Seabios
      are recent enough to support 64-bit PCI holes, unless this is disabled
      (set to 0). <span class="since">Since 1.1.2 (QEMU only)</span>
    </p>
L
conf: add new <model> subelement with name attribute to <controller>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 
    <p>
      PCI controllers also have an optional
      subelement <code>&lt;model&gt;</code> with an attribute
      <code>name</code>. The name attribute holds the name of the
      specific device that qemu is emulating (e.g. "i82801b11-bridge")
      rather than simply the class of device ("dmi-to-pci-bridge",
      "pci-bridge"), which is set in the controller element's
      model <b>attribute</b>.  In almost all cases, you should not
      manually add a <code>&lt;model&gt;</code> subelement to a
      controller, nor should you modify one that is automatically
      generated by libvirt. <span class="since">Since 1.2.19 (QEMU
      only).</span>
    </p>
L
conf: add new <target> subelement with chassisNr attribute to <controller>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4151 4152 
    <p>
      PCI controllers also have an optional
L
conf: new pci controller model pci-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4153 4154 4155 
      subelement <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> with the attributes and
      subelements listed below. These are configurable items that 1)
      are visible to the guest OS so must be preserved for guest ABI
L
conf: add new <target> subelement with chassisNr attribute to <controller>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 
      compatibility, and 2) are usually left to default values or
      derived automatically by libvirt. In almost all cases, you
      should not manually add a <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> subelement
      to a controller, nor should you modify the values in the those
      that are automatically generated by
      libvirt. <span class="since">Since 1.2.19 (QEMU only).</span>
    </p>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>chassisNr</code></dt>
      <dd>
        PCI controllers that have attribute model="pci-bridge", can
        also have a <code>chassisNr</code> attribute in
        the <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> subelement, which is used to
        control QEMU's "chassis_nr" option for the pci-bridge device
        (normally libvirt automatically sets this to the same value as
        the index attribute of the pci controller). If set, chassisNr
L
conf: limit chassisNr, and busNr to a minimum value of 1, not 0  
Laine Stump 已提交
4172 
        must be between 1 and 255.
L
conf: add new <target> subelement with chassisNr attribute to <controller>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4173 
      </dd>
L
conf: new pci controller model "pcie-root-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4174 4175 
      <dt><code>chassis</code></dt>
      <dd>
L
conf: new pcie-controller model "pcie-switch-downstream-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4176 4177 
        pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can
        also have a <code>chassis</code> attribute in
L
conf: new pci controller model "pcie-root-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 
        the <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> subelement, which is used to
        set the controller's "chassis" configuration value, which is
        visible to the virtual machine. If set, chassis must be
        between 0 and 255.
      </dd>
      <dt><code>port</code></dt>
      <dd>
L
conf: new pcie-controller model "pcie-switch-downstream-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4185 4186 4187 
        pcie-root-port and pcie-switch-downstream-port controllers can
        also have a <code>port</code> attribute in
        the <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> subelement, which
L
conf: new pci controller model "pcie-root-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4188 4189 4190 4191 
        is used to set the controller's "port" configuration value,
        which is visible to the virtual machine. If set, port must be
        between 0 and 255.
      </dd>
L
conf: new pci controller model pci-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4192 4193 
      <dt><code>busNr</code></dt>
      <dd>
L
conf: new pci controller model pcie-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4194 
        pci-expander-bus and pcie-expander-bus controllers can have an
L
conf: new pci controller model pci-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 
        optional <code>busNr</code> attribute (1-254). This will be
        the bus number of the new bus; All bus numbers between that
        specified and 255 will be available only for assignment to
        PCI/PCIe controllers plugged into the hierarchy starting with
        this expander bus, and bus numbers less than the specified
        value will be available to the next lower expander-bus (or the
        root-bus if there are no lower expander buses). If you do not
        specify a busNumber, libvirt will find the lowest existing
        busNumber in all other expander buses (or use 256 if there are
        no others) and auto-assign the busNr of that found bus - 2,
        which provides one bus number for the pci-expander-bus and one
        for the pci-bridge that is automatically attached to it (if
        you plan on adding more pci-bridges to the hierarchy of the
        bus, you should manually set busNr to a lower value).
L
conf: new pci controller model pcie-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 
        <p>
          A similar algorithm is used for automatically determining
          the busNr attribute for pcie-expander-bus, but since the
          pcie-expander-bus doesn't have any built-in pci-bridge, the
          2nd bus-number is just being reserved for the pcie-root-port
          that must necessarily be connected to the bus in order to
          actually plug in an endpoint device. If you intend to plug
L
conf: don't allow connecting upstream-port directly to pce-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4216 4217 4218 4219 4220 4221 4222 
          multiple devices into a pcie-expander-bus, you must connect
          a pcie-switch-upstream-port to the pcie-root-port that is
          plugged into the pcie-expander-bus, and multiple
          pcie-switch-downstream-ports to the
          pcie-switch-upstream-port, and of course for this to work
          properly, you will need to decrease the pcie-expander-bus'
          busNr accordingly so that there are enough unused bus
V
docs: Grammar and spelling fixes  
Ville Skyttä 已提交
4223 
          numbers above it to accommodate giving out one bus number for
L
conf: don't allow connecting upstream-port directly to pce-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4224 4225 4226 
          the upstream-port and one for each downstream-port (in
          addition to the pcie-root-port and the pcie-expander-bus
          itself).
L
conf: new pci controller model pcie-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4227 
        </p>
L
conf: new pci controller model pci-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4228 
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4229 
      <dt><code>node</code></dt>
L
conf: new pci controller model pci-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4230 
      <dd>
S
qemu: Enable NUMA node tag in pci-root for PPC64  
Shivaprasad G Bhat 已提交
4231 4232 4233 4234 
        Some PCI controllers (<code>pci-expander-bus</code> for the pc
        machine type, <code>pcie-expander-bus</code> for the q35 machine
        type and, <span class="since">since 3.6.0</span>,
        <code>pci-root</code> for the pseries machine type) can have an
L
conf: new pci controller model pci-expander-bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 4240 4241 4242 
        optional <code>&lt;node&gt;</code> subelement within
        the <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> subelement, which is used to
        set the NUMA node reported to the guest OS for that bus - the
        guest OS will then know that all devices on that bus are a
        part of the specified NUMA node (it is up to the user of the
        libvirt API to attach host devices to the correct
        pci-expander-bus when assigning them to the domain).
      </dd>
A
conf: Parse and format <target index='...'/>  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 
      <dt><code>index</code></dt>
      <dd>
        pci-root controllers for pSeries guests use this attribute to
        record the order they will show up in the guest.
        <span class="since">Since 3.6.0</span>
      </dd>
L
conf: add new <target> subelement with chassisNr attribute to <controller>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4249 
    </dl>
J
Add pcihole64 element to root PCI controllers  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4250 
    <p>
L
qemu: add pcie-root controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4251 
      For machine types which provide an implicit PCI bus, the pci-root
J
conf: add PCI controllers  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4252 
      controller with index=0 is auto-added and required to use PCI devices.
L
qemu: add pcie-root controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4253 
      pci-root has no address.
L
qemu: add dmi-to-pci-bridge controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4254 4255 4256 
      PCI bridges are auto-added if there are too many devices to fit on
      the one bus provided by pci-root, or a PCI bus number greater than zero
      was specified.
J
conf: add PCI controllers  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4257 4258 4259 4260 4261 4262 
      PCI bridges can also be specified manually, but their addresses should
      only refer to PCI buses provided by already specified PCI controllers.
      Leaving gaps in the PCI controller indexes might lead to an invalid
      configuration.
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 4270 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;controller type='pci' index='0' model='pci-root'/&gt;
  &lt;controller type='pci' index='1' model='pci-bridge'&gt;
    &lt;address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='5' function='0' multifunction='off'/&gt;
  &lt;/controller&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
L
qemu: add pcie-root controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 

    <p>
      For machine types which provide an implicit PCI Express (PCIe)
      bus (for example, the machine types based on the Q35 chipset),
      the pcie-root controller with index=0 is auto-added to the
      domain's configuration. pcie-root has also no address, provides
L
qemu: always permit PCI devices to be manually assigned to a PCIe bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4277 4278 4279 4280 
      31 slots (numbered 1-31) that can be used to attach PCIe or PCI
      devices (although libvirt will never auto-assign a PCI device to
      a PCIe slot, it will allow manual specification of such an
      assignment). Devices connected to pcie-root cannot be
A
conf: Prefer pcie-to-pci-bridge to dmi-to-pci-bridge  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 
      hotplugged. If traditional PCI devices are present in the guest
      configuration, a <code>pcie-to-pci-bridge</code> controller will
      automatically be added: this controller, which plugs into a
      <code>pcie-root-port</code>, provides 31 usable PCI slots (1-31) with
      hotplug support (<span class="since">since 4.3.0</span>). If the QEMU
      binary doesn't support the corresponding device, then a
      <code>dmi-to-pci-bridge</code> controller will be added instead,
      usually at the defacto standard location of slot=0x1e. A
L
qemu: always permit PCI devices to be manually assigned to a PCIe bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4289 4290 4291 
      dmi-to-pci-bridge controller plugs into a PCIe slot (as provided
      by pcie-root), and itself provides 31 standard PCI slots (which
      also do not support device hotplug). In order to have
L
qemu: add dmi-to-pci-bridge controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4292 4293 4294 
      hot-pluggable PCI slots in the guest system, a pci-bridge
      controller will also be automatically created and connected to
      one of the slots of the auto-created dmi-to-pci-bridge
L
qemu: always permit PCI devices to be manually assigned to a PCIe bus  
Laine Stump 已提交
4295 
      controller; all guest PCI devices with addresses that are
L
qemu: add dmi-to-pci-bridge controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4296 4297 
      auto-determined by libvirt will be placed on this pci-bridge
      device.  (<span class="since">since 1.1.2</span>).
L
qemu: add pcie-root controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4298 
    </p>
L
conf: new pci controller model "pcie-root-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4299 4300 
    <p>
      Domains with an implicit pcie-root can also add controllers
L
conf: new pcie-controller model "pcie-switch-downstream-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 
      with <code>model='pcie-root-port'</code>,
      <code>model='pcie-switch-upstream-port'</code>,
      and <code>model='pcie-switch-downstream-port'</code>. pcie-root-port
      is a simple type of bridge device that can connect only to one
      of the 31 slots on the pcie-root bus on its upstream side, and
      makes a single (PCIe, hotpluggable) port available on the
      downstream side (at slot='0'). pcie-root-port can be used to
      provide a single slot to later hotplug a PCIe device (but is not
      itself hotpluggable - it must be in the configuration when the
      domain is started).
      (<span class="since">since 1.2.19</span>)
    </p>
    <p>
      pcie-switch-upstream-port is a more flexible (but also more
      complex) device that can only plug into a pcie-root-port or
      pcie-switch-downstream-port on the upstream side (and only
      before the domain is started - it is not hot-pluggable), and
      provides 32 ports on the downstream side (slot='0' - slot='31')
      that accept only pcie-switch-downstream-port devices; each
      pcie-switch-downstream-port device can only plug into a
      pcie-switch-upstream-port on its upstream side (again, not
      hot-pluggable), and on its downstream side provides a single
      hotpluggable pcie port that can accept any standard pci or pcie
      device (or another pcie-switch-upstream-port), i.e. identical in
      function to a pcie-root-port.  (<span class="since">since
      1.2.19</span>)
L
conf: new pci controller model "pcie-root-port"  
Laine Stump 已提交
4327 
    </p>
L
qemu: add pcie-root controller  
Laine Stump 已提交
4328 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;controller type='pci' index='0' model='pcie-root'/&gt;
  &lt;controller type='pci' index='1' model='dmi-to-pci-bridge'&gt;
    &lt;address type='pci' domain='0' bus='0' slot='0xe' function='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/controller&gt;
  &lt;controller type='pci' index='2' model='pci-bridge'&gt;
    &lt;address type='pci' domain='0' bus='1' slot='1' function='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/controller&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
Add USB companion controllers support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
4340
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4341 
    <h4><a id="elementsLease">Device leases</a></h4>
D
Support leases in guest XML and lock manager  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 

    <p>
      When using a lock manager, it may be desirable to record device leases
      against a VM. The lock manager will ensure the VM won't start unless
      the leases can be acquired.
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4350 4351 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
D
Support leases in guest XML and lock manager  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4352 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 
  &lt;lease&gt;
    &lt;lockspace&gt;somearea&lt;/lockspace&gt;
    &lt;key&gt;somekey&lt;/key&gt;
    &lt;target path='/some/lease/path' offset='1024'/&gt;
  &lt;/lease&gt;
  ...
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Support leases in guest XML and lock manager  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4361 4362 

    <dl>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4363 
      <dt><code>lockspace</code></dt>
D
Support leases in guest XML and lock manager  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4364 4365 4366 4367 
      <dd>This is an arbitrary string, identifying the lockspace
        within which the key is held. Lock managers may impose
        extra restrictions on the format, or length of the lockspace
        name.</dd>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4368 
      <dt><code>key</code></dt>
D
Support leases in guest XML and lock manager  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4369 4370 4371 4372 
      <dd>This is an arbitrary string, uniquely identifying the
        lease to be acquired. Lock managers may impose extra
        restrictions on the format, or length of the key.
      </dd>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4373 
      <dt><code>target</code></dt>
D
Support leases in guest XML and lock manager  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4374 4375 4376 
      <dd>This is the fully qualified path of the file associated
        with the lockspace. The offset specifies where the lease
        is stored within the file. If the lock manager does not
V
docs: Grammar and spelling fixes  
Ville Skyttä 已提交
4377 
        require an offset, just pass 0.
D
Support leases in guest XML and lock manager  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4378 4379 
      </dd>
    </dl>
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
4380
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4381 
    <h4><a id="elementsHostDev">Host device assignment</a></h4>
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4382
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4383 
    <h5><a id="elementsHostDevSubsys">USB / PCI / SCSI devices</a></h5>
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4384 4385 

    <p>
H
conf: Generic XMLs for scsi hostdev  
Han Cheng 已提交
4386 
      USB, PCI and SCSI devices attached to the host can be passed through
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4387 
      to the guest using the <code>hostdev</code> element.
H
conf: Generic XMLs for scsi hostdev  
Han Cheng 已提交
4388 4389 
      <span class="since">since after 0.4.4 for USB, 0.6.0 for PCI(KVM only)
        and 1.0.6 for SCSI(KVM only)</span>:
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4390 4391 
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
4392 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4393 4394 4395 4396 4397 4398 4399 4400 4401 4402 4403 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;hostdev mode='subsystem' type='usb'&gt;
    &lt;source startupPolicy='optional'&gt;
      &lt;vendor id='0x1234'/&gt;
      &lt;product id='0xbeef'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;boot order='2'/&gt;
  &lt;/hostdev&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
4404
D
Add tests and docs for the new PCI passthrough format  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4405 
    <p>or:</p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
4406 4407 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;hostdev mode='subsystem' type='pci' managed='yes'&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
      &lt;address domain='0x0000' bus='0x06' slot='0x02' function='0x0'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;boot order='1'/&gt;
    &lt;rom bar='on' file='/etc/fake/boot.bin'/&gt;
  &lt;/hostdev&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
H
conf: Generic XMLs for scsi hostdev  
Han Cheng 已提交
4419 4420 4421 4422 

    <p>or:</p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4423 4424 4425 4426 4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi' sgio='filtered' rawio='yes'&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
      &lt;adapter name='scsi_host0'/&gt;
      &lt;address bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;readonly/&gt;
    &lt;address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/hostdev&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4435
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4436 4437 4438 4439 

    <p>or:</p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448 4449 4450 4451 4452 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi'&gt;
    &lt;source protocol='iscsi' name='iqn.2014-08.com.example:iscsi-nopool/1'&gt;
      &lt;host name='example.com' port='3260'/&gt;
      &lt;auth username='myuser'&gt;
        &lt;secret type='iscsi' usage='libvirtiscsi'/&gt;
      &lt;/auth&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;address type='drive' controller='0' bus='0' target='0' unit='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/hostdev&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4453
E
conf: Wire up the vhost-scsi connection from/to XML  
Eric Farman 已提交
4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 
    <p>or:</p>

<pre>
  ...
  &lt;devices&gt;
    &lt;hostdev mode='subsystem' type='scsi_host'&gt;
      &lt;source protocol='vhost' wwpn='naa.50014057667280d8'/&gt;
    &lt;/hostdev&gt;
  &lt;/devices&gt;
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4463 4464 4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 
  ...</pre>

    <p>or:</p>

<pre>
  ...
  &lt;devices&gt;
    &lt;hostdev mode='subsystem' type='mdev' model='vfio-pci'&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
E
docs: Add the closing </address> tag for mdev example  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4472 
      &lt;address uuid='c2177883-f1bb-47f0-914d-32a22e3a8804'/&gt;
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4473 4474 
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;/hostdev&gt;
S
docs: documentation for vfio-ccw passthrough  
Shalini Chellathurai Saroja 已提交
4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480 
    &lt;hostdev mode='subsystem' type='mdev' model='vfio-ccw'&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
      &lt;address uuid='9063cba3-ecef-47b6-abcf-3fef4fdcad85'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;address type='ccw' cssid='0xfe' ssid='0x0' devno='0x0001'/&gt;
    &lt;/hostdev&gt;
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4481 
  &lt;/devices&gt;
E
conf: Wire up the vhost-scsi connection from/to XML  
Eric Farman 已提交
4482 4483 
  ...</pre>
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4484 4485 4486 
    <dl>
      <dt><code>hostdev</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>hostdev</code> element is the main container for describing
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4487 4488 4489 4490 
        host devices. For each device, the <code>mode</code> is always
        "subsystem" and the <code>type</code> is one of the following values
        with additional attributes noted.
        <dl>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4491 
          <dt><code>usb</code></dt>
J
Document that USB hostdevs do not need nodeDettach  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4492 4493 4494 
          <dd>USB devices are detached from the host on guest startup
            and reattached after the guest exits or the device is
            hot-unplugged.
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4495 
          </dd>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4496 
          <dt><code>pci</code></dt>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4497 4498 4499 
          <dd>For PCI devices, when <code>managed</code> is "yes" it is
            detached from the host before being passed on to the guest
            and reattached to the host after the guest exits. If
J
Document that USB hostdevs do not need nodeDettach  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 
            <code>managed</code> is omitted or "no", the user is
            responsible to call <code>virNodeDeviceDetachFlags</code>
            (or <code>virsh nodedev-detach</code> before starting the guest
            or hot-plugging the device and <code>virNodeDeviceReAttach</code>
            (or <code>virsh nodedev-reattach</code>) after hot-unplug or
            stopping the guest.
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4506 
          </dd>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4507 
          <dt><code>scsi</code></dt>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4508 
          <dd>For SCSI devices, user is responsible to make sure the device
J
docs: Clarify unprivileged sgio feature  
John Ferlan 已提交
4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 
            is not used by host. If supported by the hypervisor and OS, the
            optional <code>sgio</code> (<span class="since">since 1.0.6</span>)
            attribute indicates whether unprivileged SG_IO commands are
            filtered for the disk. Valid settings are "filtered" or
            "unfiltered", where the default is "filtered".
            The optional <code>rawio</code>
J
hostdev: Add "rawio" attribute to _virDomainHostdevSubsysSCSI  
John Ferlan 已提交
4515 4516 4517 4518 4519 4520 
            (<span class="since">since 1.2.9</span>) attribute indicates
            whether the lun needs the rawio capability. Valid settings are
            "yes" or "no". See the rawio description within the
            <a href="#elementsDisks">disk</a> section.
            If a disk lun in the domain already has the rawio capability,
            then this setting not required.
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4521 
          </dd>
E
conf: Wire up the vhost-scsi connection from/to XML  
Eric Farman 已提交
4522 4523 4524 4525 4526 4527 
          <dt><code>scsi_host</code></dt>
          <dd><span class="since">since 2.5.0</span>For SCSI devices, user
            is responsible to make sure the device is not used by host. This
            <code>type</code> passes all LUNs presented by a single HBA to
            the guest.
          </dd>
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4528 4529 4530 4531 
          <dt><code>mdev</code></dt>
          <dd>For mediated devices (<span class="since">Since 3.2.0</span>)
          the <code>model</code> attribute specifies the device API which
          determines how the host's vfio driver will expose the device to the
S
docs: documentation for vfio-ccw passthrough  
Shalini Chellathurai Saroja 已提交
4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537 4538 
          guest. Currently, <code>model='vfio-pci'</code> and
          <code>model='vfio-ccw'</code> (<span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span>)
          is supported. Refer <a href="drvnodedev.html#MDEV">MDEV</a> to create
          a mediated device on the host. There are also some implications on the
          usage of guest's address type depending on the <code>model</code>
          attribute, see the <code>address</code> element below.
          </dd>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4539 
        </dl>
E
docs: add a note that attr 'managed' is only used by PCI devices  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4540 
        <p>
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 
          Note: The <code>managed</code> attribute is only used with
          <code>type='pci'</code> and is ignored by all the other device types,
          thus setting <code>managed</code> explicitly with other than a PCI
          device has the same effect as omitting it. Similarly,
          <code>model</code> attribute is only supported by mediated devices and
          ignored by all other device types.
E
docs: add a note that attr 'managed' is only used by PCI devices  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4547 
        </p>
O
conf: Introduce sgio for hostdev  
Osier Yang 已提交
4548 
      </dd>
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4549 
      <dt><code>source</code></dt>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4550 4551 4552 
      <dd>The source element describes the device as seen from the host using
        the following mechanism to describe:
        <dl>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4553 
          <dt><code>usb</code></dt>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559 4560 4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579 4580 
          <dd>The USB device can either be addressed by vendor / product id
            using the <code>vendor</code> and <code>product</code> elements
            or by the device's address on the host using the
            <code>address</code> element.
            <p>
            <span class="since">Since 1.0.0</span>, the <code>source</code>
            element of USB devices may contain <code>startupPolicy</code>
            attribute which can be used to define policy what to do if the
            specified host USB device is not found. The attribute accepts
            the following values:
            </p>
            <table class="top_table">
              <tr>
                <td> mandatory </td>
                <td> fail if missing for any reason (the default) </td>
              </tr>
              <tr>
                <td> requisite </td>
                <td> fail if missing on boot up,
                     drop if missing on migrate/restore/revert </td>
              </tr>
              <tr>
                <td> optional </td>
                <td> drop if missing at any start attempt </td>
              </tr>
            </table>
          </dd>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4581 
          <dt><code>pci</code></dt>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4582 4583 
          <dd>PCI devices can only be described by their <code>address</code>.
          </dd>
A
docs: Use <code> inside <dt> for symbols  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4584 
          <dt><code>scsi</code></dt>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4585 
          <dd>SCSI devices are described by both the <code>adapter</code>
E
docs: Fix XML schema handling of LUN address in hostdev tag  
Eric Farman 已提交
4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 
            and <code>address</code> elements. The <code>address</code>
            element includes a <code>bus</code> attribute (a 2-digit bus
            number), a <code>target</code> attribute (a 10-digit target
            number), and a <code>unit</code> attribute (a 20-digit unit
            number on the bus). Not all hypervisors support larger
            <code>target</code> and <code>unit</code> values. It is up
            to each hypervisor to determine the maximum value supported
            for the adapter.
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4594 4595 4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 
            <p>
            <span class="since">Since 1.2.8</span>, the <code>source</code>
            element of a SCSI device may contain the <code>protocol</code>
            attribute. When the attribute is set to "iscsi", the host
            device XML follows the network <a href="#elementsDisks">disk</a>
            device using the same <code>name</code> attribute and optionally
            using the <code>auth</code> element to provide the authentication
            credentials to the iSCSI server.
            </p>
          </dd>
E
conf: Wire up the vhost-scsi connection from/to XML  
Eric Farman 已提交
4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 
          <dt><code>scsi_host</code></dt>
          <dd><span class="since">Since 2.5.0</span>, multiple LUNs behind a
            single SCSI HBA are described by a <code>protocol</code>
            attribute set to "vhost" and a <code>wwpn</code> attribute that
            is the vhost_scsi wwpn (16 hexadecimal digits with a prefix of
            "naa.") established in the host configfs.
          </dd>
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 
          <dt><code>mdev</code></dt>
          <dd>Mediated devices (<span class="since">Since 3.2.0</span>) are
            described by the <code>address</code> element. The
            <code>address</code> element contains a single mandatory attribute
            <code>uuid</code>.
          </dd>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
4617 
        </dl>
J
conf: Add support for startupPolicy for USB devices  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
4618 
      </dd>
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4619 4620 4621 4622 4623 
      <dt><code>vendor</code>, <code>product</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>vendor</code> and <code>product</code> elements each have an
      <code>id</code> attribute that specifies the USB vendor and product id.
      The ids can be given in decimal, hexadecimal (starting with 0x) or
      octal (starting with 0) form.</dd>
J
Support booting from hostdev devices  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
4624 4625 4626 4627 4628 4629 
      <dt><code>boot</code></dt>
      <dd>Specifies that the device is bootable. The <code>order</code>
      attribute determines the order in which devices will be tried during
      boot sequence. The per-device <code>boot</code> elements cannot be
      used together with general boot elements in
      <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section.
J
docs: boot order for host and redirected USB devices  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4630 4631 
      <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span> for PCI devices,
      <span class="since">Since 1.0.1</span> for USB devices.
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4632 
      </dd>
L
qemu: add ability to set PCI device "rombar" on or off  
Laine Stump 已提交
4633 4634 
      <dt><code>rom</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>rom</code> element is used to change how a PCI
L
qemu: add "romfile" support to specify device boot ROM  
Laine Stump 已提交
4635 
        device's ROM is presented to the guest. The optional <code>bar</code>
L
qemu: add ability to set PCI device "rombar" on or off  
Laine Stump 已提交
4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 
        attribute can be set to "on" or "off", and determines whether
        or not the device's ROM will be visible in the guest's memory
        map. (In PCI documentation, the "rombar" setting controls the
        presence of the Base Address Register for the ROM). If no rom
        bar is specified, the qemu default will be used (older
        versions of qemu used a default of "off", while newer qemus
        have a default of "on"). <span class="since">Since
L
qemu: add "romfile" support to specify device boot ROM  
Laine Stump 已提交
4643 
        0.9.7 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>. The optional
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4644 
        <code>file</code> attribute contains an absolute path to a binary file
L
qemu: add "romfile" support to specify device boot ROM  
Laine Stump 已提交
4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 
        to be presented to the guest as the device's ROM BIOS. This
        can be useful, for example, to provide a PXE boot ROM for a
        virtual function of an sr-iov capable ethernet device (which
        has no boot ROMs for the VFs).
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>.
A
conf: Add rom.enabled attribute for PCI devices  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 
        The optional <code>enabled</code> attribute can be set to
        <code>no</code> to disable PCI ROM loading completely for the device;
        if PCI ROM loading is disabled through this attribute, attempts to
        tweak the loading process further using the <code>bar</code> or
        <code>file</code> attributes will be rejected.
        <span class="since">Since 4.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>.
L
qemu: add ability to set PCI device "rombar" on or off  
Laine Stump 已提交
4656 
      </dd>
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4657 
      <dt><code>address</code></dt>
D
Add tests and docs for the new PCI passthrough format  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 
      <dd>The <code>address</code> element for USB devices has a
      <code>bus</code> and <code>device</code> attribute to specify the
      USB bus and device number the device appears at on the host.
      The values of these attributes can be given in decimal, hexadecimal
      (starting with 0x) or octal (starting with 0) form.
H
doc: add domain to address of hostdev pci  
Hu Tao 已提交
4663 
      For PCI devices the element carries 4 attributes allowing to designate
D
Add tests and docs for the new PCI passthrough format  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4664 
      the device as can be found with the <code>lspci</code> or
J
conf: Change when virDomainHostdevAssignAddress is called  
John Ferlan 已提交
4665 
      with <code>virsh nodedev-list</code>. For SCSI devices a 'drive'
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4666 4667 4668 4669 
      address type must be used. For mediated devices, which are software-only
      devices defining an allocation of resources on the physical parent device,
      the address type used must conform to the <code>model</code> attribute
      of element <code>hostdev</code>, e.g. any address type other than PCI for
S
docs: documentation for vfio-ccw passthrough  
Shalini Chellathurai Saroja 已提交
4670 4671 
      <code>vfio-pci</code> device API or any address type other than CCW for
      <code>vfio-ccw</code> device API will result in an error.
E
docs: Document the new hostdev type 'mdev'  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4672 4673 
      <a href="#elementsAddress">See above</a> for more details on the address
      element.</dd>
L
conf: formatter/parser/RNG/docs for hostdev <driver name='kvm|vfio'/>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 
      <dt><code>driver</code></dt>
      <dd>
        PCI devices can have an optional <code>driver</code>
        subelement that specifies which backend driver to use for PCI
        device assignment. Use the <code>name</code> attribute to
        select either "vfio" (for the new VFIO device assignment
        backend, which is compatible with UEFI SecureBoot) or "kvm"
L
docs: document that vfio is default for hostdev networks too  
Laine Stump 已提交
4681 
        (the legacy device assignment handled directly by the KVM
L
conf: formatter/parser/RNG/docs for hostdev <driver name='kvm|vfio'/>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4682 
        kernel module)<span class="since">Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM
L
docs: document that vfio is default for hostdev networks too  
Laine Stump 已提交
4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 
        only, requires kernel 3.6 or newer)</span>. When specified,
        device assignment will fail if the requested method of device
        assignment isn't available on the host. When not specified,
        the default is "vfio" on systems where the VFIO driver is
        available and loaded, and "kvm" on older systems, or those
        where the VFIO driver hasn't been
        loaded <span class="since">Since 1.1.3</span> (prior to that
        the default was always "kvm").
L
conf: formatter/parser/RNG/docs for hostdev <driver name='kvm|vfio'/>  
Laine Stump 已提交
4691 
      </dd>
O
Introduce <readonly> for hostdev  
Osier Yang 已提交
4692 4693 4694 4695 
      <dt><code>readonly</code></dt>
      <dd>Indicates that the device is readonly, only supported by SCSI host
        device now. <span class="since">Since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
      </dd>
O
conf: Introduce <shareable> for hostdev  
Osier Yang 已提交
4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 
      <dt><code>shareable</code></dt>
      <dd>If present, this indicates the device is expected to be shared
        between domains (assuming the hypervisor and OS support this).
        Only supported by SCSI host device.
        <span class="since">Since 1.0.6</span>
O
qemu: Don't fail if the SCSI host device is shareable between domains  
Osier Yang 已提交
4701 4702 4703 4704 4705 
        <p>
          Note: Although <code>shareable</code> was introduced
          <span class="since">in 1.0.6</span>, it did not work as
          as expected until <span class="since">1.2.2</span>.
        </p>
O
conf: Introduce <shareable> for hostdev  
Osier Yang 已提交
4706 
      </dd>
D
documentation for USB passthrough  
Daniel Veillard 已提交
4707 4708 
    </dl>
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4709
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4710 
    <h5><a id="elementsHostDevCaps">Block / character devices</a></h5>
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4711 4712 4713 4714 

    <p>
      Block / character devices from the host can be passed through
      to the guest using the <code>hostdev</code> element. This is
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
4715 4716 
      only possible with container based virtualization. Devices are specified
      by a fully qualified path.
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 4734 4735 4736 
      <span class="since">since after 1.0.1 for LXC</span>:
    </p>

    <pre>
...
&lt;hostdev mode='capabilities' type='storage'&gt;
  &lt;source&gt;
    &lt;block&gt;/dev/sdf1&lt;/block&gt;
  &lt;/source&gt;
&lt;/hostdev&gt;
...
    </pre>

    <pre>
...
&lt;hostdev mode='capabilities' type='misc'&gt;
  &lt;source&gt;
    &lt;char&gt;/dev/input/event3&lt;/char&gt;
  &lt;/source&gt;
&lt;/hostdev&gt;
B
Update structure & XML definitions to support <hostdev caps=net>  
Bogdan Purcareata 已提交
4737 4738 4739 
...
    </pre>
O
docs: Add the missed <pre> tag  
Osier Yang 已提交
4740 
    <pre>
B
Update structure & XML definitions to support <hostdev caps=net>  
Bogdan Purcareata 已提交
4741 4742 4743 4744 4745 4746 
...
&lt;hostdev mode='capabilities' type='net'&gt;
  &lt;source&gt;
    &lt;interface&gt;eth0&lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;/source&gt;
&lt;/hostdev&gt;
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4747 4748 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 
...
    </pre>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>hostdev</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>hostdev</code> element is the main container for describing
        host devices. For block/character device passthrough <code>mode</code> is
J
docs: fix some typos in formatdomain.html  
Jincheng Miao 已提交
4754 4755 
        always "capabilities" and <code>type</code> is "storage" for a block
        device, "misc" for a character device and "net" for a host network
B
Update structure & XML definitions to support <hostdev caps=net>  
Bogdan Purcareata 已提交
4756 
        interface.
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>source</code></dt>
      <dd>The source element describes the device as seen from the host.
        For block devices, the path to the block device in the host
        OS is provided in the nested "block" element, while for character
B
Update structure & XML definitions to support <hostdev caps=net>  
Bogdan Purcareata 已提交
4762 4763 
        devices the "char" element is used. For network interfaces, the
        name of the interface is provided in the "interface" element.
D
Add support for <hostdev mode="capabilities">  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4764 4765 4766 
      </dd>
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4767 
    <h4><a id="elementsRedir">Redirected devices</a></h4>
M
Add "redirdev" redirection device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 

    <p>
      USB device redirection through a character device is
      supported <span class="since">since after 0.9.5 (KVM
      only)</span>:
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 4785 4786 4787 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;redirdev bus='usb' type='tcp'&gt;
    &lt;source mode='connect' host='localhost' service='4000'/&gt;
    &lt;boot order='1'/&gt;
  &lt;/redirdev&gt;
  &lt;redirfilter&gt;
    &lt;usbdev class='0x08' vendor='0x1234' product='0xbeef' version='2.56' allow='yes'/&gt;
    &lt;usbdev allow='no'/&gt;
  &lt;/redirfilter&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
Add "redirdev" redirection device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800 4801 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>redirdev</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>redirdev</code> element is the main container for
        describing redirected devices. <code>bus</code> must be "usb"
        for a USB device.

        An additional attribute <code>type</code> is required,
        matching one of the
        supported <a href="#elementsConsole">serial device</a> types,
        to describe the host side of the
        tunnel; <code>type='tcp'</code>
        or <code>type='spicevmc'</code> (which uses the usbredir
        channel of a <a href="#elementsGraphics">SPICE graphics
J
docs: Fix a few spaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4802 4803 
        device</a>) are typical. The redirdev element has an optional
        sub-element <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> which can tie the
G
doc: update usb redirection filter infomation on formatdomain.html  
Guannan Ren 已提交
4804 4805 4806 4807 
        device to a particular controller. Further sub-elements,
        such as <code>&lt;source&gt;</code>, may be required according
        to the given type, although a <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> sub-element
        is not required (since the consumer of the character device is
J
docs: boot order for host and redirected USB devices  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813 4814 4815 4816 4817 
        the hypervisor itself, rather than a device visible in the guest).
      </dd>
      <dt><code>boot</code></dt>

      <dd>Specifies that the device is bootable.
        The <code>order</code> attribute determines the order in which
        devices will be tried during boot sequence. The per-device
        <code>boot</code> elements cannot be used together with general
        boot elements in  <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section.
        (<span class="since">Since 1.0.1</span>)
G
doc: update usb redirection filter infomation on formatdomain.html  
Guannan Ren 已提交
4818 4819 4820 4821 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>redirfilter</code></dt>
      <dd>The<code> redirfilter </code>element is used for creating the
        filter rule to filter out certain devices from redirection.
J
docs: Fix a few spaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4822 4823 
        It uses sub-element <code>&lt;usbdev&gt;</code> to define each filter rule.
        <code>class</code> attribute is the USB Class code, for example,
G
doc: update usb redirection filter infomation on formatdomain.html  
Guannan Ren 已提交
4824 
        0x08 represents mass storage devices. The USB device can be addressed by
J
docs: Fix a few spaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4825 
        vendor / product id using the <code>vendor</code> and <code>product</code> attributes.
J
Clarify the meaning of version in redirdev filters  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4826 4827 
        <code>version</code> is the device revision from the bcdDevice field (not
        the version of the USB protocol).
G
doc: update usb redirection filter infomation on formatdomain.html  
Guannan Ren 已提交
4828 
        These four attributes are optional and <code>-1</code> can be used to allow
J
docs: Fix a few spaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
4829 
        any value for them. <code>allow</code> attribute is mandatory,
G
doc: update usb redirection filter infomation on formatdomain.html  
Guannan Ren 已提交
4830 4831 
        'yes' means allow, 'no' for deny.
      </dd>
M
Add "redirdev" redirection device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
4832 4833 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4834 
    <h4><a id="elementsSmartcard">Smartcard devices</a></h4>
E
smartcard: add XML support for <smartcard> device  
Eric Blake 已提交
4835 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849 

    <p>
      A virtual smartcard device can be supplied to the guest via the
      <code>smartcard</code> element. A USB smartcard reader device on
      the host cannot be used on a guest with simple device
      passthrough, since it will then not be available on the host,
      possibly locking the host computer when it is "removed".
      Therefore, some hypervisors provide a specialized virtual device
      that can present a smartcard interface to the guest, with
      several modes for describing how credentials are obtained from
      the host or even a from a channel created to a third-party
      smartcard provider. <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span>
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4855 4856 4857 4858 4859 4860 4861 4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;smartcard mode='host'/&gt;
  &lt;smartcard mode='host-certificates'&gt;
    &lt;certificate&gt;cert1&lt;/certificate&gt;
    &lt;certificate&gt;cert2&lt;/certificate&gt;
    &lt;certificate&gt;cert3&lt;/certificate&gt;
    &lt;database&gt;/etc/pki/nssdb/&lt;/database&gt;
  &lt;/smartcard&gt;
  &lt;smartcard mode='passthrough' type='tcp'&gt;
    &lt;source mode='bind' host='127.0.0.1' service='2001'/&gt;
    &lt;protocol type='raw'/&gt;
    &lt;address type='ccid' controller='0' slot='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/smartcard&gt;
  &lt;smartcard mode='passthrough' type='spicevmc'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
E
smartcard: add XML support for <smartcard> device  
Eric Blake 已提交
4867 4868 4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 
</pre>

    <p>
      The <code>&lt;smartcard&gt;</code> element has a mandatory
      attribute <code>mode</code>.  The following modes are supported;
      in each mode, the guest sees a device on its USB bus that
      behaves like a physical USB CCID (Chip/Smart Card Interface
      Device) card.
    </p>

    <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4878 
      <dt><code>host</code></dt>
E
smartcard: add XML support for <smartcard> device  
Eric Blake 已提交
4879 4880 4881 4882 4883 4884 
      <dd>The simplest operation, where the hypervisor relays all
      requests from the guest into direct access to the host's
      smartcard via NSS.  No other attributes or sub-elements are
      required.  See below about the use of an
      optional <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> sub-element.</dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4885 
      <dt><code>host-certificates</code></dt>
E
smartcard: add XML support for <smartcard> device  
Eric Blake 已提交
4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894 4895 4896 4897 4898 
      <dd>Rather than requiring a smartcard to be plugged into the
      host, it is possible to provide three NSS certificate names
      residing in a database on the host.  These certificates can be
      generated via the command <code>certutil -d /etc/pki/nssdb -x -t
      CT,CT,CT -S -s CN=cert1 -n cert1</code>, and the resulting three
      certificate names must be supplied as the content of each of
      three <code>&lt;certificate&gt;</code> sub-elements.  An
      additional sub-element <code>&lt;database&gt;</code> can specify
      the absolute path to an alternate directory (matching
      the <code>-d</code> option of the <code>certutil</code> command
      when creating the certificates); if not present, it defaults to
      /etc/pki/nssdb.</dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
4899 
      <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt>
E
smartcard: add XML support for <smartcard> device  
Eric Blake 已提交
4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 
      <dd>Rather than having the hypervisor directly communicate with
      the host, it is possible to tunnel all requests through a
      secondary character device to a third-party provider (which may
      in turn be talking to a smartcard or using three certificate
      files).  In this mode of operation, an additional
      attribute <code>type</code> is required, matching one of the
      supported <a href="#elementsConsole">serial device</a> types, to
E
smartcard: add spicevmc support  
Eric Blake 已提交
4907 4908 4909 4910 4911 
      describe the host side of the tunnel; <code>type='tcp'</code>
      or <code>type='spicevmc'</code> (which uses the smartcard
      channel of a <a href="#elementsGraphics">SPICE graphics
      device</a>) are typical.  Further sub-elements, such
      as <code>&lt;source&gt;</code>, may be required according to the
E
smartcard: add XML support for <smartcard> device  
Eric Blake 已提交
4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920 
      given type, although a <code>&lt;target&gt;</code> sub-element
      is not required (since the consumer of the character device is
      the hypervisor itself, rather than a device visible in the
      guest).</dd>
    </dl>

    <p>
      Each mode supports an optional
      sub-element <code>&lt;address&gt;</code>, which fine-tunes the
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
4921 4922 4923 
      correlation between the smartcard and a ccid bus
      controller, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>.
      For now, qemu only supports at most one
E
smartcard: add XML support for <smartcard> device  
Eric Blake 已提交
4924 4925 4926 
      smartcard, with an address of bus=0 slot=0.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4927 
    <h4><a id="elementsNICS">Network interfaces</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4928
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
4929 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
4930 4931 4932 4933 4934 4935 4936 4937 4938 4939 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='direct' trustGuestRxFilters='yes'&gt;
    &lt;source dev='eth0'/&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:5d:c7:9e'/&gt;
    &lt;boot order='1'/&gt;
    &lt;rom bar='off'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4940
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
4941 4942 4943 
    <p>
      There are several possibilities for specifying a network
      interface visible to the guest.  Each subsection below provides
L
conf: add trustGuestRxFilters attribute to network and domain interface  
Laine Stump 已提交
4944 4945 4946 4947 4948 4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 
      more details about common setup options.
    </p>
    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.10</span>),
      the <code>interface</code> element
      property <code>trustGuestRxFilters</code> provides the
      capability for the host to detect and trust reports from the
      guest regarding changes to the interface mac address and receive
      filters by setting the attribute to <code>yes</code>. The default
      setting for the attribute is <code>no</code> for security
      reasons and support depends on the guest network device model as
      well as the type of connection on the host - currently it is
C
docs: fix a typo in formatdomain.html  
Chen Fan 已提交
4956 
      only supported for the virtio device model and for macvtap
L
conf: add trustGuestRxFilters attribute to network and domain interface  
Laine Stump 已提交
4957 4958 4959 4960 
      connections on the host.
    </p>
    <p>
      Each <code>&lt;interface&gt;</code> element has an
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
4961 4962 
      optional <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> sub-element that can tie
      the interface to a particular pci slot, with
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
4963 4964 
      attribute <code>type='pci'</code>
      as <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>.
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
4965 4966 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4967 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSVirtual">Virtual network</a></h5>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4968 4969 4970 4971 

    <p>
      <strong><em>
      This is the recommended config for general guest connectivity on
L
conf: support abstracted interface info in domain interface XML  
Laine Stump 已提交
4972 4973 4974 4975 
      hosts with dynamic / wireless networking configs (or multi-host
      environments where the host hardware details are described
      separately in a <code>&lt;network&gt;</code>
      definition <span class="since">Since 0.9.4</span>).
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
4976 4977 4978 4979 
      </em></strong>
    </p>

    <p>
L
conf: support abstracted interface info in domain interface XML  
Laine Stump 已提交
4980 4981 4982 4983 4984 4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992 4993 4994 4995 4996 4997 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 

      Provides a connection whose details are described by the named
      network definition. Depending on the virtual network's "forward
      mode" configuration, the network may be totally isolated
      (no <code>&lt;forward&gt;</code> element given), NAT'ing to an
      explicit network device or to the default route
      (<code>&lt;forward mode='nat'&gt;</code>), routed with no NAT
      (<code>&lt;forward mode='route'/&gt;</code>), or connected
      directly to one of the host's network interfaces (via macvtap)
      or bridge devices ((<code>&lt;forward
      mode='bridge|private|vepa|passthrough'/&gt;</code> <span class="since">Since
      0.9.4</span>)
    </p>
    <p>
      For networks with a forward mode of bridge, private, vepa, and
      passthrough, it is assumed that the host has any necessary DNS
      and DHCP services already setup outside the scope of libvirt. In
      the case of isolated, nat, and routed networks, DHCP and DNS are
      provided on the virtual network by libvirt, and the IP range can
      be determined by examining the virtual network config with
      '<code>virsh net-dumpxml [networkname]</code>'. There is one
      virtual network called 'default' setup out of the box which does
      NAT'ing to the default route and has an IP range
      of <code>192.168.122.0/255.255.255.0</code>. Each guest will
      have an associated tun device created with a name of vnetN,
      which can also be overridden with the &lt;target&gt; element
      (see
C
Document overriding domain interface target  
Cole Robinson 已提交
5007 
      <a href="#elementsNICSTargetOverride">overriding the target element</a>).
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5008 
    </p>
L
conf: support abstracted interface info in domain interface XML  
Laine Stump 已提交
5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 
    <p>
      When the source of an interface is a network,
      a <code>portgroup</code> can be specified along with the name of
      the network; one network may have multiple portgroups defined,
      with each portgroup containing slightly different configuration
      information for different classes of network
L
network: merge relevant virtualports rather than choosing one  
Laine Stump 已提交
5015 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027 5028 5029 5030 5031 5032 5033 
      connections. <span class="since">Since 0.9.4</span>.
    </p>
    <p>
      Also, similar to <code>direct</code> network connections
      (described below), a connection of type <code>network</code> may
      specify a <code>virtualport</code> element, with configuration
      data to be forwarded to a vepa (802.1Qbg) or 802.1Qbh compliant
      switch (<span class="since">Since 0.8.2</span>), or to an
      Open vSwitch virtual switch (<span class="since">Since
      0.9.11</span>).
    </p>
    <p>
      Since the actual type of switch may vary depending on the
      configuration in the <code>&lt;network&gt;</code> on the host,
      it is acceptable to omit the virtualport <code>type</code>
      attribute, and specify attributes from multiple different
      virtualport types (and also to leave out certain attributes); at
      domain startup time, a complete <code>&lt;virtualport&gt;</code>
      element will be constructed by merging together the type and
G
network: fix typos and docs  
Guannan Ren 已提交
5034 5035 5036 5037 5038 
      attributes defined in the network and the portgroup referenced
      by the interface. The newly-constructed virtualport is a combination
      of them. The attributes from lower virtualport can't make change
      on the ones defined in higher virtualport.
      Interface takes the highest priority, portgroup is lowest priority.
L
network: merge relevant virtualports rather than choosing one  
Laine Stump 已提交
5039 5040 5041 
      (<span class="since">Since 0.10.0</span>). For example, in order
      to work properly with both an 802.1Qbh switch and an Open vSwitch
      switch, you may choose to specify no type, but both
V
docs: Grammar and spelling fixes  
Ville Skyttä 已提交
5042 
      a <code>profileid</code> (in case the switch is 802.1Qbh) and
L
network: merge relevant virtualports rather than choosing one  
Laine Stump 已提交
5043 5044 5045 5046 5047 5048 5049 5050 5051 
      an <code>interfaceid</code> (in case the switch is Open vSwitch)
      (you may also omit the other attributes, such as managerid,
      typeid, or profileid, to be filled in from the
      network's <code>&lt;virtualport&gt;</code>). If you want to
      limit a guest to connecting only to certain types of switches,
      you can specify the virtualport type, but still omit some/all of
      the parameters - in this case if the host's network has a
      different type of virtualport, connection of the interface will
      fail.
L
conf: support abstracted interface info in domain interface XML  
Laine Stump 已提交
5052 
    </p>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5053
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5054 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5055 5056 5057 5058 5059 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5060 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 5066 5067 5068 5069 5070 5071 
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default' portgroup='engineering'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet7'/&gt;
    &lt;mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/&gt;
    &lt;virtualport&gt;
      &lt;parameters instanceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/&gt;
    &lt;/virtualport&gt;

  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5072
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5073 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSBridge">Bridge to LAN</a></h5>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5074 5075 5076 5077 

    <p>
      <strong><em>
      This is the recommended config for general guest connectivity on
L
network: merge relevant virtualports rather than choosing one  
Laine Stump 已提交
5078 
      hosts with static wired networking configs.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5079 5080 5081 5082 
      </em></strong>
    </p>

    <p>
E
docs: fix usage of 'onto'  
Eric Blake 已提交
5083 
      Provides a bridge from the VM directly to the LAN. This assumes
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5084 5085 5086 
      there is a bridge device on the host which has one or more of the hosts
      physical NICs enslaved. The guest VM will have an associated tun device
      created with a name of vnetN, which can also be overridden with the
C
Document overriding domain interface target  
Cole Robinson 已提交
5087 5088 5089 5090 5091 
      &lt;target&gt; element (see
      <a href="#elementsNICSTargetOverride">overriding the target element</a>).
      The tun device will be enslaved to the bridge. The IP range / network
      configuration is whatever is used on the LAN. This provides the guest VM
      full incoming &amp; outgoing net access just like a physical machine.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5092 
    </p>
L
network: merge relevant virtualports rather than choosing one  
Laine Stump 已提交
5093 5094 5095 
    <p>
      On Linux systems, the bridge device is normally a standard Linux
      host bridge. On hosts that support Open vSwitch, it is also
L
util: set vlan tag for macvtap passthrough mode on SRIOV VFs  
Laine Stump 已提交
5096 
      possible to connect to an Open vSwitch bridge device by adding
L
network: merge relevant virtualports rather than choosing one  
Laine Stump 已提交
5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 
      a <code>&lt;virtualport type='openvswitch'/&gt;</code> to the
      interface definition.  (<span class="since">Since
      0.9.11</span>). The Open vSwitch type virtualport accepts two
      parameters in its <code>&lt;parameters&gt;</code> element -
      an <code>interfaceid</code> which is a standard uuid used to
      uniquely identify this particular interface to Open vSwitch (if
C
doc: fix a typo in formatdomain  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
5103 
      you do not specify one, a random interfaceid will be generated
L
network: merge relevant virtualports rather than choosing one  
Laine Stump 已提交
5104 5105 5106 5107 
      for you when you first define the interface), and an
      optional <code>profileid</code> which is sent to Open vSwitch as
      the interfaces "port-profile".
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5108 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5109 5110 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5111 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5112 5113 5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128 
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    &lt;source bridge='br0'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    &lt;source bridge='br1'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet7'/&gt;
    &lt;mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    &lt;source bridge='ovsbr'/&gt;
    &lt;virtualport type='openvswitch'&gt;
      &lt;parameters profileid='menial' interfaceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/&gt;
    &lt;/virtualport&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  ...
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
A
docs: schema and docs for the midonet virtualport type  
Antoni Segura Puimedon 已提交
5129 5130 5131 5132 5133 5134 5135 5136 5137 5138 5139 5140 5141 5142 

    <p>
      On hosts that support Open vSwitch on the kernel side and have the
      Midonet Host Agent configured, it is also possible to connect to the
      'midonet' bridge device by adding a
      <code>&lt;virtualport type='midonet'/&gt;</code> to the
      interface definition.  (<span class="since">Since
      1.2.13</span>). The Midonet virtualport type requires an
      <code>interfaceid</code> attribute in its
      <code>&lt;parameters&gt;</code> element. This interface id is the UUID
      that specifies which port in the virtual network topology will be bound
      to the interface.
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5143 5144 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
A
docs: schema and docs for the midonet virtualport type  
Antoni Segura Puimedon 已提交
5145 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    &lt;source bridge='br0'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    &lt;source bridge='br1'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet7'/&gt;
    &lt;mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    &lt;source bridge='midonet'/&gt;
    &lt;virtualport type='midonet'&gt;
      &lt;parameters interfaceid='0b2d64da-3d0e-431e-afdd-804415d6ebbb'/&gt;
    &lt;/virtualport&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  ...
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5163
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5164 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSSlirp">Userspace SLIRP stack</a></h5>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 

    <p>
      Provides a virtual LAN with NAT to the outside world. The virtual
      network has DHCP &amp; DNS services and will give the guest VM addresses
      starting from <code>10.0.2.15</code>. The default router will be
      <code>10.0.2.2</code> and the DNS server will be <code>10.0.2.3</code>.
      This networking is the only option for unprivileged users who need their
M
conf: Allow usernet to have an address  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 
      VMs to have outgoing access. <span class="since">Since 3.8.0</span>
      it is possible to override the default network address by
      including an <code>ip</code> element specifying an IPv4
      address in its one mandatory attribute, <code>address</code>.
      Optionally, a second <code>ip</code> element with a
      <code>family</code> attribute set to "ipv6" can be
      specified to add an IPv6 address to the interface.
      <code>address</code>. Optionally, address
      <code>prefix</code> can be specified.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5181 5182 
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5183 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5184 5185 5186 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='user'/&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5187 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5188 5189 
  &lt;interface type='user'&gt;
    &lt;mac address="00:11:22:33:44:55"/&gt;
M
conf: Allow usernet to have an address  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5190 5191 
    &lt;ip family='ipv4' address='172.17.2.0' prefix='24'/&gt;
    &lt;ip family='ipv6' address='2001:db8:ac10:fd01::' prefix='64'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5192 5193 5194 
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5195 5196
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5197 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSEthernet">Generic ethernet connection</a></h5>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 

    <p>
      Provides a means for the administrator to execute an arbitrary script
      to connect the guest's network to the LAN. The guest will have a tun
      device created with a name of vnetN, which can also be overridden with the
      &lt;target&gt; element. After creating the tun device a shell script will
      be run which is expected to do whatever host network integration is
      required. By default this script is called /etc/qemu-ifup but can be
      overridden.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5209 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5210 5211 5212 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='ethernet'/&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5213 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 5219 
  &lt;interface type='ethernet'&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet7'/&gt;
    &lt;script path='/etc/qemu-ifup-mynet'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5220
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5221 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSDirect">Direct attachment to physical interface</a></h5>
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5222 5223 5224 

    <p>
      Provides direct attachment of the virtual machine's NIC to the given
Y
Fix minor typos in messages and docs  
Yuri Chornoivan 已提交
5225 
      physical interface of the host.
E
docs: correct invalid xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
5226 
      <span class="since">Since 0.7.7 (QEMU and KVM only)</span><br/>
S
Mention direct device support since 0.7.7 in docs  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5227 5228 5229 
      This setup requires the Linux macvtap
      driver to be available. <span class="since">(Since Linux 2.6.34.)</span>
      One of the modes 'vepa'
S
web docs -- macvtap mode explanation  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5230 
      ( <a href="http://www.ieee802.org/1/files/public/docs2009/new-evb-congdon-vepa-modular-0709-v01.pdf">
E
docs: correct range of default NAT subnet  
Eric Blake 已提交
5231 
      'Virtual Ethernet Port Aggregator'</a>), 'bridge' or 'private'
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5232 
      can be chosen for the operation mode of the macvtap device, 'vepa'
S
web docs -- macvtap mode explanation  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5233 5234 
      being the default mode. The individual modes cause the delivery of
      packets to behave as follows:
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5235 
    </p>
L
conf: add trustGuestRxFilters attribute to network and domain interface  
Laine Stump 已提交
5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247 
    <p>
      If the model type is set to <code>virtio</code> and
      interface's <code>trustGuestRxFilters</code> attribute is set
      to <code>yes</code>, changes made to the interface mac address,
      unicast/multicast receive filters, and vlan settings in the
      guest will be monitored and propagated to the associated macvtap
      device on the host (<span class="since">Since
      1.2.10</span>). If <code>trustGuestRxFilters</code> is not set,
      or is not supported for the device model in use, an attempted
      change to the mac address originating from the guest side will
      result in a non-working network connection.
    </p>
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5248
S
web docs -- macvtap mode explanation  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256 5257 5258 5259 
    <dl>
      <dt><code>vepa</code></dt>
      <dd>All VMs' packets are sent to the external bridge. Packets
      whose destination is a VM on the same host as where the
      packet originates from are sent back to the host by the VEPA
      capable bridge (today's bridges are typically not VEPA capable).</dd>
      <dt><code>bridge</code></dt>
      <dd>Packets whose destination is on the same host as where they
      originate from are directly delivered to the target macvtap device.
      Both origin and destination devices need to be in bridge mode
      for direct delivery. If either one of them is in <code>vepa</code> mode,
E
docs: correct invalid xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
5260 
      a VEPA capable bridge is required.</dd>
S
web docs -- macvtap mode explanation  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 
      <dt><code>private</code></dt>
      <dd>All packets are sent to the external bridge and will only be
      delivered to a target VM on the same host if they are sent through an
      external router or gateway and that device sends them back to the
      host. This procedure is followed if either the source or destination
      device is in <code>private</code> mode.</dd>
D
Add support for 'passthru' mode for direct network interfaces  
Dirk Herrendorefer 已提交
5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 
      <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt>
      <dd>This feature attaches a virtual function of a SRIOV capable
      NIC directly to a VM without losing the migration capability.
      All packets are sent to the VF/IF of the configured network device.
      Depending on the capabilities of the device additional prerequisites or
      limitations may apply; for example, on Linux this requires
      kernel 2.6.38 or newer. <span class="since">Since 0.9.2</span></dd>
S
web docs -- macvtap mode explanation  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5274 5275 
    </dl>
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5276 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5277 5278 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5279 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5280 5281 5282 5283 5284 
  &lt;interface type='direct' trustGuestRxFilters='no'&gt;
    &lt;source dev='eth0' mode='vepa'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5285
G
documenting the 802.1Qbg parameters of a 'direct' interface  
Gerhard Stenzel 已提交
5286 5287 5288 5289 
    <p>
      The network access of direct attached virtual machines can be
      managed by the hardware switch to which the physical interface
      of the host machine is connected to.
E
docs: fix missing </p>  
Eric Blake 已提交
5290 
    </p>
G
documenting the 802.1Qbg parameters of a 'direct' interface  
Gerhard Stenzel 已提交
5291 5292 5293 5294 5295 5296 5297 
    <p>
      The interface can have additional parameters as shown below,
      if the switch is conforming to the IEEE 802.1Qbg standard.
      The parameters of the virtualport element are documented in more detail
      in the IEEE 802.1Qbg standard. The values are network specific and
      should be provided by the network administrator. In 802.1Qbg terms,
      the Virtual Station Interface (VSI) represents the virtual interface
D
documenting the 802.1Qbh parameters of a 'direct' interface  
David S. Wang 已提交
5298 
      of a virtual machine. <span class="since">Since 0.8.2</span>
G
documenting the 802.1Qbg parameters of a 'direct' interface  
Gerhard Stenzel 已提交
5299 
    </p>
G
fix missing VLAN id for Qbg example  
Gerhard Stenzel 已提交
5300 5301 5302 5303 
    <p>
      Please note that IEEE 802.1Qbg requires a non-zero value for the
      VLAN ID.
    </p>
G
documenting the 802.1Qbg parameters of a 'direct' interface  
Gerhard Stenzel 已提交
5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311 5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321 5322 5323 5324 
    <dl>
      <dt><code>managerid</code></dt>
      <dd>The VSI Manager ID identifies the database containing the VSI type
        and instance definitions. This is an integer value and the
        value 0 is reserved.</dd>
      <dt><code>typeid</code></dt>
      <dd>The VSI Type ID identifies a VSI type characterizing the network
        access. VSI types are typically managed by network administrator.
        This is an integer value.
      </dd>
      <dt><code>typeidversion</code></dt>
      <dd>The VSI Type Version allows multiple versions of a VSI Type.
        This is an integer value.
      </dd>
      <dt><code>instanceid</code></dt>
      <dd>The VSI Instance ID Identifier is generated when a VSI instance
        (i.e. a virtual interface of a virtual machine) is created.
        This is a globally unique identifier.
      </dd>
    </dl>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5325 5326 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
G
documenting the 802.1Qbg parameters of a 'direct' interface  
Gerhard Stenzel 已提交
5327 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 
  &lt;interface type='direct'&gt;
    &lt;source dev='eth0.2' mode='vepa'/&gt;
    &lt;virtualport type="802.1Qbg"&gt;
      &lt;parameters managerid="11" typeid="1193047" typeidversion="2" instanceid="09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f"/&gt;
    &lt;/virtualport&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
S
Add descriptions for macvtap direct type interfaces  
Stefan Berger 已提交
5336
D
documenting the 802.1Qbh parameters of a 'direct' interface  
David S. Wang 已提交
5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 
    <p>
      The interface can have additional parameters as shown below
      if the switch is conforming to the IEEE 802.1Qbh standard.
      The values are network specific and should be provided by the
      network administrator. <span class="since">Since 0.8.2</span>
    </p>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>profileid</code></dt>
      <dd>The profile ID contains the name of the port profile that is to
E
docs: fix usage of 'onto'  
Eric Blake 已提交
5346 
        be applied to this interface.  This name is resolved by the port
D
documenting the 802.1Qbh parameters of a 'direct' interface  
David S. Wang 已提交
5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 
        profile database into the network parameters from the port profile,
        and those network parameters will be applied to this interface.
      </dd>
    </dl>
  <pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5352 5353 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
D
documenting the 802.1Qbh parameters of a 'direct' interface  
David S. Wang 已提交
5354 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5355 5356 5357 5358 5359 5360 5361 5362 5363 
  &lt;interface type='direct'&gt;
    &lt;source dev='eth0' mode='private'/&gt;
    &lt;virtualport type='802.1Qbh'&gt;
      &lt;parameters profileid='finance'/&gt;
    &lt;/virtualport&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
</pre>
D
documenting the 802.1Qbh parameters of a 'direct' interface  
David S. Wang 已提交
5364
L
conf: parse/format type='hostdev' network interfaces  
Laine Stump 已提交
5365
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5366 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSHostdev">PCI Passthrough</a></h5>
L
conf: parse/format type='hostdev' network interfaces  
Laine Stump 已提交
5367 5368 5369 5370 5371 5372 

    <p>
      A PCI network device (specified by the &lt;source&gt; element)
      is directly assigned to the guest using generic device
      passthrough, after first optionally setting the device's MAC
      address to the configured value, and associating the device with
L
docs: small typo in formatdomain.html  
Laine Stump 已提交
5373 
      an 802.1Qbh capable switch using an optionally specified
L
docs: minor fixes to domain interface documentation  
Laine Stump 已提交
5374 
      &lt;virtualport&gt; element (see the examples of virtualport
L
conf: parse/format type='hostdev' network interfaces  
Laine Stump 已提交
5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 
      given above for type='direct' network devices). Note that - due
      to limitations in standard single-port PCI ethernet card driver
      design - only SR-IOV (Single Root I/O Virtualization) virtual
      function (VF) devices can be assigned in this manner; to assign
      a standard single-port PCI or PCIe ethernet card to a guest, use
      the traditional &lt;hostdev&gt; device definition and
      <span class="since">Since 0.9.11</span>
    </p>
L
conf: formatter/parser/RNG/docs for hostdev <driver name='kvm|vfio'/>  
Laine Stump 已提交
5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 
    <p>
      To use VFIO device assignment rather than traditional/legacy KVM
      device assignment (VFIO is a new method of device assignment
      that is compatible with UEFI Secure Boot), a type='hostdev'
      interface can have an optional <code>driver</code> sub-element
      with a <code>name</code> attribute set to "vfio". To use legacy
      KVM device assignment you can set <code>name</code> to "kvm" (or
      simply omit the <code>&lt;driver&gt;</code> element, since "kvm"
      is currently the default).
      <span class="since">Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only, requires kernel 3.6 or newer)</span>
    </p>
L
conf: parse/format type='hostdev' network interfaces  
Laine Stump 已提交
5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 
    <p>
      Note that this "intelligent passthrough" of network devices is
      very similar to the functionality of a standard &lt;hostdev&gt;
      device, the difference being that this method allows specifying
      a MAC address and &lt;virtualport&gt; for the passed-through
      device. If these capabilities are not required, if you have a
      standard single-port PCI, PCIe, or USB network card that doesn't
      support SR-IOV (and hence would anyway lose the configured MAC
      address during reset after being assigned to the guest domain),
      or if you are using a version of libvirt older than 0.9.11, you
      should use standard &lt;hostdev&gt; to assign the device to the
      guest instead of &lt;interface type='hostdev'/&gt;.
    </p>
C
update documentation of <interface type='hostdev'>  
Chunyan Liu 已提交
5410 5411 5412 5413 5414 5415 
    <p>
      Similar to the functionality of a standard &lt;hostdev&gt; device,
      when <code>managed</code> is "yes", it is detached from the host
      before being passed on to the guest, and reattached to the host
      after the guest exits. If <code>managed</code> is omitted or "no",
      the user is responsible to call <code>virNodeDeviceDettach</code>
J
hostdev: Add iSCSI hostdev XML  
John Ferlan 已提交
5416 
      (or <code>virsh nodedev-detach</code>) before starting the guest
C
update documentation of <interface type='hostdev'>  
Chunyan Liu 已提交
5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 
      or hot-plugging the device, and <code>virNodeDeviceReAttach</code>
      (or <code>virsh nodedev-reattach</code>) after hot-unplug or
      stopping the guest.
    </p>
L
conf: parse/format type='hostdev' network interfaces  
Laine Stump 已提交
5422 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428 5429 5430 5431 5432 5433 5434 5435 5436 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='hostdev' managed='yes'&gt;
    &lt;driver name='vfio'/&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
      &lt;address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x07' function='0x0'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:6d:90:02'/&gt;
    &lt;virtualport type='802.1Qbh'&gt;
      &lt;parameters profileid='finance'/&gt;
    &lt;/virtualport&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
L
conf: parse/format type='hostdev' network interfaces  
Laine Stump 已提交
5437 5438
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5439 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSMulticast">Multicast tunnel</a></h5>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 

    <p>
      A multicast group is setup to represent a virtual network. Any VMs
      whose network devices are in the same multicast group can talk to each
      other even across hosts. This mode is also available to unprivileged
      users. There is no default DNS or DHCP support and no outgoing network
      access. To provide outgoing network access, one of the VMs should have a
      2nd NIC which is connected to one of the first 4 network types and do the
      appropriate routing. The multicast protocol is compatible with that used
      by user mode linux guests too. The source address used must be from the
      multicast address block.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5453 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5454 5455 5456 5457 5458 5459 5460 5461 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='mcast'&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:6d:90:01'/&gt;
    &lt;source address='230.0.0.1' port='5558'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5462
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5463 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSTCP">TCP tunnel</a></h5>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5464 5465 5466 5467 5468 5469 5470 5471 5472 5473 

    <p>
      A TCP client/server architecture provides a virtual network. One VM
      provides the server end of the network, all other VMS are configured as
      clients. All network traffic is routed between the VMs via the server.
      This mode is also available to unprivileged users. There is no default
      DNS or DHCP support and no outgoing network access. To provide outgoing
      network access, one of the VMs should have a 2nd NIC which is connected
      to one of the first 4 network types and do the appropriate routing.</p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5474 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5475 5476 5477 5478 5479 5480 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='server'&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:22:c9:42'/&gt;
    &lt;source address='192.168.0.1' port='5558'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5481 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5482 5483 5484 5485 5486 5487 
  &lt;interface type='client'&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:8b:c9:51'/&gt;
    &lt;source address='192.168.0.1' port='5558'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
J
qemu: add udp interface support  
Jonathan Toppins 已提交
5488
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5489 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSUDP">UDP unicast tunnel</a></h5>
J
qemu: add udp interface support  
Jonathan Toppins 已提交
5490 5491 5492 5493 5494 5495 5496 5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 

    <p>
    A UDP unicast architecture provides a virtual network which enables
    connections between QEMU instances using QEMU's UDP infrastructure.

    The xml "source" address is the endpoint address to which the UDP socket
    packets will be sent from the host running QEMU.
    The xml "local" address is the address of the interface from which the
    UDP socket packets will originate from the QEMU host.
    <span class="since">Since 1.2.20</span></p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5502 5503 5504 5505 5506 5507 5508 5509 5510 5511 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='udp'&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:22:c9:42'/&gt;
    &lt;source address='127.0.0.1' port='11115'&gt;
      &lt;local address='127.0.0.1' port='11116'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5512
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5513 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSModel">Setting the NIC model</a></h5>
R
Documentation for NIC model selection.  
Richard W.M. Jones 已提交
5514
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5515 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5516 5517 5518 5519 5520 5521 5522 5523 5524 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet1'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;model type='ne2k_pci'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
R
Documentation for NIC model selection.  
Richard W.M. Jones 已提交
5525 5526 5527 5528 5529 5530 5531 5532 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 5540 5541 5542 5543 5544 5545 5546 

    <p>
      For hypervisors which support this, you can set the model of
      emulated network interface card.
    </p>

    <p>
      The values for <code>type</code> aren't defined specifically by
      libvirt, but by what the underlying hypervisor supports (if
      any).  For QEMU and KVM you can get a list of supported models
      with these commands:
    </p>

<pre>
qemu -net nic,model=? /dev/null
qemu-kvm -net nic,model=? /dev/null
</pre>

    <p>
      Typical values for QEMU and KVM include:
      ne2k_isa i82551 i82557b i82559er ne2k_pci pcnet rtl8139 e1000 virtio
    </p>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5547
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5548 
    <h5><a id="elementsDriverBackendOptions">Setting NIC driver-specific options</a></h5>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5549 5550 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet1'/&gt;
    &lt;model type='virtio'/&gt;
M
Add support for virtio-net.tx_queue_size  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5557 
    <b>&lt;driver name='vhost' txmode='iothread' ioeventfd='on' event_idx='off' queues='5' rx_queue_size='256' tx_queue_size='256'&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 
      &lt;host csum='off' gso='off' tso4='off' tso6='off' ecn='off' ufo='off' mrg_rxbuf='off'/&gt;
      &lt;guest csum='off' tso4='off' tso6='off' ecn='off' ufo='off'/&gt;
    &lt;/driver&gt;
    </b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5565 5566 5567 5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 

    <p>
      Some NICs may have tunable driver-specific options. These are
      set as attributes of the <code>driver</code> sub-element of the
      interface definition. Currently the following attributes are
      available for the <code>"virtio"</code> NIC driver:
    </p>

    <dl>
E
docs: document <driver name='vhost'/> for interfaces  
Eric Blake 已提交
5574 5575 5576 5577 5578 5579 5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585 
      <dt><code>name</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>name</code> attribute forces which type of
        backend driver to use. The value can be either 'qemu' (a
        user-space backend) or 'vhost' (a kernel backend, which
        requires the vhost module to be provided by the kernel); an
        attempt to require the vhost driver without kernel support
        will be rejected.  If this attribute is not present, then the
        domain defaults to 'vhost' if present, but silently falls back
        to 'qemu' without error.
        <span class="since">Since 0.8.8 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
      </dd>
L
conf: formatter/parser/RNG/docs for hostdev <driver name='kvm|vfio'/>  
Laine Stump 已提交
5586 5587 5588 5589 5590 5591 5592 5593 5594 5595 5596 5597 
      <dd>
        For interfaces of type='hostdev' (PCI passthrough devices)
        the <code>name</code> attribute can optionally be set to
        "vfio" or "kvm". "vfio" tells libvirt to use VFIO device
        assignment rather than traditional KVM device assignment (VFIO
        is a new method of device assignment that is compatible with
        UEFI Secure Boot), and "kvm" tells libvirt to use the legacy
        device assignment performed directly by the kvm kernel module
        (the default is currently "kvm", but is subject to change).
        <span class="since">Since 1.0.5 (QEMU and KVM only, requires
        kernel 3.6 or newer)</span>
      </dd>
M
docs: Clarify that attribute name is not used for vhostuser  
Maxime Leroy 已提交
5598 5599 5600 5601 5602 
      <dd>
        For interfaces of type='vhostuser', the <code>name</code>
        attribute is ignored. The backend driver used is always
        vhost-user.
      </dd>
L
conf: formatter/parser/RNG/docs for hostdev <driver name='kvm|vfio'/>  
Laine Stump 已提交
5603
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5604 5605 5606 5607 5608 
      <dt><code>txmode</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The <code>txmode</code> attribute specifies how to handle
        transmission of packets when the transmit buffer is full. The
        value can be either 'iothread' or 'timer'.
E
docs: correct invalid xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
5609 
        <span class="since">Since 0.8.8 (QEMU and KVM only)</span><br/><br/>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5610 5611 5612 5613 

        If set to 'iothread', packet tx is all done in an iothread in
        the bottom half of the driver (this option translates into
        adding "tx=bh" to the qemu commandline -device virtio-net-pci
E
docs: correct invalid xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
5614 
        option).<br/><br/>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5615 5616 5617 5618 

        If set to 'timer', tx work is done in qemu, and if there is
        more tx data than can be sent at the present time, a timer is
        set before qemu moves on to do other things; when the timer
E
docs: correct invalid xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
5619 
        fires, another attempt is made to send more data.<br/><br/>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5620 5621 5622 5623 5624 

        The resulting difference, according to the qemu developer who
        added the option is: "bh makes tx more asynchronous and reduces
        latency, but potentially causes more processor bandwidth
        contention since the cpu doing the tx isn't necessarily the
E
docs: correct invalid xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
5625 
        cpu where the guest generated the packets."<br/><br/>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5626
M
qemu: domain I/O asynchronous handling  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 5638 5639 5640 5641 5642 
        <b>In general you should leave this option alone, unless you
        are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>ioeventfd</code></dt>
      <dd>
        This optional attribute allows users to set
        <a href='https://patchwork.kernel.org/patch/43390/'>
        domain I/O asynchronous handling</a> for interface device.
        The default is left to the discretion of the hypervisor.
        Accepted values are "on" and "off". Enabling this allows
        qemu to execute VM while a separate thread handles I/O.
        Typically guests experiencing high system CPU utilization
        during I/O will benefit from this. On the other hand,
        on overloaded host it could increase guest I/O latency.
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.3 (QEMU and KVM only)</span><br/><br/>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5643 
        <b>In general you should leave this option alone, unless you
L
qemu: support event_idx parameter for virtio disk and net devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
5644 5645 5646 5647 5648 5649 
        are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>event_idx</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The <code>event_idx</code> attribute controls some aspects of
        device event processing. The value can be either 'on' or 'off'
Y
Fix some typos in messages, docs and comments.  
Yuri Chornoivan 已提交
5650 
        - if it is on, it will reduce the number of interrupts and
L
qemu: support event_idx parameter for virtio disk and net devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 5657 
        exits for the guest. The default is determined by QEMU;
        usually if the feature is supported, default is on. In case
        there is a situation where this behavior is suboptimal, this
        attribute provides a way to force the feature off.
        <span class="since">Since 0.9.5 (QEMU and KVM only)</span><br/><br/>

        <b>In general you should leave this option alone, unless you
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5658 5659 
        are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
      </dd>
M
Introduce /domain/devices/interface/driver/@queues attribute  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5660 5661 
      <dt><code>queues</code></dt>
      <dd>
M
qemu: add multiqueue vhost-user support  
Maxime Leroy 已提交
5662 5663 
        The optional <code>queues</code> attribute controls the number
        of queues to be used for either
D
Use https:// links for most sites  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5664 
        <a href="https://www.linux-kvm.org/page/Multiqueue"> Multiqueue
M
qemu: add multiqueue vhost-user support  
Maxime Leroy 已提交
5665 5666 5667 5668 
        virtio-net</a> or <a href="#elementVhostuser">vhost-user</a> network
        interfaces.  Use of multiple packet processing queues requires the
        interface having the <code>&lt;model type='virtio'/&gt;</code>
        element.  Each queue will potentially be handled by a different
M
Introduce /domain/devices/interface/driver/@queues attribute  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5669 
        processor, resulting in much higher throughput.
M
qemu: add multiqueue vhost-user support  
Maxime Leroy 已提交
5670 
        <span class="since">virtio-net since 1.0.6 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
M
Revert "Change livbirt version to 1.3.0 for the next release"  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
5671 
        <span class="since">vhost-user since 1.2.17 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>
M
Introduce /domain/devices/interface/driver/@queues attribute  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5672 
      </dd>
M
conf: Add support for virtio-net.rx_queue_size  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5673 5674 5675 5676 5677 5678 5679 5680 5681 
      <dt><code>rx_queue_size</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>rx_queue_size</code> attribute controls
        the size of virtio ring for each queue as described above.
        The default value is hypervisor dependent and may change
        across its releases. Moreover, some hypervisors may pose
        some restrictions on actual value. For instance, latest
        QEMU (as of 2016-09-01) requires value to be a power of two
        from [256, 1024] range.
D
Revert "qemu: Expose rx/tx_queue_size in qemu.conf too"  
Daniel P. Berrangé 已提交
5682 
        <span class="since">Since 2.3.0 (QEMU and KVM only)</span><br/><br/>
M
conf: Add support for virtio-net.rx_queue_size  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5683 5684 5685 5686 

        <b>In general you should leave this option alone, unless you
        are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
      </dd>
M
Add support for virtio-net.tx_queue_size  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692 5693 
      <dt><code>tx_queue_size</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>tx_queue_size</code> attribute controls
        the size of virtio ring for each queue as described above.
        The default value is hypervisor dependent and may change
        across its releases. Moreover, some hypervisors may pose
        some restrictions on actual value. For instance, QEMU
M
docs: Document yet another limitation of tx_queue_size  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5694 5695 5696 5697 
        v2.9  requires value to be a power of two from [256, 1024]
        range. In addition to that, this may work only for a subset of
        interface types, e.g. aforementioned QEMU enables this option
        only for <code>vhostuser</code> type.
D
Revert "qemu: Expose rx/tx_queue_size in qemu.conf too"  
Daniel P. Berrangé 已提交
5698 
        <span class="since">Since 3.7.0 (QEMU and KVM only)</span><br/><br/>
M
Add support for virtio-net.tx_queue_size  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5699 5700 5701 5702 

        <b>In general you should leave this option alone, unless you
        are very certain you know what you are doing.</b>
      </dd>
J
Add virtio-related options to interfaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5703 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 
      <dt>virtio options</dt>
      <dd>
        For virtio interfaces,
        <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
        set. (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
5709 5710 5711 5712 5713 5714 5715 
    </dl>
    <p>
      Offloading options for the host and guest can be configured using
      the following sub-elements:
    </p>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>host</code></dt>
J
conf: add options for disabling segment offloading  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5716 5717 5718 5719 5720 5721 5722 
      <dd>
        The <code>csum</code>, <code>gso</code>, <code>tso4</code>,
        <code>tso6</code>, <code>ecn</code> and <code>ufo</code>
        attributes with possible values <code>on</code>
        and <code>off</code> can be used to turn off host offloading options.
        By default, the supported offloads are enabled by QEMU.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.9 (QEMU only)</span>
J
Add mrg_rxbuf option to virtio interfaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5723 5724 5725 5726 
        The <code>mrg_rxbuf</code> attribute can be used to control
        mergeable rx buffers on the host side. Possible values are
        <code>on</code> (default) and <code>off</code>.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.13 (QEMU only)</span>
J
conf: add options for disabling segment offloading  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5727 
      </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
5728 
      <dt><code>guest</code></dt>
J
conf: add options for disabling segment offloading  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5729 5730 5731 5732 5733 5734 5735 5736 
      <dd>
        The <code>csum</code>, <code>tso4</code>,
        <code>tso6</code>, <code>ecn</code> and <code>ufo</code>
        attributes with possible values <code>on</code>
        and <code>off</code> can be used to turn off guest offloading options.
        By default, the supported offloads are enabled by QEMU.
        <span class="since">Since 1.2.9 (QEMU only)</span>
      </dd>
L
Add txmode attribute to interface XML for virtio backend  
Laine Stump 已提交
5737 5738 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5739 
    <h5><a id="elementsBackendOptions">Setting network backend-specific options</a></h5>
J
conf: add backend element to interfaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5740 5741 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet1'/&gt;
    &lt;model type='virtio'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;backend tap='/dev/net/tun' vhost='/dev/vhost-net'/&gt;</b>
    &lt;driver name='vhost' txmode='iothread' ioeventfd='on' event_idx='off' queues='5'/&gt;
M
docs: Document <sndbuf/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5750 5751 5752 
    <b>&lt;tune&gt;
      &lt;sndbuf&gt;1600&lt;/sndbuf&gt;
    &lt;/tune&gt;</b>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5753 5754 5755 
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
J
conf: add backend element to interfaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5756 5757 5758 

    <p>
      For tuning the backend of the network, the <code>backend</code> element
J
Only parse custom vhost path for virtio interfaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5759 5760 
      can be used. The <code>vhost</code> attribute can override the default vhost
      device path (<code>/dev/vhost-net</code>) for devices with <code>virtio</code> model.
J
Error out when custom tap device path makes no sense  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5761 5762 
      The <code>tap</code> attribute overrides the tun/tap device path (default:
      <code>/dev/net/tun</code>) for network and bridge interfaces. This does not work
M
docs: Document <sndbuf/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 
      in session mode. <span class="since">Since 1.2.9</span>
    </p>
    <p>
      For tap devices there is also <code>sndbuf</code> element which can
      adjust the size of send buffer in the host. <span class="since">Since
      0.8.8</span>
J
conf: add backend element to interfaces  
Ján Tomko 已提交
5769 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5770 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSTargetOverride">Overriding the target element</a></h5>
C
Document overriding domain interface target  
Cole Robinson 已提交
5771
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
5772 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5773 5774 5775 5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;target dev='vnet1'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
C
Document overriding domain interface target  
Cole Robinson 已提交
5781 5782 

    <p>
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
5783 5784 
      If no target is specified, certain hypervisors will
      automatically generate a name for the created tun device. This
J
docs: Clarify interface/target/@dev docs  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
5785 
      name can be manually specified, however the name <i>should not
L
conf: don't ignore <target dev='blah'/> for macvtap interfaces  
Laine Stump 已提交
5786 5787 5788 
      start with either 'vnet', 'vif', 'macvtap', or 'macvlan'</i>,
      which are prefixes reserved by libvirt and certain hypervisors.
      Manually specified targets using these prefixes may be ignored.
C
Document overriding domain interface target  
Cole Robinson 已提交
5789 5790 
    </p>
C
lxc network configuration allows setting target container NIC name  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 
    <p>
      Note that for LXC containers, this defines the name of the interface
      on the host side. <span class="since">Since 1.2.7</span>, to define
      the name of the device on the guest side, the <code>guest</code>
      element should be used, as in the following snippet:
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 5805 5806 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;guest dev='myeth'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
C
lxc network configuration allows setting target container NIC name  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
5807
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5808 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSBoot">Specifying boot order</a></h5>
J
Introduce per-device boot element  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
5809 5810 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5811 5812 5813 5814 5815 5816 5817 5818 5819 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet1'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;boot order='1'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
J
Introduce per-device boot element  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
5820 5821 

    <p>
L
docs: fix a few small typos in formatdomain.html.in  
Laine Stump 已提交
5822 
      For hypervisors which support this, you can set a specific NIC to
J
Introduce per-device boot element  
Jiri Denemark 已提交
5823 5824 5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 
      be used for network boot. The <code>order</code> attribute determines
      the order in which devices will be tried during boot sequence. The
      per-device <code>boot</code> elements cannot be used together with
      general boot elements in
      <a href="#elementsOSBIOS">BIOS bootloader</a> section.
      <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span>
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5831 
    <h5><a id="elementsNICSROM">Interface ROM BIOS configuration</a></h5>
L
qemu: (and conf) support rombar for network devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
5832 5833 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839 5840 5841 5842 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet1'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;rom bar='on' file='/etc/fake/boot.bin'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
L
qemu: (and conf) support rombar for network devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 5851 5852 

    <p>
      For hypervisors which support this, you can change how a PCI Network
      device's ROM is presented to the guest. The <code>bar</code>
      attribute can be set to "on" or "off", and determines whether
      or not the device's ROM will be visible in the guest's memory
      map. (In PCI documentation, the "rombar" setting controls the
      presence of the Base Address Register for the ROM). If no rom
      bar is specified, the qemu default will be used (older
      versions of qemu used a default of "off", while newer qemus
L
qemu: add "romfile" support to specify device boot ROM  
Laine Stump 已提交
5853 5854 5855 5856 5857 5858 
      have a default of "on").
      The optional <code>file</code> attribute is used to point to a
      binary file to be presented to the guest as the device's ROM
      BIOS. This can be useful to provide an alternative boot ROM for a
      network device.
      <span class="since">Since 0.9.10 (QEMU and KVM only)</span>.
L
qemu: (and conf) support rombar for network devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
5859 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5860 
    <h5><a id="elementDomain">Setting up a network backend in a driver domain</a></h5>
M
conf: support backend domain name in disk and network devices  
Marek Marczykowski 已提交
5861 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5862 5863 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
M
conf: support backend domain name in disk and network devices  
Marek Marczykowski 已提交
5864 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5865 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    &lt;source bridge='br0'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;backenddomain name='netvm'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  ...
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
conf: support backend domain name in disk and network devices  
Marek Marczykowski 已提交
5872 5873 5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 

    <p>
      The optional <code>backenddomain</code> element allows specifying a
      backend domain (aka driver domain) for the interface. Use the
      <code>name</code> attribute to specify the backend domain name. You
      can use it to create a direct network link between domains (so data
      will not go through host system). Use with type 'ethernet' to create
      plain network link, or with type 'bridge' to connect to a bridge inside
      the backend domain.
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.13 (Xen only)</span>
    </p>
L
qemu: (and conf) support rombar for network devices  
Laine Stump 已提交
5883
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5884 
    <h5><a id="elementQoS">Quality of service</a></h5>
M
bandwidth: Define schema and create documentation  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5885 5886 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5887 5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet0'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;bandwidth&gt;
      &lt;inbound average='1000' peak='5000' floor='200' burst='1024'/&gt;
      &lt;outbound average='128' peak='256' burst='256'/&gt;
    &lt;/bandwidth&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
bandwidth: Define schema and create documentation  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5899 5900 5901 

    <p>
      This part of interface XML provides setting quality of service. Incoming
J
bandwidth: Adjust documentation  
John Ferlan 已提交
5902 5903 5904 5905 
      and outgoing traffic can be shaped independently.
      The <code>bandwidth</code> element and its child elements are described
      in the <a href="formatnetwork.html#elementQoS">QoS</a> section of
      the Network XML.
M
bandwidth: Define schema and create documentation  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5906 5907 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5908 
    <h5><a id="elementVlanTag">Setting VLAN tag (on supported network types only)</a></h5>
L
conf: add <vlan> element to network and domain interface elements  
Laine Stump 已提交
5909 5910 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 5918 5919 5920 5921 5922 5923 5924 5925 5926 5927 5928 5929 5930 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    <b>&lt;vlan&gt;</b>
      <b>&lt;tag id='42'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;/vlan&gt;</b>
    &lt;source bridge='ovsbr0'/&gt;
    &lt;virtualport type='openvswitch'&gt;
      &lt;parameters interfaceid='09b11c53-8b5c-4eeb-8f00-d84eaa0aaa4f'/&gt;
    &lt;/virtualport&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;
    <b>&lt;vlan trunk='yes'&gt;</b>
      <b>&lt;tag id='42'/&gt;</b>
      <b>&lt;tag id='123' nativeMode='untagged'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;/vlan&gt;</b>
    ...
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
L
conf: add <vlan> element to network and domain interface elements  
Laine Stump 已提交
5931 5932 5933 

    <p>
      If (and only if) the network connection used by the guest
L
util: set vlan tag for macvtap passthrough mode on SRIOV VFs  
Laine Stump 已提交
5934 
      supports VLAN tagging transparent to the guest, an
L
conf: add <vlan> element to network and domain interface elements  
Laine Stump 已提交
5935 
      optional <code>&lt;vlan&gt;</code> element can specify one or
L
util: set vlan tag for macvtap passthrough mode on SRIOV VFs  
Laine Stump 已提交
5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944 
      more VLAN tags to apply to the guest's network
      traffic <span class="since">Since 0.10.0</span>. Network
      connections that support guest-transparent VLAN tagging include
      1) type='bridge' interfaces connected to an Open vSwitch bridge
      <span class="since">Since 0.10.0</span>, 2) SRIOV Virtual
      Functions (VF) used via type='hostdev' (direct device
      assignment) <span class="since">Since 0.10.0</span>, and 3)
      SRIOV VFs used via type='direct' with mode='passthrough'
      (macvtap "passthru" mode) <span class="since">Since
L
docs: fix version number in vlan tagging documentation  
Laine Stump 已提交
5945 
      1.3.5</span>. All other connection types, including standard
L
conf: add <vlan> element to network and domain interface elements  
Laine Stump 已提交
5946 5947 5948 
      linux bridges and libvirt's own virtual networks, <b>do not</b>
      support it. 802.1Qbh (vn-link) and 802.1Qbg (VEPA) switches
      provide their own way (outside of libvirt) to tag guest traffic
L
util: set vlan tag for macvtap passthrough mode on SRIOV VFs  
Laine Stump 已提交
5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 
      onto a specific VLAN. Each tag is given in a
      separate <code>&lt;tag&gt;</code> subelement
      of <code>&lt;vlan&gt;</code> (for example: <code>&lt;tag
      id='42'/&gt;</code>). For VLAN trunking of multiple tags (which
      is supported only on Open vSwitch connections),
      multiple <code>&lt;tag&gt;</code> subelements can be specified,
      which implies that the user wants to do VLAN trunking on the
      interface for all the specified tags. In the case that VLAN
      trunking of a single tag is desired, the optional
L
conf: add <vlan> element to network and domain interface elements  
Laine Stump 已提交
5958 
      attribute <code>trunk='yes'</code> can be added to the toplevel
L
util: set vlan tag for macvtap passthrough mode on SRIOV VFs  
Laine Stump 已提交
5959 5960 
      <code>&lt;vlan&gt;</code> element to differentiate trunking of a
      single tag from normal tagging.
L
conf: add <vlan> element to network and domain interface elements  
Laine Stump 已提交
5961 
    </p>
J
Configure native vlan modes on Open vSwitch ports  
james robson 已提交
5962 
    <p>
L
util: set vlan tag for macvtap passthrough mode on SRIOV VFs  
Laine Stump 已提交
5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 
      For network connections using Open vSwitch it is also possible
      to configure 'native-tagged' and 'native-untagged' VLAN modes
      <span class="since">Since 1.1.0.</span> This is done with the
      optional <code>nativeMode</code> attribute on
      the <code>&lt;tag&gt;</code> subelement: <code>nativeMode</code>
      may be set to 'tagged' or 'untagged'. The <code>id</code>
      attribute of the <code>&lt;tag&gt;</code> subelement
      containing <code>nativeMode</code> sets which VLAN is considered
      to be the "native" VLAN for this interface, and
      the <code>nativeMode</code> attribute determines whether or not
      traffic for that VLAN will be tagged.
J
Configure native vlan modes on Open vSwitch ports  
james robson 已提交
5974 5975 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5976 
    <h5><a id="elementLink">Modifying virtual link state</a></h5>
P
link-state: conf: Add element to XML for controling link state  
Peter Krempa 已提交
5977 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5978 5979 5980 5981 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet0'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;link state='down'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
P
link-state: conf: Add element to XML for controling link state  
Peter Krempa 已提交
5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 

    <p>
      This element provides means of setting state of the virtual network link.
      Possible values for attribute <code>state</code> are <code>up</code> and
      <code>down</code>. If <code>down</code> is specified as the value, the interface
      behaves as if it had the network cable disconnected. Default behavior if this
      element is unspecified is to have the link state <code>up</code>.
      <span class="since">Since 0.9.5</span>
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
5997 
    <h5><a id="mtu">MTU configuration</a></h5>
M
domain_conf: Introduce <mtu/> to <interface/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 
<pre>
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet0'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;mtu size='1500'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>

    <p>
      This element provides means of setting MTU of the virtual network link.
      Currently there is just one attribute <code>size</code> which accepts a
      non-negative integer which specifies the MTU size for the interface.
      <span class="since">Since 3.1.0</span>
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6016 
    <h5><a id="coalesce">Coalesce settings</a></h5>
M
conf, docs: Add support for coalesce setting(s)  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
6017 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 
<pre>
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet0'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;coalesce&gt;
      &lt;rx&gt;
        &lt;frames max='7'/&gt;
      &lt;/rx&gt;
    &lt;/coalesce&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>

    <p>
      This element provides means of setting coalesce settings for
      some interface devices (currently only type <code>network</code>
      and <code>bridge</code>.  Currently there is just one attribute,
D
docs: fix typo in closing HTML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6036 
      <code>max</code>, to tweak, in element <code>frames</code> for
M
conf, docs: Add support for coalesce setting(s)  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
6037 6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 
      the <code>rx</code> group, which accepts a non-negative integer
      that specifies the maximum number of packets that will be
      received before an interrupt.
      <span class="since">Since 3.3.0</span>
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6043 
    <h5><a id="ipconfig">IP configuration</a></h5>
C
Domain conf: allow more than one IP address for net devices  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
6044 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053 6054 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='network'&gt;
    &lt;source network='default'/&gt;
    &lt;target dev='vnet0'/&gt;
    <b>&lt;ip address='192.168.122.5' prefix='24'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;ip address='192.168.122.5' prefix='24' peer='10.0.0.10'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.122.1'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.8' gateway='192.168.122.1'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/interface&gt;
C
Domain conf: allow more than one IP address for net devices  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
6055 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064 6065 6066 
  &lt;hostdev mode='capabilities' type='net'&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
      &lt;interface&gt;eth0&lt;/interface&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    <b>&lt;ip address='192.168.122.6' prefix='24'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.122.1'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;route family='ipv4' address='192.168.122.8' gateway='192.168.122.1'/&gt;</b>
  &lt;/hostdev&gt;

&lt;/devices&gt;
...
C
Domain conf: allow more than one IP address for net devices  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
6067 6068 6069 
</pre>

    <p>
V
conf: allow setting peer address in <ip> element of <interface>  
Vasiliy Tolstov 已提交
6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 6083 6084 
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.12</span> network devices and
      hostdev devices with network capabilities can optionally be provided
      one or more IP addresses to set on the network device in the
      guest. Note that some hypervisors or network device types will
      simply ignore them or only use the first one.
      The <code>family</code> attribute can be set to
      either <code>ipv4</code> or <code>ipv6</code>, and the
      <code>address</code> attribute contains the IP address. The
      optional <code>prefix</code> is the number of 1 bits in the
      netmask, and will be automatically set if not specified - for
      IPv4 the default prefix is determined according to the network
      "class" (A, B, or C - see RFC870), and for IPv6 the default
      prefix is 64. The optional <code>peer</code> attribute holds the
      IP address of the other end of a point-to-point network
      device <span class="since">(since 2.1.0)</span>.
C
Domain conf: allow more than one IP address for net devices  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
6085 6086 
    </p>
C
Domain network devices can now have a <route> element  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
6087 
    <p>
V
conf: allow setting peer address in <ip> element of <interface>  
Vasiliy Tolstov 已提交
6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 
    <span class="since">Since 1.2.12</span> route elements can also be
    added to define IP routes to add in the guest.  The attributes of
    this element are described in the documentation for
    the <code>route</code> element
    in <a href="formatnetwork.html#elementsStaticroute">network
    definitions</a>.  This is used by the LXC driver.
C
Domain network devices can now have a <route> element  
Cédric Bosdonnat 已提交
6094 6095 
    </p>
L
conf: support host-side IP/route information in <interface>  
Laine Stump 已提交
6096 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='ethernet'&gt;
    <b>&lt;source/&gt;</b>
      <b>&lt;ip address='192.168.123.1' prefix='24'/&gt;</b>
      <b>&lt;ip address='10.0.0.10' prefix='24' peer='192.168.122.5'/&gt;</b>
      <b>&lt;route family='ipv4' address='192.168.42.0' prefix='24' gateway='192.168.123.4'/&gt;</b>
    <b>&lt;source/&gt;</b>
L
conf: support host-side IP/route information in <interface>  
Laine Stump 已提交
6105 
    ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6106 
  &lt;/interface&gt;
L
conf: support host-side IP/route information in <interface>  
Laine Stump 已提交
6107 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6108 6109 
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
L
conf: support host-side IP/route information in <interface>  
Laine Stump 已提交
6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 
</pre>

    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 2.1.0</span> network devices of type
      "ethernet" can optionally be provided one or more IP addresses
      and one or more routes to set on the <b>host</b> side of the
      network device. These are configured as subelements of
      the <code>&lt;source&gt;</code> element of the interface, and
      have the same attributes as the similarly named elements used to
      configure the guest side of the interface (described above).
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6122 
    <h5><a id="elementVhostuser">vhost-user interface</a></h5>
M
support for QEMU vhost-user  
Michele Paolino 已提交
6123 6124 6125 6126 6127 6128 6129 6130 6131 

    <p>
    <span class="since">Since 1.2.7</span> the vhost-user enables the
    communication between a QEMU virtual machine and other userspace process
    using the Virtio transport protocol.  A char dev (e.g. Unix socket) is used
    for the control plane, while the data plane is based on shared memory.
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 6137 6138 6139 6140 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface type='vhostuser'&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:3b:83:1a'/&gt;
    &lt;source type='unix' path='/tmp/vhost1.sock' mode='server'/&gt;
    &lt;model type='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;interface type='vhostuser'&gt;
    &lt;mac address='52:54:00:3b:83:1b'/&gt;
Z
vhost-user: add support reconnect for vhost-user ports  
ZhiPeng Lu 已提交
6141 6142 6143 
    &lt;source type='unix' path='/tmp/vhost2.sock' mode='client'&gt;
      &lt;reconnect enabled='yes' timeout='10'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 
    &lt;model type='virtio'/&gt;
    &lt;driver queues='5'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
support for QEMU vhost-user  
Michele Paolino 已提交
6149 6150 6151 6152 6153 6154 6155 6156 6157 6158 

    <p>
      The <code>&lt;source&gt;</code> element has to be specified
      along with the type of char device.
      Currently, only type='unix' is supported, where the path (the
      directory path of the socket) and mode attributes are required.
      Both <code>mode='server'</code> and <code>mode='client'</code>
      are supported.
      vhost-user requires the virtio model type, thus the
      <code>&lt;model&gt;</code> element is mandatory.
Z
vhost-user: add support reconnect for vhost-user ports  
ZhiPeng Lu 已提交
6159 6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165 
      <span class="since">Since 4.1.0</span> the element has an
      optional child element <code>reconnect</code> which
      configures reconnect timeout if the connection is lost. It
      has two attributes <code>enabled</code> (which accepts
      <code>yes</code> and <code>no</code>) and
      <code>timeout</code> which specifies the amount of seconds
      after which hypervisor tries to reconnect.
M
support for QEMU vhost-user  
Michele Paolino 已提交
6166 6167 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6168 
    <h5><a id="elementNwfilter">Traffic filtering with NWFilter</a></h5>
C
docs: domain: Document network <filterref>  
Cole Robinson 已提交
6169 6170 6171 6172 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 

    <p>
    <span class="since">Since 0.8.0</span> an <code>nwfilter</code> profile
    can be assigned to a domain interface, which allows configuring
    traffic filter rules for the virtual machine.

    See the <a href="formatnwfilter.html">nwfilter</a> documentation for more
    complete details.
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6180 6181 6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;interface ...&gt;
    ...
    &lt;filterref filter='clean-traffic'/&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
  &lt;interface ...&gt;
    ...
    &lt;filterref filter='myfilter'&gt;
      &lt;parameter name='IP' value='104.207.129.11'/&gt;
      &lt;parameter name='IP6_ADDR' value='2001:19f0:300:2102::'/&gt;
      &lt;parameter name='IP6_MASK' value='64'/&gt;
C
docs: domain: Document network <filterref>  
Cole Robinson 已提交
6192 
      ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6193 6194 6195 6196 
    &lt;/filterref&gt;
  &lt;/interface&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
C
docs: domain: Document network <filterref>  
Cole Robinson 已提交
6197 6198 6199 6200 6201 6202 6203 6204 6205 6206 6207 

    <p>
      The <code>filter</code> attribute specifies the name of the nwfilter
      to use. Optional <code>&lt;parameter&gt;</code> elements may be
      specified for passing additional info to the nwfilter via the
      <code>name</code> and <code>value</code> attributes. See
      the <a href="formatnwfilter.html#nwfconceptsvars">nwfilter</a>
      docs for info on parameters.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6208 
    <h4><a id="elementsInput">Input devices</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6209 6210 

    <p>
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
6211 6212 6213 6214 
      Input devices allow interaction with the graphical framebuffer
      in the guest virtual machine. When enabling the framebuffer, an
      input device is automatically provided. It may be possible to
      add additional devices explicitly, for example,
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6215 6216 6217 
      to provide a graphics tablet for absolute cursor movement.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6218 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 6229 6230 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;input type='mouse' bus='usb'/&gt;
  &lt;input type='keyboard' bus='usb'/&gt;
  &lt;input type='mouse' bus='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;input type='keyboard' bus='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;input type='tablet' bus='virtio'/&gt;
  &lt;input type='passthrough' bus='virtio'&gt;
    &lt;source evdev='/dev/input/event1/&gt;
  &lt;/input&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6231 6232 6233 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>input</code></dt>
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
6234 
      <dd>The <code>input</code> element has one mandatory attribute,
J
conf: add XML for input device passthrough  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6235 6236 6237 
        the <code>type</code> whose value can be 'mouse', 'tablet',
        (<span class="since">since 1.2.2</span>) 'keyboard' or
        (<span class="since">since 1.3.0</span>) 'passthrough'.
J
Document the keyboard as a valid input type  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6238 6239 
        The tablet provides absolute cursor movement,
        while the mouse uses relative movement. The optional
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6240 
        <code>bus</code> attribute can be used to refine the exact device type.
J
conf: parse and format virtio input bus in domain XML  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6241 6242 
        It takes values "xen" (paravirtualized), "ps2" and "usb" or
        (<span class="since">since 1.3.0</span>) "virtio".</dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6243 6244 
    </dl>
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
6245 6246 6247 
    <p>
      The <code>input</code> element has an optional
      sub-element <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> which can tie the
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
6248 6249 
      device to a particular PCI
      slot, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>.
F
qemu: Add support for virtio input ccw devices  
Farhan Ali 已提交
6250 6251 
      On S390, <code>address</code> can be used to provide a CCW address for
      an input device (<span class="since">since 4.2.0</span>).
J
conf: add XML for input device passthrough  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6252 6253 6254 6255 

      For type <code>passthrough</code>, the mandatory sub-element <code>source</code>
      must have an <code>evdev</code> attribute containing the absolute path to the
      event device passed through to guests. (KVM only)
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
6256 
    </p>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6257
J
Add virtio-related options to input devices  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6258 6259 6260 6261 6262 6263 6264 
    <p>
        The subelement <code>driver</code> can be used to tune the virtio
        options of the device:
        <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
        set. (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6265 
    <h4><a id="elementsHub">Hub devices</a></h4>
M
Add USB hub device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6266 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 

    <p>
      A hub is a device that expands a single port into several so
      that there are more ports available to connect devices to a host
      system.
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;hub type='usb'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
Add USB hub device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6279 6280 6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>hub</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>hub</code> element has one mandatory attribute,
        the <code>type</code> whose value can only be 'usb'.</dd>
    </dl>

    <p>
      The <code>hub</code> element has an optional
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
6288 6289 6290 6291 
      sub-element <code>&lt;address&gt;</code>
      with <code>type='usb'</code>which can tie the device to a
      particular controller, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented
      above</a>.
M
Add USB hub device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6292 6293 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6294 
    <h4><a id="elementsGraphics">Graphical framebuffers</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6295 6296 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 

    <p>
      A graphics device allows for graphical interaction with the
      guest OS. A guest will typically have either a framebuffer
      or a text console configured to allow interaction with the
      admin.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6303 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6304 6305 6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;graphics type='sdl' display=':0.0'/&gt;
  &lt;graphics type='vnc' port='5904' sharePolicy='allow-exclusive'&gt;
    &lt;listen type='address' address='1.2.3.4'/&gt;
  &lt;/graphics&gt;
  &lt;graphics type='rdp' autoport='yes' multiUser='yes' /&gt;
  &lt;graphics type='desktop' fullscreen='yes'/&gt;
  &lt;graphics type='spice'&gt;
    &lt;listen type='network' network='rednet'/&gt;
  &lt;/graphics&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6317 6318 6319 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>graphics</code></dt>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 6325 
      <dd>
        <p>
          The <code>graphics</code> element has a mandatory <code>type</code>
          attribute which takes the value <code>sdl</code>, <code>vnc</code>,
          <code>spice</code>, <code>rdp</code> or <code>desktop</code>:
        </p>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6326 
        <dl>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6327 
          <dt><code>sdl</code></dt>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6328 
          <dd>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 6334 6335 
            <p>
              This displays a window on the host desktop, it can take 3 optional
              arguments: a <code>display</code> attribute for the display to use,
              an <code>xauth</code> attribute for the authentication identifier,
              and an optional <code>fullscreen</code> attribute accepting values
              <code>yes</code> or <code>no</code>.
            </p>
M
conf: Add gl property to graphics of type sdl in domain config  
Maciej Wolny 已提交
6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 

            <p>
              You can use a <code>gl</code> with the <code>enable="yes"</code>
              property to enable OpenGL support in SDL. Likewise you can
              explicitly disable OpenGL support with <code>enable="no"</code>.
            </p>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6342 
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6343 
          <dt><code>vnc</code></dt>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6344 
          <dd>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6345 6346 6347 6348 6349 
            <p>
              Starts a VNC server. The <code>port</code> attribute specifies
              the TCP port number (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it
              should be auto-allocated). The <code>autoport</code> attribute is
              the new preferred syntax for indicating auto-allocation of the TCP
P
graphics: make address attribute for listen type='address' optional  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6350 
              port to use. The <code>passwd</code> attribute provides a VNC
P
doc: improve VNC/SPICE password documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6351 6352 6353 6354 
              password in clear text. If the <code>passwd</code> attribute is
              set to an empty string, then VNC access is disabled. The
              <code>keymap</code> attribute specifies the keymap to use. It is
              possible to set a limit on the validity of the password by giving
V
docs: Grammar and spelling fixes  
Ville Skyttä 已提交
6355 
              a timestamp <code>passwdValidTo='2010-04-09T15:51:00'</code>
P
doc: improve VNC/SPICE password documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6356 6357 
              assumed to be in UTC. The <code>connected</code> attribute allows
              control of connected client during password changes. VNC accepts
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 
              <code>keep</code> value only <span class="since">since 0.9.3</span>.
              NB, this may not be supported by all hypervisors.
            </p>
            <p>
              The optional <code>sharePolicy</code> attribute specifies vnc
              server display sharing policy. <code>allow-exclusive</code> allows
              clients to ask for exclusive access by dropping other connections.
              Connecting multiple clients in parallel requires all clients asking
              for a shared session (vncviewer: -Shared switch). This is
              the default value. <code>force-shared</code> disables exclusive
              client access, every connection has to specify -Shared switch for
              vncviewer. <code>ignore</code> welcomes every connection
              unconditionally <span class="since">since 1.0.6</span>.
            </p>
            <p>
              Rather than using listen/port, QEMU supports a <code>socket</code>
              attribute for listening on a unix domain socket path
              <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span>.
            </p>
            <p>
              For VNC WebSocket functionality, <code>websocket</code> attribute
              may be used to specify port to listen on (with -1 meaning
              auto-allocation and <code>autoport</code> having no effect due to
              security reasons) <span class="since">Since 1.0.6</span>.
            </p>
D
Add a <graphics> type for SPICE protocol  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6383 
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6384 
          <dt><code>spice</code> <span class="since">Since 0.8.6</span></dt>
D
Add a <graphics> type for SPICE protocol  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6385 
          <dd>
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
6386 
            <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6387 6388 6389 6390 6391 
              Starts a SPICE server. The <code>port</code> attribute specifies
              the TCP port number (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it
              should be auto-allocated), while <code>tlsPort</code> gives
              an alternative secure port number. The <code>autoport</code>
              attribute is the new preferred syntax for indicating
P
graphics: make address attribute for listen type='address' optional  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6392 
              auto-allocation of needed port numbers. The <code>passwd</code>
P
doc: improve VNC/SPICE password documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6393 6394 6395 6396 
              attribute provides a SPICE password in clear text. If the
              <code>passwd</code> attribute is set to an empty string, then
              SPICE access is disabled. The <code>keymap</code> attribute
              specifies the keymap to use. It is possible to set a limit on
V
docs: Grammar and spelling fixes  
Ville Skyttä 已提交
6397 
              the validity of the password by giving a timestamp
P
doc: improve VNC/SPICE password documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6398 6399 
              <code>passwdValidTo='2010-04-09T15:51:00'</code> assumed to be
              in UTC.
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 
            </p>
            <p>
              The <code>connected</code> attribute allows control of connected
              client during password changes. SPICE accepts <code>keep</code> to
              keep client connected, <code>disconnect</code> to disconnect client
              and <code>fail</code> to fail changing password . NB, this may not
              be supported by all hypervisors.
M
graphics: add support for action_if_connected in qemu  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6407 
              <span class="since">Since 0.9.3</span>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6408 6409 
            </p>
            <p>
A
domain_conf: add "default" to list of valid spice channels  
Alon Levy 已提交
6410 6411 
              The <code>defaultMode</code> attribute sets the default channel
              security policy, valid values are <code>secure</code>,
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6412 6413 6414 6415 
              <code>insecure</code> and the default <code>any</code> (which is
              secure if possible, but falls back to insecure rather than erroring
              out if no secure path is available).
              <span class="since">Since 0.9.12</span>
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
6416 6417 
            </p>
            <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 
              When SPICE has both a normal and TLS secured TCP port configured,
              it can be desirable to restrict what channels can be run on each
              port. This is achieved by adding one or more <code>&lt;channel&gt;
              </code> elements inside the main <code>&lt;graphics&gt;</code>
              element and setting the <code>mode</code> attribute to either
              <code>secure</code> or <code>insecure</code>. Setting the mode
              attribute overrides the default value as set by
              the <code>defaultMode</code> attribute. (Note that specifying
P
doc: Explicitly specify how to override spice channel mode  
Peter Krempa 已提交
6426 
              <code>any</code> as mode discards the entry as the channel would
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6427 6428 6429 
              inherit the default mode anyways.) Valid channel names include
              <code>main</code>, <code>display</code>, <code>inputs</code>,
              <code>cursor</code>, <code>playback</code>, <code>record</code>
A
domain_conf: add "usbredir" to list of valid spice channels  
Alon Levy 已提交
6430 
              (all <span class="since"> since 0.8.6</span>);
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6431 6432 
              <code>smartcard</code> (<span class="since">since 0.8.8</span>);
              and <code>usbredir</code> (<span class="since">since 0.9.12</span>).
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
6433 6434 
            </p>
            <pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 
&lt;graphics type='spice' port='-1' tlsPort='-1' autoport='yes'&gt;
  &lt;channel name='main' mode='secure'/&gt;
  &lt;channel name='record' mode='insecure'/&gt;
  &lt;image compression='auto_glz'/&gt;
  &lt;streaming mode='filter'/&gt;
  &lt;clipboard copypaste='no'/&gt;
  &lt;mouse mode='client'/&gt;
  &lt;filetransfer enable='no'/&gt;
M
qemu: add rendernode argument  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6443 
  &lt;gl enable='yes' rendernode='/dev/dri/by-path/pci-0000:00:02.0-render'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6444 
&lt;/graphics&gt;</pre>
M
Spice: support audio, images and stream compression  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6445 
            <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 
              Spice supports variable compression settings for audio, images and
              streaming. These settings are accessible via the <code>compression
              </code> attribute in all following elements: <code>image</code> to
              set image compression (accepts <code>auto_glz</code>,
              <code>auto_lz</code>, <code>quic</code>, <code>glz</code>,
              <code>lz</code>, <code>off</code>), <code>jpeg</code> for JPEG
              compression for images over wan (accepts <code>auto</code>,
              <code>never</code>, <code>always</code>), <code>zlib</code> for
              configuring wan image compression (accepts <code>auto</code>,
              <code>never</code>, <code>always</code>)  and <code>playback</code>
              for enabling audio stream compression (accepts <code>on</code> or
              <code>off</code>). <span class="since">Since 0.9.1</span>
M
Spice: support audio, images and stream compression  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6458 
            </p>
A
spice: support streaming-video parameter  
Alon Levy 已提交
6459 
            <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6460 6461 6462 6463 
              Streaming mode is set by the <code>streaming</code> element,
              settings its <code>mode</code> attribute to one of
              <code>filter</code>, <code>all</code> or <code>off</code>.
              <span class="since">Since 0.9.2</span>
A
spice: support streaming-video parameter  
Alon Levy 已提交
6464 
            </p>
M
spice: add <clipboard copypaste='yes|no'> option  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6465 
            <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6466 6467 6468 6469 
              Copy &amp; Paste functionality (via Spice agent) is set by the
              <code>clipboard</code> element. It is enabled by default, and can
              be disabled by setting the <code>copypaste</code> property to
              <code>no</code>. <span class="since">Since 0.9.3</span>
M
docs: Fix spice documentation typo  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6470 
            </p>
P
qemu: spice agent-mouse support  
Peng Zhou 已提交
6471 
            <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6472 6473 6474 6475 
              Mouse mode is set by the <code>mouse</code> element, setting its
              <code>mode</code> attribute to one of <code>server</code> or
              <code>client</code>. If no mode is specified, the qemu default will
              be used (client mode). <span class="since">Since 0.9.11</span>
P
qemu: spice agent-mouse support  
Peng Zhou 已提交
6476 
            </p>
F
spice: expose the QEMU disable file transfer option  
Francesco Romani 已提交
6477 6478 
            <p>
              File transfer functionality (via Spice agent) is set using the
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6479 6480 6481 
              <code>filetransfer</code> element. It is enabled by default, and
              can be disabled by setting the <code>enable</code> property to
              <code>no</code>. <span class="since">Since 1.2.2</span>
F
spice: expose the QEMU disable file transfer option  
Francesco Romani 已提交
6482 
            </p>
M
qemu: add spice opengl support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6483 
            <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6484 6485 6486 
              Spice may provide accelerated server-side rendering with OpenGL.
              You can enable or disable OpenGL support explicitly with
              the <code>gl</code> element, by setting the <code>enable</code>
J
docs: fix <spice><gl enable> since version  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6487 
              property. (QEMU only, <span class="since">since 1.3.3</span>).
M
qemu: add spice opengl support  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6488 
            </p>
M
qemu: add rendernode argument  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 
            <p>
              By default, QEMU will pick the first available GPU DRM render node.
              You may specify a DRM render node path to use instead. (QEMU only,
              <span class="since">since 3.1.0</span>).
            </p>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6494 
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6495 
          <dt><code>rdp</code></dt>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6496 
          <dd>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6497 6498 6499 6500 6501 
            <p>
              Starts a RDP server. The <code>port</code> attribute specifies the
              TCP port number (with -1 as legacy syntax indicating that it should
              be auto-allocated). The <code>autoport</code> attribute is the new
              preferred syntax for indicating auto-allocation of the TCP port to
D
docs: Document autoport behavior in the vbox driver  
Dawid Zamirski 已提交
6502 6503 6504 6505 
              use. In the VirtualBox driver, the <code>autoport</code> will make
              the hypervisor pick available port from 3389-3689 range when the VM
              is started. The chosen port will be reflected in the <code>port</code>
              attribute. The <code>multiUser</code> attribute is a boolean deciding
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6506 
              whether multiple simultaneous connections to the VM are permitted.
D
docs: Fix multiUser/replaceUser in RDP display doc.  
Dawid Zamirski 已提交
6507 
              The <code>replaceUser</code> attribute is a boolean deciding whether
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6508 6509 6510 6511 
              the existing connection must be dropped and a new connection must
              be established by the VRDP server, when a new client connects in
              single connection mode.
            </p>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6512 
          </dd>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6513 
          <dt><code>desktop</code></dt>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6514 
          <dd>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6515 6516 6517 6518 6519 6520 6521 
            <p>
              This value is reserved for VirtualBox domains for the moment. It
              displays a window on the host desktop, similarly to "sdl", but
              using the VirtualBox viewer. Just like "sdl", it accepts
              the optional attributes <code>display</code> and
              <code>fullscreen</code>.
            </p>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 
          </dd>
        </dl>
      </dd>
    </dl>
L
conf: add <listen> subelement to domain <graphics> element  
Laine Stump 已提交
6527 
    <p>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 
      Graphics device uses a <code>&lt;listen&gt;</code> to set up where
      the device should listen for clients. It has a mandatory attribute
      <code>type</code> which specifies the listen type. Only <code>vnc</code>,
      <code>spice</code> and <code>rdp</code> supports <code>&lt;listen&gt;
      </code> element. <span class="since">Since 0.9.4</span>.
      Available types are:
L
conf: add <listen> subelement to domain <graphics> element  
Laine Stump 已提交
6534 6535 6536 
    </p>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>address</code></dt>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 
      <dd>
        <p>
          Tells a graphics device to use an address specified in the
          <code>address</code> attribute, which will contain either an IP address
          or hostname (which will be resolved to an IP address via a DNS query)
          to listen on.
        </p>
P
graphics: make address attribute for listen type='address' optional  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 
        <p>
          It is possible to omit the <code>address</code> attribute in order to
          use an address from config files <span class="since">Since 1.3.5</span>.
        </p>
        <p>
          The <code>address</code> attribute is duplicated as <code>listen</code>
          attribute in <code>graphics</code> element for backward compatibility.
          If both are provided they must be equal.
        </p>
L
conf: add <listen> subelement to domain <graphics> element  
Laine Stump 已提交
6553 6554 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>network</code></dt>
P
docs: rewrite graphics XML documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6555 6556 6557 6558 6559 6560 6561 6562 6563 6564 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 
      <dd>
        <p>
          This is used to specify an existing network in the <code>network</code>
          attribute from libvirt's list of configured networks. The named network
          configuration will be examined to determine an appropriate listen
          address and the address will be stored in live XML in <code>address
          </code> attribute. For example, if the network has an IPv4 address in
          its configuration (e.g. if it has a forward type of <code>route</code>,
          <code>nat</code>, or no forward type (isolated)), the first IPv4
          address listed in the network's configuration will be used.
          If the network is describing a host bridge, the first IPv4 address
          associated with that bridge device will be used, and if the network is
          describing one of the 'direct' (macvtap) modes, the first IPv4 address
          of the first forward dev will be used.
        </p>
L
conf: add <listen> subelement to domain <graphics> element  
Laine Stump 已提交
6570 
      </dd>
M
Change 1.3.6 occurrences to 2.0.0 to follow version bump  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
6571 
      <dt><code>socket</code> <span class="since">since 2.0.0 (QEMU only)</span></dt>
P
graphics: introduce new listen type 'socket'  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6572 6573 6574 6575 6576 
      <dd>
        <p>
          This listen type tells a graphics server to listen on unix socket.
          Attribute <code>socket</code> contains a path to unix socket. If this
          attribute is omitted libvirt will generate this path for you.
P
spice: add support for listen type socket  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6577 
          Supported by graphics type <code>vnc</code> and <code>spice</code>.
P
vnc: add support for listen type 'socket'  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6578 6579 6580 6581 6582 6583 6584 
        </p>
        <p>
          For <code>vnc</code> graphics be backward compatible
          the <code>socket</code> attribute of first <code>listen</code> element
          is duplicated as <code>socket</code> attribute in <code>graphics</code>
          element. If <code>graphics</code> element contains a <code>socket</code>
          attribute all <code>listen</code> elements are ignored.
P
graphics: introduce new listen type 'socket'  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6585 6586 
        </p>
      </dd>
M
Change 1.3.6 occurrences to 2.0.0 to follow version bump  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
6587 
      <dt><code>none</code> <span class="since">since 2.0.0 (QEMU only)</span></dt>
P
spice: introduce listen type none  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6588 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 
      <dd>
        <p>
          This listen type doesn't have any other attribute. Libvirt supports
          passing a file descriptor through our APIs virDomainOpenGraphics() and
          virDomainOpenGraphicsFD(). No other listen types are allowed if this
          one is used and the graphics device doesn't listen anywhere. You need
          to use one of the two APIs to pass a FD to QEMU in order to connect to
P
vnc: add support for listen type none  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6595 6596 
          this graphics device. Supported by graphics type <code>vnc</code> and
          <code>spice</code>.
P
spice: introduce listen type none  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6597 6598 
        </p>
      </dd>
L
conf: add <listen> subelement to domain <graphics> element  
Laine Stump 已提交
6599 6600 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6601 
    <h4><a id="elementsVideo">Video devices</a></h4>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6602 6603 6604 6605 
    <p>
      A video device.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6606 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;video&gt;
    &lt;model type='vga' vram='16384' heads='1'&gt;
      &lt;acceleration accel3d='yes' accel2d='yes'/&gt;
    &lt;/model&gt;
  &lt;/video&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6616 6617 6618 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>video</code></dt>
M
Fix and improve domain xml video element description  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6619 
      <dd>
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 6626 6627 6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 6633 
        <p>
          The <code>video</code> element is the container for describing
          video devices. For backwards compatibility, if no <code>video</code>
          is set but there is a <code>graphics</code> in domain xml, then
          libvirt will add a default <code>video</code> according to the guest
          type.
        </p>
        <p>
          For a guest of type "kvm", the default <code>video</code> is:
          <code>type</code> with value "cirrus", <code>vram</code> with value
          "16384" and <code>heads</code> with value "1". By default, the first
          video device in domain xml is the primary one, but the optional
          attribute <code>primary</code> (<span class="since">since 1.0.2</span>)
          with value 'yes' can be used to mark the primary in cases of multiple
P
qemu_command: add support to use virtio as secondary video device  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6634 6635 
          video device. The non-primary must be type of "qxl" or
          (<span class="since">since 2.4.0</span>) "virtio".
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6636 
        </p>
M
Fix and improve domain xml video element description  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6637 
      </dd>
F
add doc for graphic and video elements  
Florian Vichot 已提交
6638
M
Fix and improve domain xml video element description  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6639 6640 
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6641 6642 6643 
        <p>
          The <code>model</code> element has a mandatory <code>type</code>
          attribute which takes the value "vga", "cirrus", "vmvga", "xen",
F
bhyve: add video support  
Fabian Freyer 已提交
6644 
          "vbox", "qxl" (<span class="since">since 0.8.6</span>),
M
qemu: add virtio video device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6645 
          "virtio" (<span class="since">since 1.3.0</span>)
F
bhyve: add video support  
Fabian Freyer 已提交
6646 
          or "gop" (<span class="since">since 3.2.0</span>)
M
qemu: add virtio video device  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
6647 
          depending on the hypervisor features available.
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6648 6649 6650 6651 
        </p>
        <p>
          You can provide the amount of video memory in kibibytes (blocks of
          1024 bytes) using <code>vram</code>. This is supported only for guest
S
docs: Rename 'parallels' to 'vz'  
Sergey Bronnikov 已提交
6652 
          type of "libxl", "vz", "qemu", "vbox", "vmx" and "xen". If no
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6653 6654 6655 6656 6657 
          value is provided the default is used. If the size is not a power of
          two it will be rounded to closest one.
        </p>
        <p>
          The number of screen can be set using <code>heads</code>. This is
S
docs: Rename 'parallels' to 'vz'  
Sergey Bronnikov 已提交
6658 
          supported only for guests type of "vz", "kvm", "vbox" and "vmx".
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6659 6660 
        </p>
        <p>
P
docs/formatdomain: rewrite video documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6661 6662 6663 
          For guest type of "kvm" or "qemu" and model type "qxl" there are
          optional attributes. Attribute <code>ram</code> (<span class="since">
          since 1.0.2</span>) specifies the size of the primary bar, while the
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6664 
          attribute <code>vram</code> specifies the secondary bar size.
P
docs/formatdomain: rewrite video documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6665 6666 6667 6668 6669 
          If <code>ram</code> or <code>vram</code> are not supplied a default
          value is used. The <code>ram</code> should also be rounded to power of
          two as <code>vram</code>. There is also optional attribute
          <code>vgamem</code> (<span class="since">since 1.2.11</span>) to set
          the size of VGA framebuffer for fallback mode of QXL device.
P
docs: fix libvirt version for vram64 in formatdomain.html.in  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6670 
          Attribute <code>vram64</code> (<span class="since">since 1.3.3</span>)
P
qemu: introduce vram64 attribute for QXL video device  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6671 
          extends secondary bar and makes it addressable as 64bit memory.
P
video: cleanup usage of vram attribute and update documentation  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6672 
        </p>
M
Fix and improve domain xml video element description  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6673 6674 6675 6676 
      </dd>

      <dt><code>acceleration</code></dt>
      <dd>
C
docs: formatdomain: document versions for video acceleration  
Cole Robinson 已提交
6677 6678 6679 6680 6681 6682 6683 6684 6685 6686 6687 
        Configure if video acceleration should be enabled.
        <dl>
        <dt><code>accel2d</code></dt>
        <dd>Enable 2D acceleration (for vbox driver only,
        <span class="since">since 0.7.1</span>)</dd>

        <dt><code>accel3d</code></dt>
        <dd>Enable 3D acceleration (for vbox driver
        <span class="since">since 0.7.1</span>, qemu driver
        <span class="since">since 1.3.0</span>)</dd>
        </dl>
M
Fix and improve domain xml video element description  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6688 
      </dd>
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
6689 6690 6691 6692 6693 

      <dt><code>address</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The optional <code>address</code> sub-element can be used to
        tie the video device to a particular PCI slot.
F
qemu: Add support for virtio-gpu-ccw video device on S390  
Farhan Ali 已提交
6694 6695 6696 
        On S390, <code>address</code> can be used to provide the
        CCW address for the video device (<span class="since">
        since 4.2.0</span>).
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
6697 
      </dd>
J
Add virtio-related options to video  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6698 6699 6700 6701 6702 6703 6704 6705 

      <dt><code>driver</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The subelement <code>driver</code> can be used to tune the device:
        <dl>
          <dt>virtio options</dt>
          <dd>
          <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
R
bhyve: add vga configuration for video driver  
Roman Bogorodskiy 已提交
6706 6707 6708 6709 6710 6711 6712 6713 
          set (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
          </dd>
          <dt>VGA configuration</dt>
          <dd>
          Control how the video devices exposed to the guest using the
          <code>vgaconf</code> attribute which takes the value "io", "on" or "off".
          At present, it's only applicable to the bhyve's "gop" video model type
          (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
J
Add virtio-related options to video  
Ján Tomko 已提交
6714 6715 6716 
          </dd>
        </dl>
      </dd>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6717 6718 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6719 
    <h4><a id="elementsConsole">Consoles, serial, parallel &amp; channel devices</a></h4>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6720 6721 6722 

    <p>
      A character device provides a way to interact with the virtual machine.
M
Add documentation for <channel> domain element  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6723 6724 
      Paravirtualized consoles, serial ports, parallel ports and channels are
      all classed as character devices and so represented using the same syntax.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6725 6726 
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6727 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6728 6729 6730 6731 6732 6733 6734 6735 6736 6737 6738 6739 6740 6741 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 6748 6749 6750 6751 6752 6753 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;parallel type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;source path='/dev/pts/2'/&gt;
    &lt;target port='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/parallel&gt;
  &lt;serial type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;source path='/dev/pts/3'/&gt;
    &lt;target port='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
  &lt;serial type='file'&gt;
    &lt;source path='/tmp/file' append='on'&gt;
      &lt;seclabel model='dac' relabel='no'/&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target port='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
  &lt;console type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;source path='/dev/pts/4'/&gt;
    &lt;target port='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/console&gt;
  &lt;channel type='unix'&gt;
    &lt;source mode='bind' path='/tmp/guestfwd'/&gt;
    &lt;target type='guestfwd' address='10.0.2.1' port='4600'/&gt;
  &lt;/channel&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6754
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6755 6756 6757 6758 6759 
    <p>
      In each of these directives, the top-level element name (parallel, serial,
      console, channel) describes how the device is presented to the guest. The
      guest interface is configured by the <code>target</code> element.
    </p>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6760
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6761 6762 6763 6764 6765 6766 
    <p>
      The interface presented to the host is given in the <code>type</code>
      attribute of the top-level element. The host interface is
      configured by the <code>source</code> element.
    </p>
R
Add <seclabel> to character devices.  
Richard W.M. Jones 已提交
6767 6768 6769 6770 6771 6772 6773 6774 
    <p>
      The <code>source</code> element may contain an optional
      <code>seclabel</code> to override the way that labelling
      is done on the socket path.  If this element is not present,
      the <a href="#seclabel">security label is inherited from
        the per-domain setting</a>.
    </p>
D
docs: Describe new 'append' attribute for chardevs source  
Dmitry Mishin 已提交
6775 6776 6777 6778 6779 6780 6781 6782 
    <p>
      If the interface <code>type</code> presented to the host is "file",
      then the <code>source</code> element may contain an optional attribute
      <code>append</code> that specifies whether or not the information in
      the file should be preserved on domain restart. Allowed values are
      "on" and "off" (default). <span class="since">Since 1.3.1</span>.
    </p>
D
conf: allow use of a logfile with chardev backends  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6783 
    <p>
B
docs: fix logfile paragraph  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
6784 
      Regardless of the <code>type</code>, character devices can
D
conf: allow use of a logfile with chardev backends  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6785 6786 
      have an optional log file associated with them. This is
      expressed via a <code>log</code> sub-element, with a
B
docs: fix logfile paragraph  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
6787 6788 6789 
      <code>file</code> attribute. There can also be an <code>append</code>
      attribute which takes the same values described above.
      <span class="since">Since 1.3.3</span>.
D
conf: allow use of a logfile with chardev backends  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6790 6791 6792 
    </p>

    <pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6793 6794 6795 
...
&lt;log file="/var/log/libvirt/qemu/guestname-serial0.log" append="off"/&gt;
...</pre>
D
conf: allow use of a logfile with chardev backends  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6796
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
6797 6798 6799 6800 6801 6802 6803 6804 
    <p>
      Each character device element has an optional
      sub-element <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> which can tie the
      device to a
      particular <a href="#elementsControllers">controller</a> or PCI
      slot.
    </p>
P
conf: introduce reconnect element for chardev source  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
6805 6806 6807 6808 6809 6810 6811 6812 6813 6814 6815 
    <p>
      For character device with type <code>unix</code> or <code>tcp</code>
      the <code>source</code> has an optional element <code>reconnect</code>
      which configures reconnect timeout if the connection is lost.
      There are two attributes, <code>enabled</code> where possible
      values are "yes" and "no" and <code>timeout</code> which is in
      seconds. The <code>reconnect</code> attribute is valid only
      for <code>connect</code> mode.
      <span class="since">Since 3.7.0 (QEMU driver only)</span>.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6816 
    <h5><a id="elementsCharGuestInterface">Guest interface</a></h5>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6817 6818 6819 6820 6821 6822 

    <p>
      A character device presents itself to the guest as one of the following
      types.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6823 
    <h6><a id="elementCharParallel">Parallel port</a></h6>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6824
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6825 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6826 6827 6828 6829 6830 6831 6832 6833 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;parallel type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;source path='/dev/pts/2'/&gt;
    &lt;target port='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/parallel&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6834 6835 6836 

    <p>
      <code>target</code> can have a <code>port</code> attribute, which
M
docs: Serial and parallel device target ports actually start from 0  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6837 
      specifies the port number. Ports are numbered starting from 0. There are
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6838 6839 6840 
      usually 0, 1 or 2 parallel ports.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6841 
    <h6><a id="elementCharSerial">Serial port</a></h6>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6842
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6843 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6844 6845 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6846 
  &lt;!-- Serial port --&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6847 6848 6849 6850 6851 
  &lt;serial type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;source path='/dev/pts/3'/&gt;
    &lt;target port='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6852 6853 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 
...</pre>

<pre>
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;!-- USB serial port --&gt;
  &lt;serial type='pty'&gt;
A
conf: Parse and format virDomainChrSerialTargetModel  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6859 6860 6861 
    &lt;target type='usb-serial' port='0'&gt;
      &lt;model name='usb-serial'/&gt;
    &lt;/target&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6862 6863 6864 
    &lt;address type='usb' bus='0' port='1'/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6865 
...</pre>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6866 6867 

    <p>
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6868 6869 6870 6871 6872 6873 
      The <code>target</code> element can have an optional <code>port</code>
      attribute, which specifies the port number (starting from 0), and an
      optional <code>type</code> attribute: valid values are,
      <span class="since">since 1.0.2</span>, <code>isa-serial</code> (usable
      with x86 guests), <code>usb-serial</code> (usable whenever USB support
      is available) and <code>pci-serial</code> (usable whenever PCI support
A
conf: Add target type and model for spapr-vty  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6874 
      is available); <span class="since">since 3.10.0</span>,
P
conf: add VIR_DOMAIN_CHR_SERIAL_TARGET_TYPE_SCLP  
Pino Toscano 已提交
6875 6876 6877 
      <code>spapr-vio-serial</code> (usable with ppc64/pseries guests),
      <code>system-serial</code> (usable with aarch64/virt guests) and
      <code>sclp-serial</code> (usable with s390 and s390x guests) are
A
conf: Add target type and model for pl011  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6878 
      available as well.
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6879 6880 
    </p>
A
conf: Parse and format virDomainChrSerialTargetModel  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 
    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 3.10.0</span>, the <code>target</code>
      element can have an optional <code>model</code> subelement;
      valid values for its <code>name</code> attribute are:
      <code>isa-serial</code> (usable with the <code>isa-serial</code> target
      type); <code>usb-serial</code> (usable with the <code>usb-serial</code>
      target type); <code>pci-serial</code>
A
conf: Add target type and model for spapr-vty  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6888 6889 
      (usable with the <code>pci-serial</code> target type);
      <code>spapr-vty</code> (usable with the <code>spapr-vio-serial</code>
A
conf: Add target type and model for pl011  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6890 
      target type); <code>pl011</code> (usable with the
P
conf: add VIR_DOMAIN_CHR_SERIAL_TARGET_TYPE_SCLP  
Pino Toscano 已提交
6891 6892 6893 
      <code>system-serial</code> target type); <code>sclpconsole</code> and
      <code>sclplmconsole</code> (usable with the <code>sclp-serial</code>
      target type).
A
conf: Parse and format virDomainChrSerialTargetModel  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6894 6895 
    </p>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6896 
    <p>
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6897 6898 
      If any of the attributes is not specified by the user, libvirt will
      choose a value suitable for most users.
D
Allow multiple consoles per virtual guest  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
6899 6900 
    </p>
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6901 
    <p>
A
conf: Add target type and model for pl011  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6902 
      Most target types support configuring the guest-visible device
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6903 6904 
      address as <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>; more
      specifically, acceptable address types are <code>isa</code> (for
A
conf: Add target type and model for spapr-vty  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6905 6906 
      <code>isa-serial</code>), <code>usb</code> (for <code>usb-serial</code>),
      <code>pci</code> (for <code>pci-serial</code>) and <code>spapr-vio</code>
A
conf: Add target type and model for pl011  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6907 
      (for <code>spapr-vio-serial</code>). The <code>system-serial</code>
P
conf: add VIR_DOMAIN_CHR_SERIAL_TARGET_TYPE_SCLP  
Pino Toscano 已提交
6908 6909 
      and <code>sclp-serial</code> target types don't support specifying an
      address.
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6910 
    </p>
C
qemu: virtio console support  
Cole Robinson 已提交
6911 6912 

    <p>
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6913 6914 
      For the relationship between serial ports and consoles,
      <a href="#elementCharSerialAndConsole">see below</a>.
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6915 6916 
    </p>
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6917 6918 
    <h6><a id="elementCharConsole">Console</a></h6>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
6919 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6920 6921 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6922 
  &lt;!-- Serial console --&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6923 
  &lt;console type='pty'&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6924 
    &lt;source path='/dev/pts/2'/&gt;
A
conf: Parse and format virDomainChrSerialTargetModel  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6925 
   &lt;target type='serial' port='0'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6926 
  &lt;/console&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6927 6928 
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6929
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6930 6931 
<pre>
...
A
docs: Fix serial console configuration examples  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6932 
&lt;devices&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 6939 
  &lt;!-- KVM virtio console --&gt;
  &lt;console type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;source path='/dev/pts/5'/&gt;
    &lt;target type='virtio' port='0'/&gt;
  &lt;/console&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
6940
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6941 6942 6943 6944 6945 6946 6947 6948 6949 6950 6951 6952 6953 6954 6955 6956 6957 
    <p>
      The <code>console</code> element is used to represent interactive
      serial consoles. Depending on the type of guest in use and the specifics
      of the configuration, the <code>console</code> element might represent
      the same device as an existing <code>serial</code> element or a separate
      device.
    </p>

    <p>
      A <code>target</code> subelement is supported and works the same
      way as with the <code>serial</code> element
      (<a href="#elementCharSerial">see above</a> for details).
      Valid values for the <code>type</code> attribute are:
      <code>serial</code> (described below);
      <code>virtio</code> (usable whenever VirtIO support is available);
      <code>xen</code>, <code>lxc</code>, <code>uml</code> and
      <code>openvz</code> (available when the corresponding hypervisor is in
P
conf: add VIR_DOMAIN_CHR_SERIAL_TARGET_TYPE_SCLP  
Pino Toscano 已提交
6958 6959 6960 6961 6962 
      use). <code>sclp</code> and <code>sclplm</code> (usable for s390 and
      s390x QEMU guests) are supported for compatibility reasons but should
      not be used for new guests: use the <code>sclpconsole</code> and
      <code>sclplmconsole</code> target models, respectively, with the
      <code>serial</code> element instead.
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
6963 6964 6965 6966 6967 6968 6969 6970 6971 6972 6973 6974 6975 6976 6977 6978 6979 6980 6981 6982 6983 6984 6985 6986 6987 6988 6989 6990 6991 6992 6993 6994 6995 6996 6997 6998 6999 7000 7001 7002 7003 7004 7005 7006 7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7021 
    </p>

    <p>
      Of the target types listed above, <code>serial</code> is special in
      that it doesn't represents a separate device, but rather the same
      device as the first <code>serial</code> element. Due to this, there can
      only be a single <code>console</code> element with target type
      <code>serial</code> per guest.
    </p>

    <p>
      Virtio consoles are usually accessible as <code>/dev/hvc[0-7]</code>
      from inside the guest; for more information, see
      <a href="http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial">http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial</a>.
      <span class="since">Since 0.8.3</span>
    </p>

    <p>
      For the relationship between serial ports and consoles,
      <a href="#elementCharSerialAndConsole">see below</a>.
    </p>

    <h6><a id="elementCharSerialAndConsole">Relationship between serial ports and consoles</a></h6>

    <p>
      Due to hystorical reasons, the <code>serial</code> and
      <code>console</code> elements have partially overlapping scopes.
    </p>

    <p>
      In general, both elements are used to configure one or more serial
      consoles to be used for interacting with the guest. The main difference
      between the two is that <code>serial</code> is used for emulated,
      usually native, serial consoles, whereas <code>console</code> is used
      for paravirtualized ones.
    </p>

    <p>
      Both emulated and paravirtualized serial consoles have advantages and
      disadvantages:
    </p>

    <ul>
      <li>
        emulated serial consoles are usually initialized much earlier than
        paravirtualized ones, so they can be used to control the bootloader
        and display both firmware and early boot messages;
      </li>
      <li>
        on several platforms, there can only be a single emulated serial
        console per guest but paravirtualized consoles don't suffer from the
        same limitation.
      </li>
    </ul>

    <p>
      A configuration such as:
    </p>
J
S390: Add SCLP console front end support  
J.B. Joret 已提交
7022 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7023 
...
A
docs: Fix serial console configuration examples  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7024 
&lt;devices&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7025 7026 7027 
  &lt;console type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;target type='serial'/&gt;
  &lt;/console&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7028 
  &lt;console type='pty'&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7029 
    &lt;target type='virtio'/&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7030 7031 7032 
  &lt;/console&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
J
S390: Add SCLP console front end support  
J.B. Joret 已提交
7033
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7034 
    <p>
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7035 7036 7037 7038 7039 7040 7041 7042 7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 
      will work on any platform and will result in one emulated serial console
      for early boot logging / interactive / recovery use, and one
      paravirtualized serial console to be used eg. as a side channel. Most
      people will be fine with having just the first <code>console</code>
      element in their configuration.
    </p>

    <p>
      Note that, due to the compatibility concerns mentioned earlier, all the
      following configurations:
    </p>

<pre>
...
A
docs: Fix serial console configuration examples  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7049 
&lt;devices&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7050 7051 7052 7053 7054 7055 
  &lt;serial type='pty'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>

<pre>
...
A
docs: Fix serial console configuration examples  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7056 
&lt;devices&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7057 7058 7059 7060 7061 7062 
  &lt;console type='pty'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>

<pre>
...
A
docs: Fix serial console configuration examples  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7063 
&lt;devices&gt;
A
docs: Improve documentation for serial consoles  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7064 7065 7066 7067 7068 7069 7070 7071 
  &lt;serial type='pty'/&gt;
  &lt;console type='pty'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>

    <p>
      will be treated the same and will result in a single emulated serial
      console being available to the guest.
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7072 7073 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7074 
    <h6><a id="elementCharChannel">Channel</a></h6>
M
Add documentation for <channel> domain element  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7075 7076 7077 7078 7079 7080 

    <p>
      This represents a private communication channel between the host and the
      guest.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7081 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7082 7083 7084 7085 7086 7087 7088 7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094 7095 7096 7097 7098 7099 7100 7101 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;channel type='unix'&gt;
    &lt;source mode='bind' path='/tmp/guestfwd'/&gt;
    &lt;target type='guestfwd' address='10.0.2.1' port='4600'/&gt;
  &lt;/channel&gt;

  &lt;!-- KVM virtio channel --&gt;
  &lt;channel type='pty'&gt;
    &lt;target type='virtio' name='arbitrary.virtio.serial.port.name'/&gt;
  &lt;/channel&gt;
  &lt;channel type='unix'&gt;
    &lt;source mode='bind' path='/var/lib/libvirt/qemu/f16x86_64.agent'/&gt;
    &lt;target type='virtio' name='org.qemu.guest_agent.0' state='connected'/&gt;
  &lt;/channel&gt;
  &lt;channel type='spicevmc'&gt;
    &lt;target type='virtio' name='com.redhat.spice.0'/&gt;
  &lt;/channel&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
Add documentation for <channel> domain element  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7102 7103 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 

    <p>
      This can be implemented in a variety of ways. The specific type of
      channel is given in the <code>type</code> attribute of the
      <code>target</code> element. Different channel types have different
      <code>target</code> attributes.
    </p>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>guestfwd</code></dt>
      <dd>TCP traffic sent by the guest to a given IP address and port is
        forwarded to the channel device on the host. The <code>target</code>
        element must have <code>address</code> and <code>port</code> attributes.
        <span class="since">Since 0.7.3</span></dd>
C
docs: domain: Document virtio <channel>  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7116 7117 7118 

      <dt><code>virtio</code></dt>
      <dd>Paravirtualized virtio channel. Channel is exposed in the guest under
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
7119 
        /dev/vport*, and if the optional element <code>name</code> is specified,
C
docs: domain: Document virtio <channel>  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7120 
        /dev/virtio-ports/$name (for more info, please see
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
7121 7122 
        <a href="http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial">http://fedoraproject.org/wiki/Features/VirtioSerial</a>). The
        optional element <code>address</code> can tie the channel to a
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
7123 7124 
        particular <code>type='virtio-serial'</code>
        controller, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>.
D
QEMU guest agent support  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7125 7126 7127 7128 
        With qemu, if <code>name</code> is "org.qemu.guest_agent.0",
        then libvirt can interact with a guest agent installed in the
        guest, for actions such as guest shutdown or file system quiescing.
        <span class="since">Since 0.7.7, guest agent interaction
J
docs: fix 'since' for socket path generation  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7129 
        since 0.9.10</span> Moreover, <span class="since">since 1.0.6</span>
M
qemu: Generate agent socket path if missing  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7130 7131 7132 7133 
        it is possible to have source path auto generated for virtio unix channels.
        This is very useful in case of a qemu guest agent, where users don't
        usually care about the source path since it's libvirt who talks to
        the guest agent. In case users want to utilize this feature, they should
P
conf: Add channel state for virtio channels to the XML  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 
        leave <code>&lt;source&gt;</code> element out. <span class="since">Since
        1.2.11</span> the active XML for a virtio channel may contain an optional
        <code>state</code> attribute that reflects whether a process in the
        guest is active on the channel. This is an output-only attribute.
        Possible values for the <code>state</code> attribute are
        <code>connected</code> and <code>disconnected</code>.
D
Fix multiple formatting problems in HTML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7140 
      </dd>
J
conf: add xen type for channels  
Joao Martins 已提交
7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 
      <dt><code>xen</code></dt>
      <dd> Paravirtualized Xen channel. Channel is exposed in the guest as a
        Xen console but identified with a name. Setup and consumption of a Xen
        channel depends on software and configuration in the guest
        (for more info, please see <a href="http://xenbits.xen.org/docs/unstable/misc/channel.txt">http://xenbits.xen.org/docs/unstable/misc/channel.txt</a>).
        Channel source path semantics are the same as the virtio target type.
        The <code>state</code> attribute is not supported since Xen channels
        lack the necessary probing mechanism.
        <span class="since">Since 2.3.0</span>
      </dd>
D
spicevmc: support new qemu chardev  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7151 7152 7153 7154 7155 7156 7157 7158 7159 7160 7161 7162 7163 
      <dt><code>spicevmc</code></dt>
      <dd>Paravirtualized SPICE channel. The domain must also have a
        SPICE server as a <a href="#elementsGraphics">graphics
        device</a>, at which point the host piggy-backs messages
        across the <code>main</code> channel.  The <code>target</code>
        element must be present, with
        attribute <code>type='virtio'</code>; an optional
        attribute <code>name</code> controls how the guest will have
        access to the channel, and defaults
        to <code>name='com.redhat.spice.0'</code>.  The
        optional <code>address</code> element can tie the channel to a
        particular <code>type='virtio-serial'</code> controller.
        <span class="since">Since 0.8.8</span></dd>
M
Add documentation for <channel> domain element  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7164 7165 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7166 
    <h5><a id="elementsCharHostInterface">Host interface</a></h5>
M
Separate character device doc guest and host parts  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7167 7168 7169 7170 7171 

    <p>
      A character device presents itself to the host as one of the following
      types.
    </p>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7172
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7173 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharSTDIO">Domain logfile</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7174 7175 7176 7177 7178 7179 

    <p>
      This disables all input on the character device, and sends output
      into the virtual machine's logfile
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7180 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7181 7182 7183 7184 7185 7186 7187 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;console type='stdio'&gt;
    &lt;target port='1'/&gt;
  &lt;/console&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7188 7189
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7190 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharFle">Device logfile</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7191 7192 7193 7194 7195 7196 

    <p>
      A file is opened and all data sent to the character
      device is written to the file.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7197 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7198 7199 7200 7201 7202 7203 7204 7205 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="file"&gt;
    &lt;source path="/var/log/vm/vm-serial.log"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7206
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7207 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharVC">Virtual console</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7208 7209 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 

    <p>
      Connects the character device to the graphical framebuffer in
      a virtual console. This is typically accessed via a special
      hotkey sequence such as "ctrl+alt+3"
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7215 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7216 7217 7218 7219 7220 7221 7222 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type='vc'&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7223
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7224 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharNull">Null device</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7225 7226 7227 7228 7229 7230 

    <p>
      Connects the character device to the void. No data is ever
      provided to the input. All data written is discarded.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7231 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7232 7233 7234 7235 7236 7237 7238 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type='null'&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7239
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7240 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharPTY">Pseudo TTY</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7241 7242 7243 7244 7245 7246 7247 

    <p>
      A Pseudo TTY is allocated using /dev/ptmx. A suitable client
      such as 'virsh console' can connect to interact with the
      serial port locally.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7248 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7249 7250 7251 7252 7253 7254 7255 7256 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="pty"&gt;
    &lt;source path="/dev/pts/3"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7257 7258 7259 

    <p>
      NB special case if &lt;console type='pty'&gt;, then the TTY
A
fix typos in docs  
Atsushi SAKAI 已提交
7260 
      path is also duplicated as an attribute tty='/dev/pts/3'
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7261 7262 7263 7264 
      on the top level &lt;console&gt; tag. This provides compat
      with existing syntax for &lt;console&gt; tags.
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7265 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharHost">Host device proxy</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7266 7267 7268 7269 7270 

    <p>
      The character device is passed through to the underlying
      physical character device. The device types must match,
      eg the emulated serial port should only be connected to
A
fix typos in docs  
Atsushi SAKAI 已提交
7271 
      a host serial port - don't connect a serial port to a parallel
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7272 7273 7274 
      port.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7275 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7276 7277 7278 7279 7280 7281 7282 7283 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="dev"&gt;
    &lt;source path="/dev/ttyS0"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7284
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7285 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharPipe">Named pipe</a></h6>
C
Fix docs and code disagreements for character devices.  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7286 7287 7288 7289 7290 7291 

    <p>
      The character device writes output to a named pipe. See pipe(7) for
      more info.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7292 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7293 7294 7295 7296 7297 7298 7299 7300 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="pipe"&gt;
    &lt;source path="/tmp/mypipe"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
C
Fix docs and code disagreements for character devices.  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7301
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7302 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharTCP">TCP client/server</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7303 7304 7305 

    <p>
      The character device acts as a TCP client connecting to a
G
document tcp listen and raw wire option  
Guido Günther 已提交
7306 
      remote server.
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7307 7308 
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7309 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 7316 7317 7318 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="tcp"&gt;
    &lt;source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/&gt;
    &lt;protocol type="raw"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
 ...</pre>
G
document tcp listen and raw wire option  
Guido Günther 已提交
7319 7320 7321 7322 7323 

    <p>
      Or as a TCP server waiting for a client connection.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7324 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="tcp"&gt;
    &lt;source mode="bind" host="127.0.0.1" service="2445"/&gt;
    &lt;protocol type="raw"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
G
document tcp listen and raw wire option  
Guido Günther 已提交
7334 7335 

    <p>
E
docs: minor whitespace cleanups  
Eric Blake 已提交
7336 
      Alternatively you can use <code>telnet</code> instead
J
docs: Clarify chardev protocol  
John Ferlan 已提交
7337 7338 7339 7340 7341 7342 7343 
      of <code>raw</code> TCP in order to utilize the telnet protocol
      for the connection.
    </p>
    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 0.8.5,</span> some hypervisors support
      use of either <code>telnets</code> (secure telnet) or <code>tls</code>
      (via secure sockets layer) as the transport protocol for connections.
E
docs: correct invalid xml  
Eric Blake 已提交
7344 
    </p>
G
document tcp listen and raw wire option  
Guido Günther 已提交
7345
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7346 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7347 7348 7349 7350 7351 7352 7353 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="tcp"&gt;
    &lt;source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/&gt;
    &lt;protocol type="telnet"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7354 
  ...
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 7360 7361 
  &lt;serial type="tcp"&gt;
    &lt;source mode="bind" host="127.0.0.1" service="2445"/&gt;
    &lt;protocol type="telnet"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
P
domain: Add optional 'tls' attribute for TCP chardev  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
7362 7363 7364 7365 7366 7367 7368 7369 7370 7371 7372 7373 7374 7375 7376 7377 7378 7379 7380 

    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 2.4.0,</span> the optional attribute
      <code>tls</code> can be used to control whether a chardev
      TCP communication channel would utilize a hypervisor configured
      TLS X.509 certificate environment in order to encrypt the data
      channel. For the QEMU hypervisor, usage of a TLS environment can
      be controlled on the host by the <code>chardev_tls</code> and
      <code>chardev_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> or
      <code>default_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> settings in the file
      /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf. If <code>chardev_tls</code> is enabled,
      then unless the <code>tls</code> attribute is set to "no", libvirt
      will use the host configured TLS environment.
      If <code>chardev_tls</code> is disabled, but the <code>tls</code>
      attribute is set to "yes", then libvirt will attempt to use the
      host TLS environment if either the <code>chardev_tls_x509_cert_dir</code>
      or <code>default_tls_x509_cert_dir</code> TLS directory structure exists.
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7381 7382 7383 7384 7385 7386 7387 7388 7389 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="tcp"&gt;
    &lt;source mode='connect' host="127.0.0.1" service="5555" tls="yes"/&gt;
    &lt;protocol type="raw"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="0"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7390
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7391 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharUDP">UDP network console</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7392 7393 7394 7395 7396 7397 

    <p>
      The character device acts as a UDP netconsole service,
      sending and receiving packets. This is a lossy service.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7398 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7399 7400 7401 7402 7403 7404 7405 7406 7407 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="udp"&gt;
    &lt;source mode="bind" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/&gt;
    &lt;source mode="connect" host="0.0.0.0" service="2445"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7408
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7409 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharUNIX">UNIX domain socket client/server</a></h6>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7410 7411 7412 7413 7414 7415 

    <p>
      The character device acts as a UNIX domain socket server,
      accepting connections from local clients.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7416 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7417 7418 7419 7420 7421 7422 7423 7424 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="unix"&gt;
    &lt;source mode="bind" path="/tmp/foo"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Update domain XML docs  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7425
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7426 
    <h6><a id="elementsCharSpiceport">Spice channel</a></h6>
M
conf: introduce spiceport chardev backend  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
7427 7428 7429 7430 7431 7432 

    <p>
      The character device is accessible through spice connection
      under a channel name specified in the <code>channel</code>
      attribute.  <span class="since">Since 1.2.2</span>
    </p>
P
docs: add a note that spice channel is usable only with spice graphics  
Pavel Hrdina 已提交
7433 7434 7435 7436 7437 
    <p>
      Note: depending on the hypervisor, spiceports might (or might not)
      be enabled on domains with or without <a href="#elementsGraphics">spice
      graphics</a>.
    </p>
M
conf: introduce spiceport chardev backend  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
7438 7439 

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7440 7441 7442 7443 7444 7445 7446 7447 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="spiceport"&gt;
    &lt;source channel="org.qemu.console.serial.0"/&gt;
    &lt;target port="1"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
conf: introduce spiceport chardev backend  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
7448
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7449 
    <h6><a id="elementsNmdm">Nmdm device</a></h6>
R
docs: document nmdm type console  
Roman Bogorodskiy 已提交
7450 7451 7452 

    <p>
      The nmdm device driver, available on FreeBSD, provides two
C
docs: fix a typo in formatdomain  
Chen Hanxiao 已提交
7453 
      tty devices connected together by a virtual null modem cable.
R
docs: document nmdm type console  
Roman Bogorodskiy 已提交
7454 7455 7456 7457 
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.4</span>
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7464 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;serial type="nmdm"&gt;
    &lt;source master="/dev/nmdm0A" slave="/dev/nmdm0B"/&gt;
  &lt;/serial&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
R
docs: document nmdm type console  
Roman Bogorodskiy 已提交
7465 7466 7467 7468 7469 7470 7471 

    <p>
      The <code>source</code> element has these attributes:
    </p>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>master</code></dt>
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
7472 7473 
      <dd>Master device of the pair, that is passed to the hypervisor.
      Device is specified by a fully qualified path.</dd>
R
docs: document nmdm type console  
Roman Bogorodskiy 已提交
7474 7475 7476 

      <dt><code>slave</code></dt>
      <dd>Slave device of the pair, that is passed to the clients for connection
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
7477 
      to the guest console. Device is specified by a fully qualified path.</dd>
R
docs: document nmdm type console  
Roman Bogorodskiy 已提交
7478 
    </dl>
C
Add documentation for <sound> device XML format.  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7479
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7480 
    <h4><a id="elementsSound">Sound devices</a></h4>
C
Add documentation for <sound> device XML format.  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7481 7482 7483 7484 7485 7486 

    <p>
      A virtual sound card can be attached to the host via the
      <code>sound</code> element. <span class="since">Since 0.4.3</span>
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7487 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7488 7489 7490 7491 7492 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;sound model='es1370'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
C
Add documentation for <sound> device XML format.  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7493 7494 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>sound</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The <code>sound</code> element has one mandatory attribute,
        <code>model</code>, which specifies what real sound device is emulated.
        Valid values are specific to the underlying hypervisor, though typical
P
conf: Add USB sound card support and implement it for qemu  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7500 
        choices are 'es1370', 'sb16', 'ac97', 'ich6' and 'usb'.
C
qemu: sound: Support intel 'ich6' model  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7501 
        (<span class="since">
P
conf: Add USB sound card support and implement it for qemu  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7502 7503 
         'ac97' only since 0.6.0, 'ich6' only since 0.8.8,
         'usb' only since 1.2.7</span>)
C
Add documentation for <sound> device XML format.  
Cole Robinson 已提交
7504 7505 7506 
      </dd>
    </dl>
M
domain: add <codec> sound sub-element  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
7507 7508 7509 7510 7511 
    <p>
      <span class="since">Since 0.9.13</span>, a sound element
      with <code>ich6</code> model can have optional
      sub-elements <code>&lt;codec&gt;</code> to attach various audio
      codecs to the audio device. If not specified, a default codec
F
conf: Introduce codec type 'output'  
Filip Alac 已提交
7512 7513 7514 7515 7516 7517 7518 7519 7520 7521 7522 7523 
      will be attached to allow playback and recording.
      </p>
      <p>
      Valid values are:
      </p>
      <p>
      <ul>
        <li>'duplex' - advertise a line-in and a line-out </li>
        <li>'micro' -  advertise a speaker and a microphone </li>
        <li>'output' - advertise a line-out
            <span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span></li>
      </ul>
M
domain: add <codec> sound sub-element  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
7524 7525 7526 
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7527 7528 7529 7530 7531 7532 7533 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;sound model='ich6'&gt;
    &lt;codec type='micro'/&gt;
  &lt;/sound&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
M
domain: add <codec> sound sub-element  
Marc-André Lureau 已提交
7534
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
7535 7536 7537 
    <p>
      Each <code>sound</code> element has an optional
      sub-element <code>&lt;address&gt;</code> which can tie the
E
docs: document <address> elements in one place  
Eric Blake 已提交
7538 7539 
      device to a particular PCI
      slot, <a href="#elementsAddress">documented above</a>.
E
docs: document <controller> element  
Eric Blake 已提交
7540 7541 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7542 
    <h4><a id="elementsWatchdog">Watchdog device</a></h4>
R
Support QEMU watchdog device.  
Richard Jones 已提交
7543 7544 7545 7546 7547 7548 7549 7550 7551 7552 7553 7554 7555 7556 7557 7558 7559 7560 7561 

    <p>
      A virtual hardware watchdog device can be added to the guest via
      the <code>watchdog</code> element.
      <span class="since">Since 0.7.3, QEMU and KVM only</span>
    </p>

    <p>
      The watchdog device requires an additional driver and management
      daemon in the guest.  Just enabling the watchdog in the libvirt
      configuration does not do anything useful on its own.
    </p>

    <p>
      Currently libvirt does not support notification when the
      watchdog fires.  This feature is planned for a future version of
      libvirt.
    </p>
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7562 
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7563 7564 7565 7566 7567 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;watchdog model='i6300esb'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
R
Support QEMU watchdog device.  
Richard Jones 已提交
7568
M
docs: Emphasize that devices have to be inside the <devices> element  
Matthias Bolte 已提交
7569 7570 7571 7572 7573 7574 
<pre>
  ...
  &lt;devices&gt;
    &lt;watchdog model='i6300esb' action='poweroff'/&gt;
  &lt;/devices&gt;
&lt;/domain&gt;</pre>
R
Support QEMU watchdog device.  
Richard Jones 已提交
7575 7576 7577 7578 

    <dl>
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7579 
        <p>
R
Support QEMU watchdog device.  
Richard Jones 已提交
7580 
        The required <code>model</code> attribute specifies what real
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7581 7582 7583 7584 7585 7586 7587 
        watchdog device is emulated.  Valid values are specific to the
        underlying hypervisor.
        </p>
        <p>
        QEMU and KVM support:
        </p>
        <ul>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7588 
          <li>'i6300esb' - the recommended device,
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7589 
            emulating a PCI Intel 6300ESB </li>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7590 7591 
          <li>'ib700' - emulating an ISA iBase IB700 </li>
          <li>'diag288' - emulating an S390 DIAG288 device
M
Revert "Change livbirt version to 1.3.0 for the next release"  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
7592 
            <span class="since">Since 1.2.17</span></li>
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7593 
        </ul>
R
Support QEMU watchdog device.  
Richard Jones 已提交
7594 7595 7596 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>action</code></dt>
      <dd>
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7597 
        <p>
R
Support QEMU watchdog device.  
Richard Jones 已提交
7598 
        The optional <code>action</code> attribute describes what
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7599 7600 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 
        action to take when the watchdog expires.  Valid values are
        specific to the underlying hypervisor.
        </p>
        <p>
        QEMU and KVM support:
        </p>
        <ul>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7606 7607 
          <li>'reset' - default, forcefully reset the guest</li>
          <li>'shutdown' - gracefully shutdown the guest
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7608 
            (not recommended) </li>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7609 7610 7611 7612 
          <li>'poweroff' - forcefully power off the guest</li>
          <li>'pause' - pause the guest</li>
          <li>'none' - do nothing</li>
          <li>'dump' - automatically dump the guest
H
Update documentation of watchdog dump option and add test data for it  
Hu Tao 已提交
7613 
            <span class="since">Since 0.8.7</span></li>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7614 
          <li>'inject-nmi' - inject a non-maskable interrupt
B
Support for a new watchdog action inject-nmi  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
7615 
            into the guest
M
Revert "Change livbirt version to 1.3.0 for the next release"  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
7616 
            <span class="since">Since 1.2.17</span></li>
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7617 7618 
        </ul>
        <p>
H
Update documentation of watchdog dump option and add test data for it  
Hu Tao 已提交
7619 
        Note 1: the 'shutdown' action requires that the guest
M
Cleanup whitespace in docs  
Matthew Booth 已提交
7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 
        is responsive to ACPI signals.  In the sort of situations
        where the watchdog has expired, guests are usually unable
        to respond to ACPI signals.  Therefore using 'shutdown'
        is not recommended.
        </p>
H
Update documentation of watchdog dump option and add test data for it  
Hu Tao 已提交
7625 7626 7627 7628 
        <p>
        Note 2: the directory to save dump files can be configured
        by <code>auto_dump_path</code> in file /etc/libvirt/qemu.conf.
        </p>
R
Support QEMU watchdog device.  
Richard Jones 已提交
7629 7630 7631 
      </dd>
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7632 
    <h4><a id="elementsMemBalloon">Memory balloon device</a></h4>
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7633 7634 7635 7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 

    <p>
      A virtual memory balloon device is added to all Xen and KVM/QEMU
      guests. It will be seen as <code>memballoon</code> element.
      It will be automatically added when appropriate, so there is no
      need to explicitly add this element in the guest XML unless a
      specific PCI slot needs to be assigned.
      <span class="since">Since 0.8.3, Xen, QEMU and KVM only</span>
E
docs: document how to disable memballoon  
Eric Blake 已提交
7641 7642 7643 
      Additionally, <span class="since">since 0.8.4</span>, if the
      memballoon device needs to be explicitly disabled,
      <code>model='none'</code> may be used.
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7644 7645 7646 
    </p>

    <p>
J
docs: fix memballoon examples  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7647 
      Example: automatically added device with KVM
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7648 7649 
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7650 7651 7652 7653 7654 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;memballoon model='virtio'/&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7655 7656 

    <p>
J
docs: fix memballoon examples  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7657 
      Example: manually added device with static PCI slot 2 requested
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7658 7659 7660 7661 
    </p>
<pre>
  ...
  &lt;devices&gt;
J
docs: fix memballoon examples  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7662 7663 
    &lt;memballoon model='virtio'&gt;
      &lt;address type='pci' domain='0x0000' bus='0x00' slot='0x02' function='0x0'/&gt;
J
Add 'period' for Memballoon statistics gathering capability  
John Ferlan 已提交
7664 
      &lt;stats period='10'/&gt;
J
add virtio-related options to memballoon  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7665 
      &lt;driver iommu='on' ats='on'/&gt;
J
docs: fix memballoon examples  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7666 
    &lt;/memballoon&gt;
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 7672 7673 7674 
  &lt;/devices&gt;
&lt;/domain&gt;</pre>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The required <code>model</code> attribute specifies what type
E
maint: whitespace cleanup  
Eric Blake 已提交
7675 7676 
          of balloon device is provided. Valid values are specific to
          the virtualization platform
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7677 7678 
        </p>
        <ul>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7679 7680 
          <li>'virtio' - default with QEMU/KVM</li>
          <li>'xen' - default with Xen</li>
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7681 7682 
        </ul>
      </dd>
D
conf: introduce 'autodeflate' attribute for memballoon device  
Dmitry Andreev 已提交
7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7688 7689 7690 7691 7692 
      <dt><code>autodeflate</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The optional <code>autodeflate</code> attribute allows to
          enable/disable (values "on"/"off", respectively) the ability of the
          QEMU virtio memory balloon to release some memory at the last moment
          before a guest's process get killed by Out of Memory killer.
          <span class="since">Since 1.3.1, QEMU and KVM only</span>
        </p>
      </dd>
J
Add 'period' for Memballoon statistics gathering capability  
John Ferlan 已提交
7693 7694 7695 
      <dt><code>period</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
M
conf: Use correct type for balloon stats period  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 
          The optional <code>period</code> allows the QEMU virtio memory balloon
          driver to provide statistics through the <code>virsh dommemstat
          [domain]</code> command. By default, collection is not enabled. In
          order to enable, use the <code>virsh dommemstat [domain] --period
          [number]</code> command or <code>virsh edit</code> command to add the
          option to the XML definition.  The <code>virsh dommemstat</code> will
          accept the options <code>--live</code>, <code>--current</code>,
          or <code>--config</code>.  If an option is not provided, the change
          for a running domain will only be made to the active guest.  If the
          QEMU driver is not at the right revision, the attempt to set the
          period will fail.  Large values (e.g. many years) might be ignored.
J
Add 'period' for Memballoon statistics gathering capability  
John Ferlan 已提交
7707 7708 7709 
          <span class='since'>Since 1.1.1, requires QEMU 1.5</span>
        </p>
      </dd>
J
add virtio-related options to memballoon  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 
      <dt><code>driver</code></dt>
      <dd>
        For model <code>virtio</code> memballoon,
        <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
        set. (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
      </dd>
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7716 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7717 
    <h4><a id="elementsRng">Random number generator device</a></h4>
P
doc: schema: Add basic documentation for the virtual RNG device support  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 

    <p>
      The virtual random number generator device allows the host to pass
      through entropy to guest operating systems.
      <span class="since">Since 1.0.3</span>
    </p>

    <p>
      Example: usage of the RNG device:
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736 7737 7738 7739 7740 7741 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;rng model='virtio'&gt;
    &lt;rate period="2000" bytes="1234"/&gt;
    &lt;backend model='random'&gt;/dev/random&lt;/backend&gt;
    &lt;!-- OR --&gt;
    &lt;backend model='egd' type='udp'&gt;
      &lt;source mode='bind' service='1234'/&gt;
      &lt;source mode='connect' host='1.2.3.4' service='1234'/&gt;
    &lt;/backend&gt;
  &lt;/rng&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
P
doc: schema: Add basic documentation for the virtual RNG device support  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 
</pre>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The required <code>model</code> attribute specifies what type
          of RNG device is provided. Valid values are specific to
          the virtualization platform:
        </p>
        <ul>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7752 
          <li>'virtio' - supported by qemu and virtio-rng kernel module</li>
P
doc: schema: Add basic documentation for the virtual RNG device support  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7753 7754 
        </ul>
      </dd>
P
virtio-rng: Add rate limiting options for virtio-RNG  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7755 7756 7757 7758 7759 7760 7761 7762 7763 7764 7765 7766 
      <dt><code>rate</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The optional <code>rate</code> element allows limiting the rate at
          which entropy can be consumed from the source.  The mandatory
          attribute <code>bytes</code> specifies how many bytes are permitted
          to be consumed per period.  An optional <code>period</code> attribute
          specifies the duration of a period in milliseconds; if omitted, the
          period is taken as 1000 milliseconds (1 second).
          <span class='since'>Since 1.0.4</span>
        </p>
      </dd>
P
doc: schema: Add basic documentation for the virtual RNG device support  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7767 7768 7769 7770 7771 7772 7773 
      <dt><code>backend</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The <code>backend</code> element specifies the source of entropy
          to be used for the domain. The source model is configured using the
          <code>model</code> attribute. Supported source models are:
        </p>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7774 7775 7776 7777 
        <dl>
          <dt><code>random</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
K
docs: formatdomain: Mention that 'urandom' is the recommended RNG backend  
Kashyap Chamarthy 已提交
7778 7779 7780 7781 7782 7783 7784 7785 7786 7787 
              This backend type expects a non-blocking character device
              as input. The file name is specified as contents of the
              <code>backend</code> element. <span class='since'>Since
              1.3.4</span> any path is accepted. Before that
              <code>/dev/random</code> and <code>/dev/hwrng</code> were
              the only accepted paths. When no file name is specified,
              the hypervisor default is used. For QEMU, the default is
              <code>/dev/random</code>. However, the recommended source
              of entropy is <code>/dev/urandom</code> (as it doesn't
              have the limitations of <code>/dev/random</code>).
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7788 7789 7790 7791 7792 7793 7794 7795 7796 7797 7798 7799 
            </p>
          </dd>
          <dt><code>egd</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              This backend connects to a source using the EGD protocol.
              The source is specified as a character device. Refer to
              <a href='#elementsCharHostInterface'>character device host interface</a>
              for more information.
            </p>
          </dd>
        </dl>
P
doc: schema: Add basic documentation for the virtual RNG device support  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7800 
      </dd>
J
Add virtio-related options to rng devices  
Ján Tomko 已提交
7801 7802 7803 7804 7805 7806 7807 7808 7809 7810 7811 
      <dt><code>driver</code></dt>
      <dd>
        The subelement <code>driver</code> can be used to tune the device:
        <dl>
          <dt>virtio options</dt>
          <dd>
          <a href="#elementsVirtio">Virtio-specific options</a> can also be
          set. (<span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span>)
          </dd>
        </dl>
      </dd>
P
doc: schema: Add basic documentation for the virtual RNG device support  
Peter Krempa 已提交
7812 7813 

    </dl>
D
Document the memory balloon device  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7814
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7815 
    <h4><a id="elementsTpm">TPM device</a></h4>
S
Add documentation and schema for TPM passthrough  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7816 7817 7818 

    <p>
      The TPM device enables a QEMU guest to have access to TPM
S
conf: Enable TPM CRB interface in the domain XML  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7819 
      functionality. The TPM device may either be a TPM 1.2 or
S
conf: Add support for choosing emulation of a TPM 2.0  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7820 
      a TPM 2.0.
S
Add documentation and schema for TPM passthrough  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7821 7822 7823 
    </p>
    <p>
      The TPM passthrough device type provides access to the host's TPM
M
docs: fix simple typo in TPM paragraph  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
7824 
      for one QEMU guest. No other software may be using the TPM device,
S
Add documentation and schema for TPM passthrough  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7825 7826 7827 7828 7829 7830 7831 7832 
      typically /dev/tpm0, at the time the QEMU guest is started.
      <span class="since">'passthrough' since 1.0.5</span>
    </p>

    <p>
     Example: usage of the TPM passthrough device
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7833 7834 7835 7836 7837 7838 7839 7840 7841 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;tpm model='tpm-tis'&gt;
    &lt;backend type='passthrough'&gt;
      &lt;device path='/dev/tpm0'/&gt;
    &lt;/backend&gt;
  &lt;/tpm&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
S
conf: Add support for external swtpm TPM emulator to domain XML  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7842 7843 7844 7845 7846 7847 7848 7849 7850 7851 7852 7853 7854 7855 7856 
</pre>

    <p>
      The emulator device type gives access to a TPM emulator providing
      TPM functionality for each VM. QEMU talks to it over a Unix socket. With
      the emulator device type each guest gets its own private TPM.
      <span class="since">'emulator' since 4.5.0</span>
    </p>
    <p>
     Example: usage of the TPM Emulator
    </p>
<pre>
  ...
  &lt;devices&gt;
    &lt;tpm model='tpm-tis'&gt;
S
conf: Add support for choosing emulation of a TPM 2.0  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7857 
      &lt;backend type='emulator' version='2.0'&gt;
S
conf: Add support for external swtpm TPM emulator to domain XML  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7858 7859 7860 7861 
      &lt;/backend&gt;
    &lt;/tpm&gt;
  &lt;/devices&gt;
  ...
S
Add documentation and schema for TPM passthrough  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7862 7863 7864 7865 7866 7867 7868 7869 
</pre>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The <code>model</code> attribute specifies what device
          model QEMU provides to the guest. If no model name is provided,
          <code>tpm-tis</code> will automatically be chosen.
S
conf: Enable TPM CRB interface in the domain XML  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7870 7871 
          <span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span>, another available choice
          is the <code>tpm-crb</code>, which should only be used when the
S
conf: Add support for choosing emulation of a TPM 2.0  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7872 
          backend device is a TPM 2.0.
S
Add documentation and schema for TPM passthrough  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7873 7874 7875 7876 7877 7878 7879 7880 
        </p>
      </dd>
      <dt><code>backend</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The <code>backend</code> element specifies the type of
          TPM device. The following types are supported:
        </p>
A
docs: Fix some formatting oddities  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7881 7882 7883 7884 7885 7886 7887 7888 7889 7890 7891 7892 7893 7894 7895 
        <dl>
          <dt><code>passthrough</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              Use the host's TPM device.
            </p>
            <p>
              This backend type requires exclusive access to a TPM device on
              the host. An example for such a device is /dev/tpm0. The fully
              qualified file name is specified by path attribute of the
              <code>source</code> element. If no file name is specified then
              /dev/tpm0 is automatically used.
            </p>
          </dd>
        </dl>
S
conf: Add support for external swtpm TPM emulator to domain XML  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7896 7897 7898 7899 7900 7901 7902 7903 7904 7905 
        <dl>
          <dt><code>emulator</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              For this backend type the 'swtpm' TPM Emulator must be installed on the
              host. Libvirt will automatically start an independent TPM emulator
              for each QEMU guest requesting access to it.
            </p>
          </dd>
        </dl>
S
Add documentation and schema for TPM passthrough  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7906 
      </dd>
S
conf: Add support for choosing emulation of a TPM 2.0  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7907 7908 7909 7910 7911 7912 7913 7914 7915 7916 7917 7918 7919 
      <dt><code>version</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The <code>version</code> attribute indicates the version
          of the TPM. By default a TPM 1.2 is created. This attribute
          only works with the <code>emulator</code> backend. The following
          versions are supported:
        </p>
        <ul>
          <li>'1.2' : creates a TPM 1.2</li>
          <li>'2.0' : creates a TPM 2.0</li>
        </ul>
      </dd>
S
Add documentation and schema for TPM passthrough  
Stefan Berger 已提交
7920 7921 
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7922 
    <h4><a id="elementsNVRAM">NVRAM device</a></h4>
L
Add NVRAM device  
Li Zhang 已提交
7923 7924 7925 7926 7927 7928 7929 7930 7931 7932 
    <p>
      nvram device is always added to pSeries guest on PPC64, and its address
      is allowed to be changed.  Element <code>nvram</code> (only valid for
      pSeries guest, <span class="since">since 1.0.5</span>) is provided to
      enable the address setting.
    </p>
    <p>
      Example: usage of NVRAM configuration
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7933 7934 7935 7936 7937 7938 7939 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;nvram&gt;
    &lt;address type='spapr-vio' reg='0x3000'/&gt;
  &lt;/nvram&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
L
Add NVRAM device  
Li Zhang 已提交
7940 7941 7942 7943 7944 7945 7946 7947 7948 7949 7950 7951 7952 7953 7954 7955 
</pre>
  <dl>
    <dt><code>spapr-vio</code></dt>
    <dd>
      <p>
        VIO device address type, only valid for PPC64.
      </p>
    </dd>
    <dt><code>reg</code></dt>
    <dd>
      <p>
        Device address
      </p>
    </dd>
  </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7956 
    <h4><a id="elementsPanic">panic device</a></h4>
H
conf: add support for panic device  
Hu Tao 已提交
7957 7958 7959 7960 7961 
    <p>
      panic device enables libvirt to receive panic notification from a QEMU
      guest.
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.1, QEMU and KVM only</span>
    </p>
A
qemu: Automatically add <panic> element for pSeries guests.  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7962 
    <p>
B
qemu: add panic device support for S390  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
7963 7964 7965 7966 7967 7968 7969 7970 7971 
      This feature is always enabled for:
    </p>
    <ul>
      <li>pSeries guests, since it's implemented by the guest firmware</li>
      <li>S390 guests, since it's an integral part of the S390 architecture</li>
    </ul>
    <p>
      For the guest types listed above, libvirt automatically adds a
      <code>panic</code> element to the domain XML.
A
qemu: Automatically add <panic> element for pSeries guests.  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
7972 
    </p>
H
conf: add support for panic device  
Hu Tao 已提交
7973 7974 7975 7976 
    <p>
      Example: usage of panic configuration
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
7977 7978 7979 7980 7981 7982 7983 7984 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;panic model='hyperv'/&gt;
  &lt;panic model='isa'&gt;
    &lt;address type='isa' iobase='0x505'/&gt;
  &lt;/panic&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
H
conf: add support for panic device  
Hu Tao 已提交
7985 7986 
</pre>
  <dl>
D
conf: add 'model' attribute for panic device with values isa, pseries, hyperv  
Dmitry Andreev 已提交
7987 7988 7989 7990 7991 7992 7993 7994 
    <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The optional <code>model</code> attribute specifies what type
          of panic device is provided. The panic model used when this attribute
          is missing depends on the hypervisor and guest arch.
        </p>
        <ul>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7995 7996 7997 
          <li>'isa' - for ISA pvpanic device</li>
          <li>'pseries' - default and valid only for pSeries guests.</li>
          <li>'hyperv' - for Hyper-V crash CPU feature.
D
conf: add 'model' attribute for panic device with values isa, pseries, hyperv  
Dmitry Andreev 已提交
7998 
            <span class="since">Since 1.3.0, QEMU and KVM only</span></li>
D
docs: remove use of &mdash; entity  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
7999 
          <li>'s390' - default for S390 guests.
B
qemu: add panic device support for S390  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
8000 
            <span class="since">Since 1.3.5</span></li>
D
conf: add 'model' attribute for panic device with values isa, pseries, hyperv  
Dmitry Andreev 已提交
8001 8002 
        </ul>
      </dd>
H
conf: add support for panic device  
Hu Tao 已提交
8003 8004 8005 8006 
    <dt><code>address</code></dt>
    <dd>
      <p>
        address of panic. The default ioport is 0x505. Most users
A
qemu: Allow panic device for pSeries guests  
Andrea Bolognani 已提交
8007 
        don't need to specify an address, and doing so is forbidden
B
qemu: add panic device support for S390  
Boris Fiuczynski 已提交
8008 
        altogether for s390, pseries and hyperv models.
H
conf: add support for panic device  
Hu Tao 已提交
8009 8010 8011 8012 
      </p>
    </dd>
  </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8013 
  <h4><a id="elementsShmem">Shared memory device</a></h4>
M
docs, conf, schema: add support for shmem device  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8014 8015 8016 8017 

    <p>
      A shared memory device allows to share a memory region between
      different virtual machines and the host.
M
minor shmem clean-ups  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8018 
      <span class="since">Since 1.2.10, QEMU and KVM only</span>
M
docs, conf, schema: add support for shmem device  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8019 8020 8021 
    </p>

<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 8028 8029 8030 8031 8032 8033 8034 8035 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;shmem name='my_shmem0'&gt;
    &lt;model type='ivshmem-plain'/&gt;
    &lt;size unit='M'&gt;4&lt;/size&gt;
  &lt;/shmem&gt;
  &lt;shmem name='shmem_server'&gt;
    &lt;model type='ivshmem-doorbell'/&gt;
    &lt;size unit='M'&gt;2&lt;/size&gt;
    &lt;server path='/tmp/socket-shmem'/&gt;
    &lt;msi vectors='32' ioeventfd='on'/&gt;
  &lt;/shmem&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
M
docs, conf, schema: add support for shmem device  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8036 8037 8038 8039 8040 8041 8042 8043 
</pre>

  <dl>
    <dt><code>shmem</code></dt>
    <dd>
      The <code>shmem</code> element has one mandatory attribute,
      <code>name</code> to identify the shared memory.
    </dd>
M
conf, qemu: Add support for shmem model  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8044 8045 8046 8047 
    <dt><code>model</code></dt>
    <dd>
      Attribute <code>type</code> of the optional element <code>model</code>
      specifies the model of the underlying device providing the
M
conf, qemu: Add newer shmem models  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8048 8049 8050 8051 8052 
      <code>shmem</code> device.  The models currently supported are
      <code>ivshmem</code> (supports both server and server-less shmem, but is
      deprecated by newer QEMU in favour of the -plain and -doorbell variants),
      <code>ivshmem-plain</code> (only for server-less shmem) and
      <code>ivshmem-doorbell</code> (only for shmem with the server).
M
conf, qemu: Add support for shmem model  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8053 
    </dd>
M
docs, conf, schema: add support for shmem device  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8054 8055 8056 8057 8058 8059 8060 8061 8062 
    <dt><code>size</code></dt>
    <dd>
      The optional <code>size</code> element specifies the size of the shared
      memory. This must be power of 2 and greater than or equal to 1 MiB.
    </dd>
    <dt><code>server</code></dt>
    <dd>
      The optional <code>server</code> element can be used to configure a server
      socket the device is supposed to connect to.  The optional
E
doc: Add info (where necessary) that paths should be specified as absolute  
Erik Skultety 已提交
8063 8064 
      <code>path</code> attribute specifies the absolute path to the unix socket
      and defaults to <code>/var/lib/libvirt/shmem/$shmem-$name-sock</code>.
M
docs, conf, schema: add support for shmem device  
Martin Kletzander 已提交
8065 8066 8067 8068 8069 8070 8071 8072 8073 8074 8075 8076 
    </dd>
    <dt><code>msi</code></dt>
    <dd>
      The optional <code>msi</code> element enables/disables (values "on"/"off",
      respectively) MSI interrupts. This option can currently be used only
      together with the <code>server</code> element. The <code>vectors</code>
      attribute can be used to specify the number of interrupt
      vectors. The <code>ioeventd</code> attribute enables/disables (values
      "on"/"off", respectively) ioeventfd.
    </dd>
  </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8077 
    <h4><a id="elementsMemory">Memory devices</a></h4>
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8078 8079 8080 8081 8082 8083 8084 8085 8086 8087 8088 8089 8090 8091 8092 8093 

    <p>
        In addition to the initial memory assigned to the guest, memory devices
        allow additional memory to be assigned to the guest in the form of
        memory modules.

        A memory device can be hot-plugged or hot-unplugged depending on the
        guests' memory resource needs.

        Some hypervisors may require NUMA configured for the guest.
    </p>

    <p>
      Example: usage of the memory devices
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8094 8095 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
M
conf: Introduce memoryBacking/discard  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8096 
  &lt;memory model='dimm' access='private' discard='yes'&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8097 8098 8099 8100 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8108 8109 8110 8111 
    &lt;target&gt;
      &lt;size unit='KiB'&gt;524287&lt;/size&gt;
      &lt;node&gt;0&lt;/node&gt;
    &lt;/target&gt;
  &lt;/memory&gt;
  &lt;memory model='dimm'&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
      &lt;pagesize unit='KiB'&gt;4096&lt;/pagesize&gt;
      &lt;nodemask&gt;1-3&lt;/nodemask&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target&gt;
      &lt;size unit='KiB'&gt;524287&lt;/size&gt;
      &lt;node&gt;1&lt;/node&gt;
    &lt;/target&gt;
  &lt;/memory&gt;
M
Introduce NVDIMM memory model  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8112 8113 8114 8115 8116 8117 8118 
  &lt;memory model='nvdimm'&gt;
    &lt;source&gt;
      &lt;path&gt;/tmp/nvdimm&lt;/path&gt;
    &lt;/source&gt;
    &lt;target&gt;
      &lt;size unit='KiB'&gt;524288&lt;/size&gt;
      &lt;node&gt;1&lt;/node&gt;
M
qemu: Introduce label-size for NVDIMMs  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8119 8120 8121 
      &lt;label&gt;
        &lt;size unit='KiB'&gt;128&lt;/size&gt;
      &lt;/label&gt;
M
Introduce NVDIMM memory model  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8122 8123 
    &lt;/target&gt;
  &lt;/memory&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8124 8125 
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8126 8127 8128 8129 8130 
</pre>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
M
Introduce NVDIMM memory model  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8131 8132 8133 8134 
          Provide <code>dimm</code> to add a virtual DIMM module to the guest.
          <span class="since">Since 1.2.14</span>
          Provide <code>nvdimm</code> model adds a Non-Volatile DIMM
          module. <span class="since">Since 3.2.0</span>
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8135 8136 8137 
        </p>
      </dd>
M
conf: Introduce @access to <memory/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8138 8139 8140 8141 8142 8143 8144 8145 8146 8147 8148 8149 
      <dt><code>access</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          An optional attribute <code>access</code>
          (<span class="since">since 3.2.0</span>) that provides
          capability to fine tune mapping of the memory on per
          module basis. Values are the same as
          <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a>:
          <code>shared</code> and <code>private</code>.
        </p>
      </dd>
M
conf: Introduce memoryBacking/discard  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8150 8151 8152 8153 8154 8155 8156 8157 8158 8159 8160 8161 8162 8163 
      <dt><code>discard</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          An optional attribute <code>discard</code>
          (<span class="since">since 4.4.0</span>) that provides
          capability to fine tune discard of data on per module
          basis. Accepted values are <code>yes</code> and
          <code>no</code>. The feature is described here:
          <a href="#elementsMemoryBacking">Memory Backing</a>.
          This attribute is allowed only for
          <code>model='dimm'</code>.
        </p>
      </dd>
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8164 8165 8166 
      <dt><code>source</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
M
Introduce NVDIMM memory model  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8167 8168 8169 8170 8171 
          For model <code>dimm</code> this element is optional and allows to
          fine tune the source of the memory used for the given memory device.
          If the element is not provided defaults configured via
          <code>numatune</code> are used. If <code>dimm</code> is provided,
          then the following optional elements can be provided as well:
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8172 8173 
        </p>
M
Introduce NVDIMM memory model  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8174 8175 8176 8177 8178 8179 8180 8181 8182 8183 8184 8185 8186 8187 8188 8189 8190 8191 8192 8193 8194 
        <dl>
          <dt><code>pagesize</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              This element can be used to override the default
              host page size used for backing the memory device.
              The configured value must correspond to a page size
              supported by the host.
            </p>
          </dd>

          <dt><code>nodemask</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              This element can be used to override the default
              set of NUMA nodes where the memory would be
              allocated.
            </p>
          </dd>
        </dl>
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8195 
        <p>
M
Introduce NVDIMM memory model  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8196 8197 8198 
          For model <code>nvdimm</code> this element is mandatory and has a
          single child element <code>path</code> that represents a path
          in the host that backs the nvdimm module in the guest.
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8199 8200 8201 8202 8203 8204 8205 8206 8207 8208 8209 8210 8211 8212 
        </p>
      </dd>

      <dt><code>target</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The mandatory <code>target</code> element configures the placement and
          sizing of the added memory from the perspective of the guest.
        </p>
        <p>
          The mandatory <code>size</code> subelement configures the size of the
          added memory as a scaled integer.
        </p>
        <p>
P
conf: Prepare making memory device target node optional  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8213 8214 8215 
          The <code>node</code> subelement configures the guest NUMA node to
          attach the memory to. The element shall be used only if the guest has
          NUMA nodes configured.
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8216 
        </p>
M
qemu: Introduce label-size for NVDIMMs  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8217 8218 8219 8220 8221 8222 8223 8224 8225 8226 8227 8228 8229 8230 
        <p>
          For NVDIMM type devices one can optionally use
          <code>label</code> and its subelement <code>size</code>
          to configure the size of namespaces label storage
          within the NVDIMM module. The <code>size</code> element
          has usual meaning described
          <a href="#elementsMemoryAllocation">here</a>.
          For QEMU domains the following restrictions apply:
        </p>
        <ol>
          <li>the minimum label size is 128KiB,</li>
          <li>the remaining size (total-size - label-size) has to be aligned to
            4KiB</li>
        </ol>
P
conf: Add interface to parse and format memory device information  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8231 8232 8233 
      </dd>
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8234 
    <h4><a id="elementsIommu">IOMMU devices</a></h4>
J
Introduce <iommu> device  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8235 8236 8237 8238 8239 8240 8241 8242 8243 8244 

    <p>
      The <code>iommu</code> element can be used to add an IOMMU device.
      <span class="since">Since 2.1.0</span>
    </p>

    <p>
      Example:
    </p>
<pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8245 8246 
...
&lt;devices&gt;
J
conf: add <driver intremap> to <iommu>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8247 8248 8249 
  &lt;iommu model='intel'&gt;
    &lt;driver intremap='on'/&gt;
  &lt;/iommu&gt;
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8250 8251 
&lt;/devices&gt;
...
J
Introduce <iommu> device  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 8259 
</pre>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          Currently only the <code>intel</code> model is supported.
        </p>
      </dd>
J
conf: add <driver intremap> to <iommu>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 8265 8266 8267 8268 8269 8270 8271 8272 8273 8274 8275 8276 8277 
      <dt><code>driver</code></dt>
      <dd>
        <p>
          The <code>driver</code> subelement can be used to configure
          additional options:
        </p>
        <dl>
          <dt><code>intremap</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              The <code>intremap</code> attribute with possible values
              <code>on</code> and <code>off</code> can be used to
              turn on interrupt remapping, a part of the VT-d functionality.
              Currently this requires split I/O APIC
              (<code>&lt;ioapic driver='qemu'/&gt;</code>).
              <span class="since">Since 3.4.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only)
            </p>
          </dd>
J
conf: add caching_mode attribute to iommu device  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8278 8279 8280 8281 8282 8283 8284 8285 8286 
          <dt><code>caching_mode</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              The <code>caching_mode</code> attribute with possible values
              <code>on</code> and <code>off</code> can be used to
              turn on the VT-d caching mode (useful for assigned devices).
              <span class="since">Since 3.4.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only)
            </p>
          </dd>
J
conf: add eim attribute to <iommu><driver>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8287 8288 8289 8290 8291 8292 8293 8294 8295 8296 8297 8298 8299 
          <dt><code>eim</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              The <code>eim</code> attribute (with possible values
              <code>on</code> and <code>off</code>) can be used to
              configure Extended Interrupt Mode. A q35 domain with
              split I/O APIC (as described in
              <a href="#elementsFeatures">hypervisor features</a>),
              and both interrupt remapping and EIM turned on for
              the IOMMU, will be able to use more than 255 vCPUs.
              <span class="since">Since 3.4.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only)
            </p>
          </dd>
J
conf: add iotlb attribute to iommu  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8300 8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 8306 8307 8308 8309 
          <dt><code>iotlb</code></dt>
          <dd>
            <p>
              The <code>iotlb</code> attribute with possible values
              <code>on</code> and <code>off</code> can be used to
              turn on the IOTLB used to cache address translation
              requests from devices.
              <span class="since">Since 3.5.0</span> (QEMU/KVM only)
            </p>
          </dd>
J
conf: add <driver intremap> to <iommu>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8310 8311 
        </dl>
      </dd>
J
Introduce <iommu> device  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8312 8313 
    </dl>
J
conf: introduce <vsock> element  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8314 8315 8316 8317 
    <h3><a id="vsock">Vsock</a></h3>

    <p>A vsock host/guest interface. The <code>model</code> attribute
    defaults to <code>virtio</code>.
J
conf: rename <vsock><source> to <vsock><cid>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8318 8319 
    The optional attribute <code>address</code> of the <code>cid</code>
    element specifies the CID assigned to the guest. If the attribute
J
conf: introduce <vsock> element  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8320 8321 8322 8323 8324 8325 8326 8327 
    <code>auto</code> is set to <code>yes</code>, libvirt
    will assign a free CID automatically on domain startup.
    <span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span></p>

<pre>
...
&lt;devices&gt;
  &lt;vsock model='virtio'&gt;
J
conf: rename <vsock><source> to <vsock><cid>  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8328 
    &lt;cid auto='no' address='3'/&gt;
J
conf: introduce <vsock> element  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8329 8330 8331 8332 8333 
  &lt;/vsock&gt;
&lt;/devices&gt;
...</pre>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8334 
    <h3><a id="seclabel">Security label</a></h3>
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8335 8336 8337 

    <p>
      The <code>seclabel</code> element allows control over the
D
Add two new security label types  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8338 8339 8340 8341 8342 
      operation of the security drivers. There are three basic
      modes of operation, 'dynamic' where libvirt automatically
      generates a unique security label, 'static' where the
      application/administrator chooses the labels, or 'none'
      where confinement is disabled. With dynamic
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8343 8344 8345 8346 8347 
      label generation, libvirt will always automatically
      relabel any resources associated with the virtual machine.
      With static label assignment, by default, the administrator
      or application must ensure labels are set correctly on any
      resources, however, automatic relabeling can be enabled
D
Add two new security label types  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8348 8349 
      if desired.  <span class="since">'dynamic' since 0.6.1, 'static'
      since 0.6.2, and 'none' since 0.9.10.</span>
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8350 8351 
    </p>
M
Multiple security drivers in XML data  
Marcelo Cerri 已提交
8352 8353 8354 8355 8356 8357 8358 
    <p>
      If more than one security driver is used by libvirt, multiple
      <code>seclabel</code> tags can be used, one for each driver and
      the security driver referenced by each tag can be defined using
      the attribute <code>model</code>
    </p>
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8359 
    <p>
E
seclabel: extend XML to allow per-disk label overrides  
Eric Blake 已提交
8360 
      Valid input XML configurations for the top-level security label
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8361 8362 8363 8364 
      are:
    </p>

    <pre>
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8365 
&lt;seclabel type='dynamic' model='selinux'/&gt;
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8366
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8367 8368 8369 
&lt;seclabel type='dynamic' model='selinux'&gt;
  &lt;baselabel&gt;system_u:system_r:my_svirt_t:s0&lt;/baselabel&gt;
&lt;/seclabel&gt;
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8370
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8371 8372 8373 
&lt;seclabel type='static' model='selinux' relabel='no'&gt;
  &lt;label&gt;system_u:system_r:svirt_t:s0:c392,c662&lt;/label&gt;
&lt;/seclabel&gt;
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8374
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8375 8376 8377 
&lt;seclabel type='static' model='selinux' relabel='yes'&gt;
  &lt;label&gt;system_u:system_r:svirt_t:s0:c392,c662&lt;/label&gt;
&lt;/seclabel&gt;
D
Add two new security label types  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8378
M
formatdomain.html.in: Kill useless spaces in <pre/>  
Michal Privoznik 已提交
8379 
&lt;seclabel type='none'/&gt;
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8380 8381 
    </pre>
D
Add two new security label types  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8382 8383 8384 8385 8386 8387 8388 
    <p>
      If no 'type' attribute is provided in the input XML, then
      the security driver default setting will be used, which
      may be either 'none' or 'dynamic'. If a 'baselabel' is set
      but no 'type' is set, then the type is presumed to be 'dynamic'
    </p>
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8389 8390 8391 8392 8393 8394 8395 8396 8397 
    <p>
      When viewing the XML for a running guest with automatic
      resource relabeling active, an additional XML element,
      <code>imagelabel</code>, will be included. This is an
      output-only element, so will be ignored in user supplied
      XML documents
    </p>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>type</code></dt>
D
Add two new security label types  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8398 8399 8400 
      <dd>Either <code>static</code>, <code>dynamic</code> or <code>none</code>
        to determine whether libvirt automatically generates a unique security
        label or not.
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8401 8402 8403 8404 8405 8406 8407 8408 8409 8410 8411 8412 8413 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>model</code></dt>
      <dd>A valid security model name, matching the currently
        activated security model
      </dd>
      <dt><code>relabel</code></dt>
      <dd>Either <code>yes</code> or <code>no</code>. This must always
        be <code>yes</code> if dynamic label assignment is used. With
        static label assignment it will default to <code>no</code>.
      </dd>
      <dt><code>label</code></dt>
      <dd>If static labelling is used, this must specify the full
        security label to assign to the virtual domain. The format
M
doc: update description about security labels on formatdomain.html  
Marcelo Cerri 已提交
8414 8415 8416 8417 8418 8419 8420 8421 8422 8423 8424 
        of the content depends on the security driver in use:
        <ul>
          <li>SELinux: a SELinux context.</li>
          <li>AppArmor: an AppArmor profile.</li>
          <li>
            DAC: owner and group separated by colon. They can be
            defined both as user/group names or uid/gid. The driver will first
            try to parse these values as names, but a leading plus sign can
            used to force the driver to parse them as uid or gid.
          </li>
        </ul>
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8425 8426 8427 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>baselabel</code></dt>
      <dd>If dynamic labelling is used, this can optionally be
P
doc: Clarify usage of SELinux baselabel  
Peter Krempa 已提交
8428 8429 8430 8431 8432 8433 8434 8435 8436 8437 
        used to specify the base security label that will be used to generate
        the actual label. The format of the content depends on the security
        driver in use.

        The SELinux driver uses only the <code>type</code> field of the
        baselabel in the generated label. Other fields are inherited from
        the parent process when using SELinux baselabels.

        (The example above demonstrates the use of <code>my_svirt_t</code>
        as the value for the <code>type</code> field.)
D
Add documentation for the seclabel XML element  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8438 8439 8440 8441 8442 8443 8444 8445 
      </dd>
      <dt><code>imagelabel</code></dt>
      <dd>This is an output only element, which shows the
        security label used on resources associated with the virtual domain.
        The format of the content depends on the security driver in use
      </dd>
    </dl>
E
seclabel: extend XML to allow per-disk label overrides  
Eric Blake 已提交
8446 8447 8448 8449 8450 8451 8452 8453 8454 8455 
    <p>When relabeling is in effect, it is also possible to fine-tune
      the labeling done for specific source file names, by either
      disabling the labeling (useful if the file lives on NFS or other
      file system that lacks security labeling) or requesting an
      alternate label (useful when a management application creates a
      special label to allow sharing of some, but not all, resources
      between domains), <span class="since">since 0.9.9</span>.  When
      a <code>seclabel</code> element is attached to a specific path
      rather than the top-level domain assignment, only the
      attribute <code>relabel</code> or the
E
selinux: distinguish failure to label from request to avoid label  
Eric Blake 已提交
8456 8457 8458 8459 8460 
      sub-element <code>label</code> are supported.  Additionally,
      <span class="since">since 1.1.2</span>, an output-only
      element <code>labelskip</code> will be present for active
      domains on disks where labeling was skipped due to the image
      being on a file system that lacks security labeling.
E
seclabel: extend XML to allow per-disk label overrides  
Eric Blake 已提交
8461 8462 
    </p>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8463 
    <h3><a id="keywrap">Key Wrap</a></h3>
T
libvirt: Introduce protected key mgmt ops  
Tony Krowiak 已提交
8464 8465 8466 8467 8468 8469 8470 8471 8472 8473 8474 8475 8476 8477 8478 8479 8480 8481 8482 8483 8484 8485 8486 8487 8488 8489 8490 8491 8492 8493 8494 8495 8496 8497 8498 8499 8500 8501 

       <p>The content of the optional <code>keywrap</code> element specifies
        whether the guest will be allowed to perform the S390 cryptographic key
        management operations. A clear key can be protected by encrypting it
        under a unique wrapping key that is generated for each guest VM running
        on the host. Two variations of wrapping keys are generated: one version
        for encrypting protected keys using the DEA/TDEA algorithm, and another
        version for keys encrypted using the AES algorithm. If a
        <code>keywrap</code> element is not included, the guest will be granted
        access to both AES and DEA/TDEA key wrapping by default.</p>

        <pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
  &lt;keywrap&gt;
    &lt;cipher name='aes' state='off'/&gt;
  &lt;/keywrap&gt;
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>
    <p>
      At least one <code>cipher</code> element must be nested within the
      <code>keywrap</code> element.
    </p>
    <dl>
      <dt><code>cipher</code></dt>
      <dd>The <code>name</code> attribute identifies the algorithm
        for encrypting a protected key. The values supported for this attribute
        are <code>aes</code> for encryption under the AES wrapping key, or
        <code>dea</code> for encryption under the DEA/TDEA wrapping key. The
        <code>state</code> attribute indicates whether the cryptographic key
        management operations should be turned on for the specified encryption
        algorithm. The value can be set to <code>on</code> or <code>off</code>.
      </dd>
    </dl>

    <p>Note: DEA/TDEA is synonymous with DES/TDES.</p>
J
conf: prefer camelCase for launchSecurity  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8502 
    <h3><a id="sev">Launch Security</a></h3>
B
conf: Introduce launch-security element in domain  
Brijesh Singh 已提交
8503 8504 

    <p>
J
conf: prefer camelCase for launchSecurity  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8505 
       The contents of the <code>&lt;launchSecurity type='sev'&gt;</code> element
B
conf: Introduce launch-security element in domain  
Brijesh Singh 已提交
8506 
       is used to provide the guest owners input used for creating an encrypted
J
conf: prefer camelCase for launchSecurity  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8507 
       VM using the AMD SEV feature (Secure Encrypted Virtualization).
B
conf: Introduce launch-security element in domain  
Brijesh Singh 已提交
8508 8509 8510 8511 8512 8513 8514 8515 8516 8517 8518 8519 8520 8521 8522 8523 

       SEV is an extension to the AMD-V architecture which supports running
       encrypted virtual machine (VMs) under the control of KVM. Encrypted
       VMs have their pages (code and data) secured such that only the guest
       itself has access to the unencrypted version. Each encrypted VM is
       associated with a unique encryption key; if its data is accessed to a
       different entity using a different key the encrypted guests data will
       be incorrectly decrypted, leading to unintelligible data.

       For more information see various input parameters and its format see the SEV API spec
       <a href="https://support.amd.com/TechDocs/55766_SEV-KM%20API_Specification.pdf"> https://support.amd.com/TechDocs/55766_SEV-KM%20API_Specification.pdf </a>
       <span class="since">Since 4.4.0</span>
       </p>
    <pre>
&lt;domain&gt;
  ...
J
conf: prefer camelCase for launchSecurity  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8524 
  &lt;launchSecurity type='sev'&gt;
L
docs: Remove an extra space in the SEV xml element example  
Luyao Huang 已提交
8525 8526 8527 8528 8529 
    &lt;policy&gt;0x0001&lt;/policy&gt;
    &lt;cbitpos&gt;47&lt;/cbitpos&gt;
    &lt;reducedPhysBits&gt;1&lt;/reducedPhysBits&gt;
    &lt;dhCert&gt;RBBBSDDD=FDDCCCDDDG&lt;/dhCert&gt;
    &lt;session&gt;AAACCCDD=FFFCCCDSDS&lt;/session&gt;
J
conf: prefer camelCase for launchSecurity  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8530 
  &lt;/launchSecurity&gt;
B
conf: Introduce launch-security element in domain  
Brijesh Singh 已提交
8531 8532 8533 8534 8535 8536 8537 8538 8539 8540 8541 
  ...
&lt;/domain&gt;
</pre>

    <dl>
      <dt><code>cbitpos</code></dt>
      <dd>The required <code>cbitpos</code> element provides the C-bit (aka encryption bit)
      location in guest page table entry. The value of <code>cbitpos</code> is
      hypervisor dependent and can be obtained through the <code>sev</code> element
      from the domain capabilities.
      </dd>
J
conf: prefer camelCase for launchSecurity  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8542 8543 
      <dt><code>reducedPhysBits</code></dt>
      <dd>The required <code>reducedPhysBits</code> element provides the physical
B
conf: Introduce launch-security element in domain  
Brijesh Singh 已提交
8544 8545 8546 8547 8548 8549 8550 8551 8552 8553 8554 8555 8556 8557 8558 8559 8560 8561 8562 8563 8564 8565 8566 8567 8568 8569 8570 8571 8572 8573 8574 8575 8576 8577 8578 8579 8580 8581 8582 8583 8584 8585 8586 8587 8588 8589 8590 8591 8592 8593 8594 8595 8596 8597 8598 8599 8600 8601 
      address bit reducation. Similar to <code>cbitpos</code> the value of <code>
      reduced-phys-bit</code> is hypervisor dependent and can be obtained
      through the <code>sev</code> element from the domain capabilities.
      </dd>
      <dt><code>policy</code></dt>
      <dd>The required <code>policy</code> element provides the guest policy
      which must be maintained by the SEV firmware. This policy is enforced by
      the firmware and restricts what configuration and operational commands
      can be performed on this guest by the hypervisor. The guest policy
      provided during guest launch is bound to the guest and cannot be changed
      throughout the lifetime of the guest. The policy is also transmitted
      during snapshot and migration flows and enforced on the destination platform.

      The guest policy is a 4 unsigned byte with the fields shown in Table:

      <table class="top_table">
        <tr>
          <th> Bit(s) </th>
          <th> Description </th>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 0 </td>
          <td> Debugging of the guest is disallowed when set </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 1 </td>
          <td> Sharing keys with other guests is disallowed when set </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 2 </td>
          <td> SEV-ES is required when set</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 3 </td>
          <td> Sending the guest to another platform is disallowed when set</td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 4 </td>
          <td> The guest must not be transmitted to another platform that is
               not in the domain when set. </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 5 </td>
          <td> The guest must not be transmitted to another platform that is
               not SEV capable when set. </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 6:15 </td>
          <td> reserved </td>
        </tr>
        <tr>
          <td> 16:32 </td>
          <td> The guest must not be transmitted to another platform with a
               lower firmware version. </td>
        </tr>
      </table>

      </dd>
J
conf: prefer camelCase for launchSecurity  
Ján Tomko 已提交
8602 8603 
      <dt><code>dhCert</code></dt>
      <dd>The optional <code>dhCert</code> element provides the guest owners
B
conf: Introduce launch-security element in domain  
Brijesh Singh 已提交
8604 8605 8606 8607 8608 8609 8610 8611 8612 8613 8614 8615 8616 
      base64 encoded Diffie-Hellman (DH) key. The key is used to negotiate a
      master secret key between the SEV firmware and guest owner. This master
      secret key is then used to establish a trusted channel between SEV
      firmware and guest owner.
      </dd>
      <dt><code>session</code></dt>
      <dd>The optional <code>session</code> element provides the guest owners
      base64 encoded session blob defined in the SEV API spec.

      See SEV spec LAUNCH_START section for the session blob format.
      </dd>
    </dl>
D
docs: switch to using 'id' attribute instead of 'name' for links  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8617 
    <h2><a id="examples">Example configs</a></h2>
D
Split website out into one file per page. APply new layout and styling  
Daniel P. Berrange 已提交
8618 8619 8620 8621 8622 8623 8624 8625 8626 8627 8628 8629 

    <p>
      Example configurations for each driver are provide on the
      driver specific pages listed below
    </p>

    <ul>
      <li><a href="drvxen.html#xmlconfig">Xen examples</a></li>
      <li><a href="drvqemu.html#xmlconfig">QEMU/KVM examples</a></li>
    </ul>
  </body>
</html>